JP2021007880A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To preferably achieve acceleration of processing speed for executing predetermined control.SOLUTION: A VDP 105 of a display control device 100 creates drawing data to a drawing area 135, based on a drawing instruction from a display CPU 102. Image data to be processed in creation of the drawing data is stored in a character ROM 106, in advance. The image data stored in the character ROM 106 is read to a bridge side RAM 107 and a VDP side RAM 108 via a bridge LSI 109, the VDP 105 processes the image data read by the RAM 107, RAM 108 for creating the drawing data. At the time, the VDP side RAM 108 has a common use area 137 for storing and holding a group of common use data used to a drawing instruction which is suddenly generated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. (See, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

JP-A-2007-7465

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of satisfactorily increasing the processing speed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the processing speed in executing a predetermined control. Is what you do.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes an effect executing means and
The first storage means that stores information in advance,
A control means for executing a control for executing an effect by the effect executing means based on the information stored in the first storage means, and a control means for executing the effect.
In a game machine equipped with
The first storage means stores arbitrary information used for executing arbitrary response control in the control means when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation.
The game machine includes a transfer means for storing arbitrary information read from the first storage means with respect to a second storage means whose speed required for reading information is faster than when reading from the first storage means.
The second storage means stores and retains the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues after the optional information is transferred.
When the specific event occurs, the control means executes the arbitrary response control using the optional information stored in the second storage means.
The game machine reads specific information used when the control means executes a specific control different from the arbitrary correspondence control from the first storage means, and stores the optional information of the second storage means. It is characterized in that it is provided with an overwriting means for overwriting an area including a part of the area.

According to the present invention, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing a predetermined control.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of the game board. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for explaining contents of various counters used for winning or failing lottery. The flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in MPU of a main control unit. A flowchart showing a reading process for abnormality monitoring. A flowchart showing normal processing. A flowchart showing a game time control process. A flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. A flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the opening / closing process of the winning opening. A block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to display control of a symbol display device. The block diagram for explaining the hardware structure of a character ROM. (A) A timing chart for explaining the state of transmission / reception between the write control unit and the controller when reading data from the character ROM, and (b) the state of transmission / reception between the controller and the NAND storage unit. Timing chart to explain. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the software structure of a character ROM. The flowchart which shows the main processing in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the initial setting process of the common data group in a bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the data transfer process in a bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the initial transfer processing in VDP. The flowchart which shows the setting process of drawing data in VDP. The flowchart which shows the output processing of the drawing signal in VDP. A timing chart showing the access timing of the write control unit and the bridge side RAM of the VDP. The flowchart which shows the normal process in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the game times control processing in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing by the simple symbol in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the process during change by the simple symbol in a display CPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining the state of variable display using a simple symbol. A timing chart for explaining the state of display control after the power is turned on. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing by a normal symbol in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the display table in a display CPU. (A) to (d) Explanatory drawing showing various tables stored in the variable display table storage area, (e) explanatory diagram showing various tables stored in the jackpot effect table storage area. An explanatory diagram for explaining a display table when a jackpot effect is not performed after the effect for game rounds. An explanatory diagram for explaining a display table when a jackpot effect is performed after the effect for game rounds. The flowchart which shows the process during change by a normal symbol in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the operation correspondence processing in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the drawing list in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the data transfer instruction processing in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the data transfer setting process in a bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the overwrite process in VDP. The flowchart which shows the data transfer setting process for return in a bridge LSI. The flowchart which shows the return processing in VDP. An explanatory diagram for explaining how various data groups are transferred as the production progresses. The flowchart which shows the effect control processing for the 15R probability variation jackpot in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the start effect post-processing in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the effect control process for explicit 2R probability variation jackpot in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the abnormality notification control processing in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the standby image control processing in a display CPU. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the initial setting process in 5th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the abnormality notification control processing in 6th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of simple display in 7th Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 8th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of drawing data in VDP. The flowchart which shows the output processing of the drawing signal in VDP. The flowchart which shows the main processing in the display CPU in 9th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of drawing data in VDP. Explanatory drawing for explaining drawing list information. The flowchart which shows the data transfer instruction processing in a display CPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a tenth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and the back pack unit is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port (first starting ball entry section) 23, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry section) 24, a through gate 25, and a variable display unit 26. The main display unit 33, the accessory display unit 34, and the like are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result.

In addition, an out opening 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the out opening 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 27, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 22, the upper operation port 23, the lower operation port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 23 faces upward. The lower operating port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric accessory 24a is opened (supported state or guided state), so that the lower operating port is opened. It is possible to win a prize in 24.

The variable winning device 22 is provided with a large winning opening 22a leading to the back side of the game board 20, and is also provided with an opening / closing door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The opening / closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and a predetermined opening / closing door 22b is likely to win the game ball when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) as one round. There is an aspect to be done.

The main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are provided on the decorative member 29 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 29 extends forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 20. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 29 faces the window panel 53 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, with the window panel 53. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 29.

The main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 29. That is, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 53 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 33 and 34. It is prevented from falling.

In the main display unit 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the winning of the lower operating port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 33, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After being displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a plurality of patterns are displayed. It is conceivable that the seed colors are switched and displayed.

In the accessory display unit 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 25 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operating port 24 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 26, a center frame 32 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper part of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 31, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 31 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. That is, when the main display unit 33 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 31 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 31 presets the opening / closing execution mode for the game to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 is opened 15 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

By the way, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 23 and 24, the fluctuation display is started on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the fluctuation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game.

A first holding lamp unit 35 corresponding to the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided on the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 35.

A second holding lamp unit 36 corresponding to the accessory display unit 34 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 32. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is held is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 36. It should be noted that the functions of the holding lamp units 35 and 36 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 31.

Here, the game board 20 is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 38 as an abnormality detecting means. The magnetic detection sensor 38 is installed on the back side of the game board 20 around the upper operating port 23. As described above, the internal lottery for whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode is performed with the winning of the upper operating port 23 as a trigger. An act of guiding the game ball to the mouth 23 is assumed. On the other hand, since the magnetic detection sensor 38 is provided, it is possible to detect when a fraudulent act using the magnet is performed. The magnetic detection sensor 38 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor 38 is input to the main control device. Then, when the main control device identifies a fraudulent act using a magnet based on the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor 38, the main control device executes a process for performing an abnormality notification. The content of the abnormality notification and the specific processing content will be described in detail later.

The position of the magnetic detection sensor 38 is not limited to the above, and for example, in order to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally win a prize in the general winning opening 21 using the magnet. The magnetic detection sensor 38 may be arranged around the general winning opening 21.

An inner rail portion 41 and an outer rail portion 42 are attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42, and is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the game ball launch mechanism, the game ball launch operation is performed by operating the launch handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 53 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 53 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 52. An indicator lamp portion 54 is provided above the window portion 52 as a part of the various lamp portions. Further, on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp unit 54, speaker units 55 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 52 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 56a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 56, and a lower plate 57a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 57. The upper plate 56a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 57a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a.

In the region of the upper bulging portion 56 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 58 including an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 58 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect content on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 or the like a predetermined effect content.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display mode on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 58. Specifically, a plurality of types (for example, two types) of background images are set in the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed. The background image can be switched by operating the effect operation device 58 in a situation where the game rotation or the opening / closing execution mode is not executed. Further, based on the fact that the effect operation device 58 is operated under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game round is being executed, the image corresponding to the operation is displayed on the symbol display device 31.

A main control device, an audio lamp control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a launch control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. In the main control device 60, the board box accommodating the main control board 61 and the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded together, and a joint portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation thereof is formed, or an adhesive layer is peeled off and adhered to an adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In this case, a power supply and a launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power are connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

Further, various sensors such as a magnetic detection sensor 38 and various prize detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The magnetic detection determination is performed in the MPU 62 based on the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor 38. Further, the various prize detection sensors 67a to 67e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning ball portions corresponding to winning such as the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, and the through gate 25. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 62, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, and the support generating lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 25.

A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a voice lamp control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 70 based on the result of winning determination to the prize-winning ball winning unit. In this case, the command information storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to when the prize ball command is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the voice lamp control device 90. In this case, the command information storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 22c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric accessory driving unit 24b that opens and closes the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24, and a main display unit. 33 and the display unit 34 for the accessory are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c is executed in the MPU 62 so that the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory 24a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 24b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 62.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply and the launch control device 80, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and the launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power supply and launch control device 80 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 80 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice lamp control device 90 drives and controls various lamp units 35, 36, 54 and speaker units 55 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 60, and the display control device 100. Is to control. Further, the effect operation device 58 is connected to the voice lamp control device 90, and the control of the display lamp unit 54, the speaker unit 55, and the display control device 100 is based on the manual operation of the effect operation device 58. I have something to do. The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 31 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 90.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine kinds of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. To.

Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where a predetermined combination of symbols different from the combination of the same symbols is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

<About various counters and reserved ball storage area>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 33, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 31, a display setting of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery for generating jackpots, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. Reach occurrence when the symbol display device 31 deviates and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31. A fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 64a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as acquired information when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 can be reserved and stored. Further, the hold area RE is provided with a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA is used to specify the number of winning histories stored in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. Information is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 33, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (win / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 63a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 63. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the lower after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing a difference in three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode is high so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high-frequency time). ) Has elapsed, or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (low frequency use) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Is continued or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch handle 51 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit (or opening restriction period) for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are set in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode, the value is not limited to the above value. It is optional. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is long, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 22 is not substantially won in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number may be set longer than the opening limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 22.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24, the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time is relatively high and low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening. The time is set long. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 24a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 24a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 24 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 23 is higher than that of the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is more likely than the upper operating port 23. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shorten the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 34), shorten the average time of the secured time, and increase the winning probability, and apply any one condition or any combination of conditions. This may increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the winning / failing lottery and the distribution lottery) is the distribution table (distribution information) in the distribution table storage area 63b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 63. It is remembered as a group). Then, as such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result), an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability correspondence game result or a result of sudden probability change state), and a 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability). Corresponding special game result) is set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the mode of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. In the mode, the low frequency winning mode is set, but in the support mode, the high frequency support mode is set, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, as a kind of probability change jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. The result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot (the result of the unspecified high probability corresponding game or the result of the latent probability variation state) may be included. In this case, the probabilistic jackpot results will be further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the winning / failing result in the winning / failing lottery, a special losing result that shifts to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode and does not cause the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the end may be included. .. In the configuration in which both the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result are set as described above, the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, for example, when either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special deviation result occurs in the normal game state, it is determined. It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is a symbol display device 31 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the variable display is displayed in a game in which the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is a high frequency winning mode. In a gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started. It is a display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that tends to be a special display result.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display or a special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode can be obtained by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol sequence. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , The combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbol, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbol, a high frequency winning mode is generated on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may form a corresponding jackpot symbol combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. To do.

More specifically, the display contents of FIG. 5 will be described in a state where the variable display of the symbols is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the symbols is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. It becomes a reach display by being told. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol is finished.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol rows. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63. Executed if there is. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 60, but by the display control device 100. This will be described in detail later.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 33 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the main display unit 33 and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 31.

The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

As described above, in the MPU 62, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the main display unit 33, and the variation display time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is used for the determination. Be done.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 62 in the main control device 60 will be described. In the MPU 62, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 62 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. The reading process includes a process of reading the states of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e, determining the states of the various winning detection sensors 67a to 67e, and storing the winning detection information. Further, the reading process includes a reading process for abnormality monitoring for executing control corresponding to the state of the magnetic detection sensor 38.

Here, the reading process for abnormality monitoring will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the magnetic detection sensor 38 is ON. If it is determined that it is not ON, in step S202, the information of the abnormality detection counter in the various counter areas 64d of the main control device 60 is set in the abnormality reference number of times information. Specifically, the information of the abnormality detection counter is set to "2".

The information set in the abnormality detection counter is updated when it is determined that the magnetic detection sensor 38 is ON. That is, when the magnetic detection sensor 38 is ON, an affirmative determination is made in step S201, and the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, the information of the abnormality detection counter is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the information of the abnormality detection counter is "0". If the information of the abnormality detection counter is not "0", the main reading process is terminated as it is. When the information of the abnormality detection counter is "0", the abnormality detection flag is stored in the abnormality detection flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the main control device 60 in step S208. By the way, storing the flag means storing the information of "1" in the area for the flag. This also applies to other flags.

After that, the abnormality identification command is set in step S209, and the main reading process is terminated. The abnormality identification command set in step S209 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in the external output process in the normal process described later. Upon receiving the abnormality identification command, the voice lamp control device 90 starts abnormality notification through the indicator lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 controls the display control device 100 so that the symbol display device 31 executes the abnormality notification.

The state in which the abnormality detection flag is stored as described above is released when it is determined that the magnetic detection sensor 38 is not ON. That is, after determining that it is not ON (step S201: YES) and executing the process of step S202, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the abnormality detection flag is stored. If the abnormality detection flag is not stored, the main reading process is terminated as it is. If the abnormality detection flag is stored, the abnormality detection flag is deleted in step S204. By the way, erasing the flag means changing the information of "1" stored in the area for the flag to the information of "0". This also applies to other flags.

After that, in step S205, the abnormality release command is set, and the main reading process is terminated. The abnormality release command set in step S205 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in the external output process in the normal process described later. By receiving the abnormality release command, the voice lamp control device 90 ends the abnormality notification performed through the indicator lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 controls the display control device 100 so as to end the abnormality notification performed by the symbol display device 31.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7), after executing the read process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the through gate 25. In the through winning process, when the through gate 25 has been won, the number of winnings held in the electric service holding area 64c is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On condition that, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c. In addition, the voice lamp control device 90 is subjected to a process for lighting the second hold lamp unit 36 of the variable display unit 26 corresponding to the number of reserved items held.

In the following step S105, a winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the number of start-holding storages stored in the holding ball storage area 64b is the upper limit number (for example, ". 4 ”) The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 64b on condition that the value is less than the above. In this case, it is stored in the first hold area of the free hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE, that is, the hold area corresponding to the current number of start hold storages. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 is subjected to a process for lighting the first hold lamp unit 35 of the variable display unit 26 corresponding to the start hold storage number. After executing the process of step S105, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S301 to S307 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S309 and S310 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when an effect command such as a variation command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90.

In the following step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

In the following step S303, the game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, a jackpot determination, a setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 31, and a display control of the main display unit 33 are performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later.

After that, in step S304, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In the following step S305, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operating port 24 is executed. In this electric service support process, the information stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a, open / close processing of the electric accessory 24a, and for the accessory. Display control of the display unit 34 and the like are performed.

After that, in step S306, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 80. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S307, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the RAM 64. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached in step S308, that is, the previous normal processing It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S310, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S307 that the power failure flag is stored, the power supply is cut off, so the power failure processing after step S311 is executed. That is, in step S311, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S312, access to the RAM 64 is prohibited in step S313, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game rotation control process in step S303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game time control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S403 to S405 and the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409. Time Control processing ends. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 23 and 24 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started on the main display unit 33, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If the main display unit 33 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S403 to S405. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 64b is referred to, and whether or not the start hold storage number N, which is the number of hold information held and stored, is “0”. Is determined. When the start hold storage number N is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is not "0", the data setting process is executed in step S404.

In the data setting process, first, the start hold storage number N is subtracted by 1. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 64b is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such that the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3.

In the data setting process, a process for causing the voice lamp control device 90 to recognize that the hold information has been shifted and changing the display in the first hold lamp unit 35 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds is executed. To do.

After the data setting process is executed, the variation start process is executed in step S405, and then the game turn control process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode is referred to among the tables stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a, and the hit / miss determination information among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to among the tables stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a for the low probability mode. Judges whether or not matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

In the following step S502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S501 is the jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, the type determination process is executed in step S503.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b, it is specified which jackpot type the information related to the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in the type determination process of step S503 corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. When it corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the jackpot type corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

If it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the 15R probability variation jackpot is executed in step S506, and if it is a probability variation jackpot result but not a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it is specified in step S507. Executes the stop result setting process for. If it is not the probability variation jackpot result (step S504: NO), the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S508. Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination process in step S501 is not the jackpot winning result, the stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed in step S509.

In the stop result setting process of steps S506 to S509, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is specified from the information stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. To do. Further, in step S506, step S507 and step S508, the RAM 64 provides information for specifying in the MPU 62 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. Store in. Specifically, the 15R probability variation flag is stored in step S506, the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in step S507, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S508.

After executing any of the processes of steps S506 to S509, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S510.

In such a process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 31 in this game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 15R probability variation flag, the explicit 2R probability variation flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If any of the flags is stored, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the reach occurrence, the reach display is displayed. Judge that it occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The time information is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the value of the variation type counter CS this time corresponds to the value of the variation display time table for non-reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 63c. The fluctuation display time is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter.

The variation display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the variation display time becomes shorter as the number of start hold storage numbers N increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the number of start-holding balls N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the variation display time table is set individually for each of the case of the out-reach case and the case of the complete deviation. May be good. In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S510, the variation command and the type command are set in step S511. The fluctuation command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 15R probability variation jackpot result, information on the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the deviation result, and the like as the game result information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S511 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The voice lamp control device 90 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 54 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 55 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and the content of the determined effect. Controls the indicator lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 so that Further, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the fluctuation command and the type command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 determines the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 31 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and sets the symbol display device 31 so that the variation display pattern is executed. Display control. The specific contents of the display control will be described later.

After the process of step S511 is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S512. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 10), when the main display unit 33 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed.

In the game round progress process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter of the RAM 64 is "0". As described above, the value of the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time setting process (step S510). Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S408. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 64 is specified in any of the processes of steps S506 to S509, and the main display is displayed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Display control of unit 33.

In the following step S409, a variable end command is set. This set variable end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The voice lamp control device 90 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the change end command, the display control device 100 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 33 of one game round is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 15R probability variation flag, the explicit 2R probability variation flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S604. In the start processing, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the large winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 63 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. In this case, the waiting time information set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information is different in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be short. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 sec, and in the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the standby time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is executed.

In the following step S605, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. In the case of not the high frequency winning mode, that is, the low frequency winning mode, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in step S606. The round counter RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 22a is opened. On the other hand, in the high frequency winning mode, "15" is set in the round counter RC in step S607.

After executing the process of step S606 or step S607, after setting the opening command in step S608, the game state transition process ends. The opening command set in step S608 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). This opening command contains information on whether it is a high frequency winning mode or a low frequency winning mode.

The voice lamp control device 90 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 54 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 55 in the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and executes the determined effect content. The indicator lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 are controlled in this way. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 31 to start an effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command. The specific contents of the display control will be described later.

On the other hand, if the open / close execution mode is in progress (step S601: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S610. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 22a is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 22c. When the large winning opening 22a is not open, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0", and in step S703, the timer T provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 It is determined whether or not the value is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or the value of the timer T is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer T is "0", the process proceeds to step S704, and the variable winning drive unit 22c is set to the driving state in order to open the large winning opening 22a. To do.

In the following step S705, the setting process for each round is executed. In the setting process for each round, it is first determined whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set, and if the high-frequency winning mode is set, the timer T is set to "15000" (that is, 30 sec). The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Further, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 22a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is not in the high frequency winning mode, that is, in the low frequency winning mode, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer T, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ..

After that, the opening command is set in step S706, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The voice lamp control device 90 changes the effect contents in the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the received release command. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 switches the effect for the open / close execution mode in the symbol display device 31 based on the received release command. The specific contents of the display control will be described later.

On the other hand, when the large winning opening 22a is open (step S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S707 to determine whether or not the value of the timer T is “0”. If the value of the timer T is not "0", it is determined in step S708 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 22a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 22. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter area PC is subtracted by 1 in step S709, and then it is determined in step S710 whether or not the value of the prize counter area PC is "0". If it is not, the process of opening and closing the winning opening of the main prize is terminated as it is.

When the value of the timer T is "0" in step S707, or when the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S710, it means that the large winning opening closing condition is satisfied. In such a case, the variable winning drive unit 22c is put into a non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 22a in step S711.

In the following step S712, the value of the round counter RC is subtracted by 1, and in step S713, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", it is determined in step S714 whether or not the high frequency winning mode is set.

In the high frequency winning mode, the timer T is set to "1000" (that is, 2 sec), and in the low frequency winning mode, the timer T is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 22a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high-frequency winning mode. After that, the closing command is set in step S717, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

This set closing command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). The voice lamp control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 22a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 22a for one round has been completed, and executes the corresponding processing. The specific contents of such processing will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 12), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S610, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0", and the step In S612, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the ending effect is executed by the symbol display device 31 or the like, and the waiting time for the ending is the ending effect. Is a period for waiting for the start of the next game round in the main control device 60 until the end of the game.

If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the ending command is set in step S613. The ending command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 9). Based on the received ending command, the voice lamp control device 90 ends the effect for the open / close execution mode in the indicator lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the ending command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 ends the effect for the open / close execution mode in the symbol display device 31 based on the received ending command. The specific contents of the display control will be described later.

In the following step S614, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the transition process, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag, the explicit 2R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. When the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and the normal jackpot flag is stored. The winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

By the way, when the normal jackpot flag is stored, the end reference number "100" is set in the game number counter in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time the above-mentioned fluctuation start process is executed, and when the value of the game count counter becomes "0", the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S615, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, if any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored, it is deleted and the state is maintained if it is not already stored. To do.

<Electrical configuration related to display control of the symbol display device 31>
Next, the electrical configuration related to the display control of the symbol display device 31 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice lamp control board 91 provided in the voice lamp control device 90. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The effect operation device 58 and the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various lamp units 35, 36, 54, the speaker unit 55, and the display control device 100 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. There is.

The MPU 92 is a game turn control command (game turn control information) such as a variation command, a type command, and a change end command, and a jackpot production command (big hit production) such as an opening command, an ending command, an opening command, and a closing command. Information) is received from the main control device 60, and various lamp units 35, 36, 54 and the speaker unit 55 are driven and controlled based on the received commands.

Further, the MPU 92 transmits each of the above commands received from the main control device 60 to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Further, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the operation generation signal is received from the effect operation device 58, thereby determining whether or not the effect operation device 58 is being operated, and is operated. If it is determined to be present, an operation occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 100.

The display control device 100 is equipped with a display CPU 102, a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, a bridge side RAM 107, a VDP side RAM 108, and a bridge LSI 109, respectively. A display control board 101 is provided.

The display CPU 102 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 100. Specifically, the display CPU 102 is connected to the input port 111 mounted on the display control board 101 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 90 are input to the display CPU 102 through the input port 111. Will be done. Further, the display CPU 102 is connected to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 via a bus.

The program ROM 103 is a control non-volatile storage unit for storing control information such as various control programs executed by the display CPU 102 and fixed value data. The program ROM 103 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, a NOR type flash memory is used. The storage capacity is 256 Mbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 102 is satisfactorily executed. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 103a to 103e of the program ROM 103. Details of each of these areas 103a to 103e will be described when the process executed by the display CPU 102 is described.

The work RAM 104 is a control volatile storage unit for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the display CPU 102. The work RAM 104 is a volatile semiconductor memory, and a DRAM is used in detail. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 64 Mbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display CPU 102 is satisfactorily executed. The work data, flags, and the like are stored in the areas 104a to 104d of the work RAM 104. Details of each of these areas 104a to 104d will be described when the process executed by the display CPU 102 is described.

The display CPU 102 uses the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 to execute arithmetic processing based on various commands received from the voice lamp control device 90. Further, the display CPU 102 is connected to the bridge LSI 109 via the first bus 112 and is connected to the VDP 105 via the second bus 113. Then, the display CPU 102 performs control to give a predetermined instruction to the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 as a result of the above arithmetic processing.

The bridge LSI 109 has a function of transferring the data stored in the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 based on the instruction from the display CPU 102. Specifically, the bridge LSI 109 includes a write control unit 121, an input / output driver circuit 122, and a cache buffer 123. The write control unit 121 has a control ROM 124 and a control RAM 125, and has a function of executing various arithmetic processes in the bridge LSI 109. Further, the write control unit 121 is connected to the character ROM 106 via the third bus 126, and is also connected to the bridge side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122 and the fourth bus 127. The third bus 126 is composed of a 32-bit bus line, and the fourth bus 127 is composed of a 32-bit bus line.

The character ROM 106 is a non-volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 31 and background data. The character ROM 106 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory, and more particularly, a NAND flash memory. The storage capacity is 16 Gbits due to the provision of two 8 Gbit NAND flash memories as the character ROM 106. The character ROM 106 stores and holds bitmap format image data of various characters, a color palette table to be referred to when determining a display color at each dot of the bitmap image, and a JPEG format for a background image. Image data is stored and retained. The character ROM 106 is used as a non-write and read-only memory when display control is performed by the display control device 100.

The bridge-side RAM 107 is a volatile storage unit for image data (image information) for temporarily storing and holding the data stored and held in the character ROM 106 for reading the data in the VDP 105. The bridge-side RAM 107 is a VRAM (video RAM) made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, SDRAM is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Since four 256 M-bit SDRAMs are provided as the bridge-side RAM 107, the storage capacity is about 1 G-bit. That is, the storage capacity of the bridge-side RAM 107 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106.

The write control unit 121 is connected to the cache buffer 123, transfers image data from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 based on an instruction from the display CPU 102, and transfers the image data after being transferred to the cache buffer 123. Write to the bridge side RAM 107 at a predetermined timing.

The cache buffer 123 is a volatile semiconductor memory, and its storage capacity is set to a storage capacity capable of sufficiently storing unit data in the character ROM 106. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, the unit data in the character ROM 106 is 4 Kbytes, and the storage capacity of the cache buffer 123 is 5 Kbytes corresponding to the unit data. That is, the storage capacity of the cache buffer 123 is set so that one unit data can be stored, but a plurality of unit data cannot be stored. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily temporarily store and retain the unit data while suppressing the storage capacity of the cache buffer 123.

The VDP 105 has a control ROM 131 and a control RAM 132, and specifically processes the data using the data stored and held in the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108 based on the instruction by the display CPU 102. It has a function of performing drawing processing on the symbol display device 31. Specifically, the VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit (drawing means or drawing control unit) that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 105 is connected to the input / output driver circuit 122 of the bridge LSI 109 via the fifth bus 133, and can access the bridge side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122. Further, the VDP 105 outputs a predetermined signal such as a non-access signal or a save status signal, which will be described later, to the write control unit 121 via the fifth bus 133 and the input / output driver circuit 122. The fifth bus 133 is composed of a 32-bit bus line.

By the way, the input / output driver circuit 122 is interposed between the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105, and is interposed between the bridge side RAM 107 for both the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105. In this case, a control signal is appropriately output from the write control unit 121 to the input / output driver circuit 122, and which route the data is transferred to is switched. By interposing the input / output driver circuit 122 in this way, the VDP 105 accesses the bridge side RAM 107 without going through the write control unit 121, so that the data read speed from the bridge side RAM 107 can be increased. At the same time, since it is not necessary to individually connect the VDP 105 to each of the write control unit 121 and the bridge side RAM 107, the effect of increasing the read speed can be achieved while reducing the number of wires.

The VDP 105 is connected to the VDP side RAM 108 via the sixth bus 134. Similar to the bridge-side RAM 107, the VDP-side RAM 108 is an image data (image information) volatile storage unit for temporarily storing and holding the data stored and held in the character ROM 106 for reading the data in the VDP 105. The VDP-side RAM 108 is a VRAM (video RAM) made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and in detail, SDRAM is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 512 Mbits because two 256 Mbit SDRAMs are provided as the VDP side RAM 108. That is, the storage capacity of the VDP-side RAM 108 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106, and is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge-side RAM 107.

The VDP 105 transfers data from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108. That is, the data is not directly transferred from the character ROM 106 to the VDP side RAM 108, but the data once transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 is transferred to the VDP side RAM 108.

The VDP 105 accesses the bridge side RAM 107 or the VDP side RAM 108 while adjusting the processing timing of the write control unit 121 based on the instruction by the display CPU 102, and provides drawing data corresponding to the instruction by the display CPU 102 in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105. Create in the drawing area 135. The drawing area 135 can store data for one frame in the symbol display device 31. Further, the VDP 105 is connected to an output port 136 mounted on the display control board 101, and the output port 136 is connected to the symbol display device 31. Then, the VDP 105 outputs a drawing signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data stored in the drawing area 135, and displays a predetermined image on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. The drawing area 135 is configured to be capable of storing data for a plurality of frames, so that data for the next frame can be stored in advance while outputting a drawing signal for a predetermined frame to the symbol display device 31. You may.

By using the NAND flash memory as the character ROM 106 as described above, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, by using the NAND flash memory, rewriting can be repeated at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed. It can also be recycled. However, the NAND type flash memory has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR type flash memory. For example, the NOR type flash memory has 360 Mbit / sec, while the NAND flash memory has 60 Mbit / sec.

On the other hand, since the RAMs for reading such as the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108 are provided as described above, necessary data can be read out to these RAMs 107 and 108 in advance. Therefore, at the drawing timing in the VDP 105, the drawing data in the VDP 105 can be satisfactorily created by reading from the bridge side RAM 107 or the VDP side RAM 108 instead of the character ROM 106.

The sum of the storage capacities of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 is about 1.5 Gbits, while the storage capacity of the character ROM 106 is 16 Gbits as described above. By making the storage capacity on the RAM 107, 108 side smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106 in this way, the storage capacity of the RAM 107, 108 can be suppressed, and the above effect can be achieved while suppressing the manufacturing cost. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the storage capacity on the RAM 107, 108 side is smaller than the storage capacity on the character ROM 106, it is necessary to appropriately switch the image data to be read into the RAM 107, 108, but the display CPU 102, the VDP 105, and the write control unit 121 display the image data. The process for performing good switching is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

If the storage capacity of the character ROM 106 is larger than the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108, the specific storage capacities of the respective characters are arbitrary. Further, the individual storage capacity and the number of memories of each memory constituting the character ROM 106 are arbitrary, and the independent storage capacity and the number of memories of each memory constituting the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108 are also arbitrary.

Here, of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108, the VDP-side RAM 108 is set with a regular area 137. Of the various image data stored in the character ROM 106, the image data corresponding to a sudden drawing instruction that may occur in the display CPU 102 is stored in the regular area 137, and the image data stored in the regular area 137 is stored. Will basically be resident.

Specifically, the regular data group stored in the regular area 137 is stored and retained as long as the situation in which the drawing instruction of the corresponding image can be generated continues. Further, even if a drawing instruction of the corresponding image is generated and the image is displayed once, the memory is retained in a situation where a new drawing instruction may be subsequently generated. Furthermore, at least a part of the regular data group is stored and retained until a predetermined erasing condition is satisfied, even if it is no longer possible to generate a drawing instruction of the corresponding image. Since the regular area 137 is provided, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly given from the display CPU 102, the VDP 105 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the regular area 137. it can.

<Specific configuration of character ROM 106>
Next, a specific configuration of the character ROM 106 will be described.

FIG. 15 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the character ROM 106. As shown in FIG. 15A, the character ROM 106 is connected to the write control unit 121 mounted on the bridge LSI 109, and the character ROM 106 includes a NAND type storage unit 142 including a controller 141 and a NAND type flash memory in one package. It is configured by NAND.

The write control unit 121 includes a CE terminal, a WE terminal, an OE terminal, an ADDR terminal, and a DATA terminal, and the NAND type storage unit 142 has a CE terminal, a WE terminal, a RE terminal, a CLE terminal, an ALE terminal, and an I / O. It has a terminal.

The controller 141 is provided with a HCE (HOST CHIP ENABLE) terminal, a HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal, a HOE (HOST OUTPUT ENABLE) terminal, an ADDR terminal, and a DATA terminal on the write control unit 121 side, and the HCE terminal is write control. The CE terminal of the unit 121, the HOE terminal is connected to the OE terminal of the write control unit 121, and the ADDR terminal and the DATA terminal are connected to the ADDR terminal and the DATA terminal of the write control unit 121, respectively. The HWE terminal is set to a state in which the power supply voltage Vcc is constantly applied and pulled up.

Further, the NAND type storage unit 142 is provided with an FCE (FLASH CHIP ENABLE) terminal, a FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal, a FRE (FLASH READ ENABLE) terminal, a CLE terminal, an ALE terminal, and an I / O terminal. The terminal is the CE terminal of the NAND storage unit 142, the FWE terminal is the WE terminal of the NAND type storage unit 142, the FRE terminal is the RE terminal of the NAND type storage unit 142, and the CLE terminal is the CLE terminal of the NAND type storage unit 142. , The ALE terminal is connected to the ALE terminal of the NAND type storage unit 142, and the I / O terminal is connected to the I / O terminal of the NAND type storage unit 142.

FIG. 15B is a block diagram of the controller 141. The controller 141 includes a main body side interface unit 151 that transmits / receives data to / from the write control unit 121, a storage side interface unit 152 that transmits / receives data to / from the NAND type storage unit 142, and data received from the write control unit 121. CPU 154, ROM 155 and RAM 156, NAND, which are control units that temporarily store data to be transmitted to the write control unit 121, data control processing of the controller 141, and defective block management of the NAND type storage unit 142. An error correction circuit 157 that detects an error in the data read from the type storage unit 142 and corrects the detected error is provided.

FIG. 16A is a timing chart for explaining a state of transmission / reception between the write control unit 121 and the controller 141 when reading data from the character ROM 106. The output signal from the CE terminal of the write control unit 121 becomes LOW, the signal is output from the OE terminal at a predetermined timing, and the signal strings CMD0 and ADDR0 corresponding to the command data and the address data are synchronized from the ADDR terminal in synchronization with the timing. ~ 4, CMD1 is output. When the controller 141 receives these signal sequences, it outputs a signal sequence DUMMY corresponding to the corresponding dummy data from the DATA terminal. The write control unit 121 does not use the dummy data received by the DATA terminal because it is not the read data. The controller 141 stores the command data and the address data received via the ADDR terminal in the buffer memory unit 153.

FIG. 16B is a timing chart for explaining a state of transmission / reception between the controller 141 and the NAND type storage unit 142. When the command data and the address data are stored in the buffer memory unit 153 as described above, the controller 141 outputs a signal from the CLE terminal and the FCE terminal and outputs a signal from the FWE terminal at a predetermined timing. Then, the ALE terminal is set to HIGH, and the command data and the address data are transmitted from the I / O terminal in synchronization with the timing of the signal output from the FWE terminal.

In this case, the CPU 154 processes in advance so as to write data to the block area to be substituted for the bad block based on the information about the bad block area in the NAND type storage unit 142, and creates an address management table for that purpose. .. Therefore, when the address data is received from the write control unit 121, the address data of the block area corresponding to the received address data based on the address management data is transmitted from the I / O terminal.

When the NAND type storage unit 142 receives the command data and the address data to the I / O terminal, the NAND type storage unit 142 performs a data reading process of the corresponding address area based on these data as in the conventional case. As shown in FIG. 16B, the read data is output from the controller 141 to the RE terminal at a predetermined timing and transmitted from the I / O terminal to the controller 141 in synchronization with the timing. become.

When the controller 141 receives the data read to the I / O terminal, the controller 141 saves the data in the buffer memory unit 153 and chucks the data error by the error correction circuit 157, and if an error is detected, corrects the error. Perform processing.

The data for which a data error has been checked is stored in the buffer memory unit 153, and as shown in FIG. 16A, a signal is output from the OE terminal of the write control unit 121 at a predetermined timing, and the buffer memory unit 153 is output from the ADDR terminal. When the read command signal READ of the data in the data is transmitted, the data DATAN to N + 2 stored in the buffer memory unit 153 are transmitted from the DATA terminal correspondingly.

As described above, the read processing of the data DATAN to N + 2 stored in the NAND type storage unit 142 corresponding to the address data ADDR 0 to 4 is performed, and the stored data can be sequentially read by repeating this read processing. it can.

The NAND flash memory used as the NAND type storage unit 142 inputs a write command signal to the WE terminal, transmits command data and address data to the I / O terminal, and inputs a latch signal to the ALE terminal when reading data. By doing so, the command data and the address data are stored in the NAND flash memory, and the read operation is performed in the memory. When the input of the write command signal is indispensable when reading the data in this way, it is assumed that the contents stored in the NAND type storage unit 142 are illegally modified.

As an unauthorized modification, for example, the image data of the abnormality notification image that will be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 when an abnormality such as an abnormality is detected is rewritten with image data corresponding to a normal image different from the abnormality notification image. As a result, it is assumed that when the pachinko machine 10 is cheated, the abnormality notification cannot be performed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31.

On the other hand, the controller 141 is interposed between the write control unit 121 and the NAND type storage unit 142, and the FWE terminal of the controller 141 is set to the WE of the NAND type storage unit 142 while the HWE terminal of the controller 141 is in the pull-up state. By connecting to the terminal, a pseudo write command signal is input to the NAND type storage unit 142 while substantially disabling the input of the write command signal from the outside of the controller 141. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the data in the NAND storage unit 142 while making it possible to read the data from the NAND storage unit 142 satisfactorily.

Next, the software configuration of the character ROM 106 will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the software configuration of the character ROM 106.

The NAND type storage unit 142 of the character ROM 106 has a large number of unit areas for storing unit data. By the way, the capacity of the unit data is 4 Kbytes as described above, but the capacity is not limited to this and is arbitrary. Unit data is individually stored for each of the large number of unit areas. Then, a data group for displaying an image pattern to be displayed on the symbol display device 31 over a predetermined period is configured by the unit data of a predetermined combination, and one for a plurality of types of image patterns. Data groups are set in a one-to-one correspondence.

The plurality of types of data groups include an inspection data group, an initial display data group, an abnormality notification data group, a simple symbol data group, a first background data group, and a normal symbol data group. 2nd background data group, notice A data group, notice B data group, normal reach data group, super reach A data group, super reach B data group, 15R probability variation jackpot data group , The normal jackpot data group, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group are at least set.

The inspection data group is a data group for displaying an inspection image (for example, an image for displaying a predetermined color) on the symbol display device 31 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. By the way, the inspection image is an image for checking the operation of the symbol display device 31 at the time of factory shipment of the pachinko machine 10.

In the initial display data group, a part or all of the initial display image (for example, the game machine manufacturer name, the model and model of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed after the inspection image is displayed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is a data group for displaying an image).

The abnormality notification data group is a data group for displaying a notification image (for example, an image including the characters "abnormality has occurred !!") when an abnormality is detected.

The simple symbol data group is a data group for performing a simple symbol variation display in a situation where the variation display by the normal symbol cannot be performed in the game round.

The first background data group and the second background data group are data groups for displaying a background image in a situation where variable display by a normal symbol is performed. In this case, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the display mode is switched according to the operation of the effect operation device 58, and the first background data group is the background corresponding to the first display mode. It is a data group for displaying an image, and the second background data group is a data group for displaying a background image corresponding to the second display mode.

The normal symbol data group is a data group for displaying a normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol includes nine types of main symbols and one type of sub symbol, and a data group corresponding to each symbol is set.

The data group for the notice A and the data group for the notice B are data groups for displaying an image of the notice display which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game. In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of notice displays are set in different display modes, specifically, two types of notice A and notice B, and a data group is set corresponding to each notice display. ing.

The normal reach data group is a data group for displaying an image of the normal reach display among the reach displays which is a kind of expected effect in the middle of the game round.

The data group for super reach A and the data group for super reach B are data groups for displaying an image of the super reach display among the reach displays which are a kind of expected effects during the game round. By the way, the super reach display is a reach display for expecting the player to generate a jackpot result more than in the case of the normal reach display, and when the super reach display occurs, the normal reach display is used. In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach display are set in different display modes, specifically, two types, super reach A and super reach B, and data corresponding to each super reach display are set. The group is set.

Here, in the super reach B, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is executed. Therefore, the super reach B data group includes an image data group to be displayed according to the operation of the effect operating device 58. Furthermore, the mode of the effect is set to be different depending on whether the operation device 58 for the effect is operated in a predetermined mode or the operation is not performed in the predetermined mode. Therefore, in the data group for Super Reach B, a data group for displaying an image of the effect when the operation is performed in a predetermined mode and an image of the effect when the operation is not performed in the predetermined mode are displayed. Contains a set of data to display.

The 15R probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 31 during the opening / closing execution mode when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result includes a jackpot start effect, an effect corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end effect, and an image of each effect is displayed in the 15R probability variation jackpot data group. Contains a set of data for.

The normal jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of a jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 31 during the opening / closing execution mode when a normal jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the normal jackpot result includes a jackpot start effect, an effect corresponding to each round, and a jackpot end effect, and the normal jackpot data group is used to display an image of each of these effects. Contains data groups.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying an image of the jackpot effect performed by the symbol display device 31 during the opening / closing execution mode when the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot effect corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is an effect in which an image of a predetermined mode, specifically, the same type of image is displayed from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and is included in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group. Contains a group of data for displaying the same type of image.

Here, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is a data group for displaying the same type of image as described above, whereas the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group have a plurality of types of effects. Since it is a data group for displaying the image of, the data capacity of the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group is larger than that of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group.

Of the above data groups, the inspection data group, the initial display data group, the abnormality notification data group, the simple symbol data group, the first background data group, the normal symbol data group, and the first The 2 background data group is a regular data group to be stored in the regular area 137 of the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108.

Since the abnormality notification data group is set as the regular data group, it is possible to immediately start the abnormality notification on the symbol display device 31 when an abnormality occurs. That is, the abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, and if the abnormality notification data group is read from the character ROM 106 to the RAMs 107 and 108 after the occurrence of the abnormality is identified, the reading speed of the character ROM 106 is slow. As a result, the start of abnormality notification will be delayed accordingly.

On the other hand, since the abnormality notification data group is set as the regular data group, even if an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, the abnormality notification data group is read out to the regular area 137 at that time. Therefore, the image of the abnormality notification can be displayed immediately.

Since each background data group and the normal symbol data group are set as the regular symbol data group, the symbol display device 31 can immediately start the variable display of the symbol when the start condition of the game round is satisfied. It will be possible. That is, the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 provided in the game area is generated at an arbitrary timing, and the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is newly generated in the situation where the hold information is not stored. When the hold information is acquired, the game times related to the hold information will be started immediately. In this case, if the background data group or the normal symbol data group is read from the character ROM 106 to the RAMs 107 and 108 after the acquisition of the hold information is specified, the reading speed of the character ROM 106 is slow. As a result, the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31 is delayed accordingly.

On the other hand, since each background data group and normal symbol data group are set as regular data groups, even if a prize is generated in the operation ports 23 and 24 at an arbitrary timing, each of them at that time. Since the background data group and the normal symbol data group are read out in the regular area 137, it is possible to immediately display the image of the variable display of the symbol.

By the way, it is enough to have the background data group and the normal symbol data group to start the variable display of the symbol, and the data capacity required at the start of the variable display is compared with the configuration requiring the data group for other characters. Is suppressed. Along with this, the amount of data required to read and store the regular data group is suppressed.

Since both the first background data group and the second background data group are set as the regular data group, the symbol display device 31 is used when the display mode is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 58. It is possible to switch the background image immediately with. That is, the operation of the effect operation device 58 is performed at an arbitrary timing, and the background data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination from the character ROM 106 to the RAM 107, 108 after the operation of the effect operation device 58 is specified. If the group is read out, the switching of the background image is delayed by that amount due to the slow reading speed of the character ROM 106.

On the other hand, since both the first background data group and the second background data group are set as the regular data group, even if the effect operation device 58 is operated at an arbitrary timing, the time point Since the data groups for both backgrounds are read out in the regular area 137, the background image can be switched immediately.

In the controller 141 of the character ROM 106, the address data of each area of the NAND type storage unit 142 and the image data stored in the area are associated with each other by the table information, and the controller 141 constitutes each type of data group. It is specified in which area each image data is stored by referring to the above table information.

<Processing configuration related to display control of the symbol display device 31>
Next, the processing configuration related to the display control of the symbol display device 31 will be described. In the display control device 100, the display CPU 102 executes various processes, and the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 each execute various processes based on the instructions from the display CPU 102 to control the display of the symbol display device 31. To.

The process executed by the display CPU 102 includes a main process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and a normal process executed after the main process, and the write control unit of the bridge LSI 109 in each process. Predetermined instructions are executed for 121 and VDP 105. Hereinafter, the main processing of the display CPU 102 and the processing of the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 executed based on the instruction in the main processing will be described, and then the normal processing of the display CPU 102 and the processing executed based on the instruction in the normal processing will be described. The processing of the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 will be described.

<Main processing of display CPU 102>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the display CPU 102. As shown in FIG. 18, in step S801, the instruction processing of the initial setting of the regular data group is executed. In the instruction processing, the initial setting command for the bridge LSI 109 read from the command storage area (instruction information storage means) 103a of the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, and for the VDP 105 read from the command storage area 103a. Initial setting command is sent to VDP105. By receiving the initial setting command, the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 execute a process for transferring the regular data group from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108.

Here, the processing content executed by the write control unit 121 and the processing content executed by the VDP 105 when the above-mentioned initial setting command is received will be described. First, the processing contents executed by the bridge LSI 109 at the time of initial setting will be described.

<Processing executed by the bridge LSI 109 at the time of initial setting>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of a regular data group in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. In the write control unit 121, the bridge-side main process including a plurality of types of processes is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), and as a part of the bridge-side main process, the initial stage of the regular data group is used. The setting process is set.

As shown in FIG. 19, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the initial setting command is received from the display CPU 102. If the initial setting command has not been received, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the normal data group is in the initial setting state. If it is not in the initial setting state of the regular data group (step S902: NO), the initial setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the initial setting command is received (step S901: YES), in step S903, the initial setting state of the regular data group is set and the transfer state of the inspection data group is set. Here, when setting various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121, and when canceling various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be released is deleted. Will be done. This also applies to other states in the write control unit 121.

By setting the transfer state of the inspection data group, the write control unit 121 executes the transfer of the inspection data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107. Here, the data transfer process in the write control unit 121 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is set as a part of the bridge side main process.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the data transfer process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not data is being read from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123. If the data is not being read, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the transfer state of any of the data groups is set. If none of the transfer states are set, this data transfer process ends as it is.

If any of the transfer states is set, the read start process of the data group corresponding to the transfer state currently set in step S1003 is executed. In the start process, the currently set transfer state is specified, the transfer table corresponding to the specified transfer state is read from the control ROM 124 of the write control unit 121 to the control RAM 125, and the transfer table is read from the character ROM 106 according to the transfer table. Along with starting the reading of the data, the process of storing the read data in the cache buffer 123 for each unit data is executed.

In the transfer table, the address information for specifying in which area each unit data of the data group to be read is stored in the NAND type storage unit 142 of the character ROM 106 and the reading order of each unit data are displayed. The order information for identification is set in a one-to-one correspondence.

If the process of step S1003 is executed, or if data is being read from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the reading of the unit data into the cache buffer 123 is completed. If it is not completed, this data transfer process is terminated as it is. If it is completed, in step S1005, it is determined whether or not it is the non-access timing to the bridge side RAM 107 in the VDP 105.

The determination of whether or not it is the non-access timing is performed by determining whether or not the write control unit 121 receives the non-access signal from the VDP 105, and when the non-access signal is received, the non-access is performed. It is determined that it is timing, and if a non-access signal is not received, it is determined that it is access timing. However, in the initial setting state of the regular data group and the transfer state of the inspection data group, a positive determination is made in step S1005 even if the non-access signal is not received. The timing at which the non-access signal is transmitted from the VDP 105 will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1005, the data transfer process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, a write process for writing the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 is executed. As a result, the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 is written to the bridge side RAM 107. In this case, information is set in the transfer table for the write control unit 121 to specify to which address area in the bridge-side RAM 107 each unit data is to be written. When the unit data is written to the bridge side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 writes the unit data to a predetermined area of the bridge side RAM 107.

In the following step S1007, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the data group corresponding to the transfer state is completed. If the transfer of the data group corresponding to the transfer state is not completed, in step S1008, the reading of the next unit data is started according to the transfer table read into the control RAM 125. After that, the data transfer process is terminated. In this case, in the next and subsequent data transfer processes, the next unit data is read into the cache buffer 123, and the read unit data is written to the bridge side RAM 107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1007 that the transfer of the data group corresponding to the transfer state is completed, the transfer completion process is executed in step S1009, and then the data transfer process is terminated. In the transfer completion process, the transfer completion flag corresponding to the currently set transfer state is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. For example, when the inspection data group is in the transfer state, the inspection transfer completion flag is stored in the control RAM 125.

Returning to the description of the initial setting process (FIG. 19) of the regular data group, after executing the process of step S903, the process proceeds to step S904. Further, when it is determined in step S902 that the normal data group is in the initial setting state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the inspection data group has been transferred. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the completion flag corresponding to the transfer state of the inspection data group is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. This also applies to the determination of whether or not the other data groups have been transferred.

If it is determined that the inspection data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the inspection data group is released in step S905. When the transfer state is released, both the transfer state setting flag and the completion flag corresponding to the current release target in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121 are deleted. Further, in step S905, the transfer state of the initial display data group is set. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the initial display data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 via the cache buffer 123.

When the inspection data group has not been transferred (step S904: NO) or after executing the process of step S905, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the initial display data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the initial display data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the initial display data group is released and the transfer state of the abnormality notification data group is set in step S907. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the abnormality notification data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 via the cache buffer 123.

If the initial display data group has not been transferred (step S906: NO) or after executing the process of step S907, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the abnormality notification data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the abnormality notification data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the abnormality notification data group is released and the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is set in step S909. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the transfer of the simple symbol data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 is performed via the cache buffer 123.

If the abnormality notification data group has not been transferred (step S908: NO) or after executing the process of step S909, in step S910, it is determined whether or not the simplified symbol data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the simple symbol data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is released and the transfer state of the first background data group is set in step S911. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the transfer of the first background data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 is performed via the cache buffer 123.

When the simple symbol data group has not been transferred (step S910: NO) or after the process of step S911 is executed, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the first background data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the first background data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the first background data group is released and the transfer state of the normal symbol data group is set in step S913. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the transfer of the normal symbol data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 is performed via the cache buffer 123.

When the first background data group has not been transferred (step S912: NO) or after the processing of step S913 is executed, it is determined in step S914 whether or not the normal symbol data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the normal symbol data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the normal symbol data group is released and the transfer state of the second background data group is set in step S915. As a result, in the next data transfer process, the transfer of the second background data group from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 is performed via the cache buffer 123.

If the normal symbol data group has not been transferred (step S914: NO) or after the processing of step S915 is executed, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the second background data group has been transferred.

If the second background data group has not been transferred, the initial setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second background data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the second background data group is released in step S917. Further, in step S917, the initial setting state of the regular data group is released. After that, the initial setting process is terminated.

<Process executed by VDP105 at the time of initial setting>
Next, the process executed by the VDP 105 at the time of initial setting will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer processing in the VDP 105. In the VDP 105, the VDP-side main process including a plurality of types of processes is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), and the initial transfer process is set as a part of the VDP-side main process. ..

As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the initial setting command is received from the display CPU 102. If the initial setting command has not been received, in step S1102, it is determined whether or not the normal data group is in the initial setting state. If it is not in the initial setting state of the regular data group (step S1102: NO), the initial transfer process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the initial setting command is received (step S1101: YES), the initial setting state of the regular data group is set in step S1103. Here, when setting various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105, and when releasing various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be released is deleted. .. This also applies to the setting and cancellation of other states.

Further, in step S1103, the initial transfer table corresponding to the initial setting is read from the control ROM 131 of the VDP 105 to the control RAM 132. In the initial transfer table, address information of an area to be referred to when reading data from the bridge side RAM 107 and reference order information when sequentially referencing the address information are set.

After executing the process of step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104. Further, when it is determined in step S1102 that the normal data group is in the initial setting state, the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the data to be read is stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Here, the data to be read is unit data constituting any of the image data groups, and in step S1104, the area of the bridge side RAM 107 corresponding to the address information to be read this time in the initial transfer table. It is determined whether or not the unit data is stored in.

The processing configuration for specifying the data to be read in the VDP 105 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, every time the write control unit 121 completes writing the unit data to the bridge side RAM 107. A write completion signal may be transmitted from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105, and the VDP 105 may receive the write completion signal to make an affirmative determination in step S1104.

Further, the data to be read is not limited to the configuration of unit data, and a group of image data groups may be set as the data to be read. In this case, the VDP 105 waits until a group of image data groups is newly written to the bridge side RAM 107 without transferring the data to the VDP side RAM 108. In this respect, a configuration in which data is transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 for each unit data is preferable in order to transfer the regular data group to the VDP-side RAM 108 at an early stage.

If the data to be read is not stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S1104: NO), the initial transfer process is terminated as it is. If the data to be read is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S1104: YES), the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, a writing process for writing the unit data to be read in the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP-side RAM 108 is executed. In this case, in the initial transfer table, information for specifying in the VDP 105 which address unit area in the regular area 137 the unit data is to be written is set. In the VDP 105, when the unit data is written in the regular area 137, the unit data is written in the unit area of the regular area 137 predetermined.

In the following step S1106, it is determined whether or not the writing of the group of image data groups is completed. The determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not it is the timing when writing is completed for the unit data in the last order among a large number of unit data set as a group of image data groups. Do it by.

If the writing is not completed, the initial transfer process is terminated as it is. When the writing is completed, in step S1107, a writing completion signal for causing the display CPU 102 to recognize that the writing to the regular area 137 is completed for the predetermined image data group is transmitted to the display CPU 102. .. The write completion signal is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each image data group, and in step S1107, the corresponding write completion signal is transmitted to the display CPU 102.

In the following step S1108, the write completion process is executed. In the writing completion process, a process for making the image data group stored in the regular area 137 identifiable by the VDP 105 is executed. Specifically, in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105, a data group flag storage area is set in which there is a one-to-one correspondence with the image data group that may be written in the regular area 137. In the writing completion process, the data group flag is stored in the data group flag storage area corresponding to the image data group for the image data group determined in step S1106 that the writing to the regular area 137 is completed. The flags stored in each data group flag storage area are deleted when the corresponding image data group is deleted from the regular area 137.

In the following step S1109, it is determined whether or not the initial setting is completed. The determination is made by referring to the initial transfer table to determine whether or not it is the timing when writing is completed for the image data group in the last order among the plurality of image data groups set as the regular data group. Do it by. If the initial setting is not completed, the initial transfer process is terminated as it is, and if the initial setting is completed, the initial setting state of the regular data group is canceled in step S1110, and then the initial transfer process is performed. finish.

The initial transfer process may be performed at the time of power-up, and once the initial transfer process is completed after the power is turned on, the initial transfer process may not be performed until the next power-up. In this case, the initial transfer process does not include the processes of steps S1102 and S1103, and after making an affirmative determination in step S1101, the processes of steps S1104 to S1110 are repeated until the initial setting of the regular data group is completed. You just have to do it.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 18) in the display CPU 102, after executing the instruction process for initial setting of the regular data group in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the inspection data group to the regular area 137 is completed. The determination is made by determining whether or not the write completion signal corresponding to the inspection data group is received from the VDP 105.

If the transfer of the inspection data group to the regular area 137 is not completed, the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed, and if the transfer of the inspection data group to the regular area 137 is completed, the step Proceed to S803. In step S803, the drawing instruction process of the inspection image is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is stored in the drawing list information storage area (drawing list information storage means) 103b of the program ROM 103 so that the inspection image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Is read from, and the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105.

Here, the drawing list information is information in which drawing instructions for one frame on the display screen G are set, and is a color palette for determining the data information of the bitmap image and the display color of each dot of the bitmap image. Contains table information.

In the following step S804, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the inspection image. The measurement of the end timing is performed by using the end timing counters of various counter areas 104c provided in the work RAM 104, and when the end timing counter is first executed for drawing instruction processing of the inspection image. Information on the end reference value is set. Then, every time a negative determination is made in step S804, the value of the end timing counter is updated to be subtracted by 1, and when the value of the end timing counter becomes "0", it is affirmed in step S804. Make a judgment. The configuration related to the measurement of the end timing is the same in step S807, which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S804 that it is not the end timing, the inspection image drawing instruction process is executed again in step S803. In the drawing instruction processing of the inspection image in this case, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing of the new inspection image, and if it is the drawing instruction timing, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is transmitted to the VDP 105 again. To do. That is, the drawing list information corresponding to the inspection image is transmitted to the VDP 105 every time the drawing instruction timing is reached until the end timing is reached. If it is determined in step S804 that the end timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S805.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial display data group to the regular area 137 is completed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the write completion signal corresponding to the initial display data group is received from the VDP 105.

If the transfer of the initial display data group to the regular area 137 is not completed, the process of step S805 is repeatedly executed, and if the transfer of the initial display data group to the regular area 137 is completed, the transfer is completed. , Step S806. In step S806, the drawing instruction processing of the initial display image is executed. Specifically, the drawing list information corresponding to the initial display image is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b so that the initial display image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and the read drawing list is read out. The information is transmitted to the VDP 105.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the initial display image. If it is determined that it is not the end timing, the drawing instruction process of the initial display image is executed again in step S806. In the drawing instruction processing of the initial display image in this case, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing of the new initial display image, and if it is the drawing instruction timing, the drawing list information corresponding to the initial display image is displayed again. It is transmitted to VDP105. That is, the drawing list information corresponding to the initial display image is transmitted to the VDP 105 every time the drawing instruction timing is reached until the end timing is reached. If it is determined in step S807 that the end timing is reached, the main process is shifted to the normal process.

<Process executed by VDP105 for drawing instruction>
Next, the process executed by the VDP 105 in response to the drawing instruction will be described. As the processing executed by the VDP 105 in response to the drawing instruction, a drawing data setting process and a drawing signal output process are set. Both the drawing data setting processing and the drawing signal output processing are set as a part of the VDP side main processing. Hereinafter, the drawing data setting process will be described first, and then the drawing signal output process will be described.

<Drawing data setting process>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a drawing data setting process in the VDP 105. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information is received from the display CPU 102. If it has not been received, this setting process is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the data corresponding to the drawing list information is stored in the regular area 137. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the data group flag related to the data corresponding to the drawing list information is stored in the control RAM 132 of the VDP 105.

When the data corresponding to the drawing list information is stored in the regular area 137, the output of the non-access signal to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 is started in step S1203. That is, in the situation where the regular area 137 is accessed and the drawing data is created, the VDP 105 does not access the bridge side RAM 107, so information to that effect is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the write control unit 121 as a non-access signal. Will be done. As a result, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it is in a situation where it can access the bridge side RAM 107.

In the following step S1204, necessary data is read from the regular area 137, and the read data is written in the drawing area 135 of the VDP 105 in step S1205. After that, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information is completed. If the creation is not completed, the processes of steps S1204 and S1205 are repeatedly executed. If the creation is completed, the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, by stopping the output of the non-access signal, the write control unit 121 is made to recognize that the VDP 105 may access the bridge side RAM 107. As a result, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it cannot access the bridge side RAM 107. After that, this setting process ends.

Here, during the period from the execution of the process of step S1203 to the execution of the process of step S1207, the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107. It is set longer than the period required to do so. Therefore, the write control unit 121 can transfer one unit of unit data from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 while the VDP 105 refers to the regular area 137 to create drawing data.

Incidentally, when creating drawing data for the drawing list information received based on the drawing instruction processing of the inspection image in step S803 or the drawing instruction processing of the initial display image in step S806, the processes of steps S1203 to S1206 are executed. To.

On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the drawing list information is not stored in the regular area 137 (step S1202: NO), in step S1208, the necessary data is read from the change area, that is, the bridge side RAM 107. Then, the read data is written in the drawing area 135 of the VDP 105 in step S1209. After that, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information is completed. If the creation is not completed, the processes of steps S1208 and S1209 are repeatedly executed. If the creation is completed, this setting process ends.

The drawing data created by the processes of steps S1208 to S1210 is executed when the drawing list information is output based on the drawing instruction processing such as the notice display and the reach display described later.

<Output processing of drawing signal>
Next, the output processing of the drawing signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the drawing data. The information on the output timing of the drawing data is included in the drawing list information corresponding to the drawing data. If it is not the output timing of the drawing data, the main output process is terminated as it is. If it is the output timing of the drawing data, the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, the output of the non-access signal to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 is started. That is, in the situation where the drawing signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data stored in the drawing area 135, the VDP 105 does not access the bridge side RAM 107, so that information to that effect is available. It is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the write control unit 121 as a non-access signal. As a result, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it is in a situation where it can access the bridge side RAM 107.

In the following step S1303, the drawing area 135 is referred to, and in step S1304, the drawing signal corresponding to the referred data is output to the symbol display device 31 through the output port 136. After that, in step S1305, it is determined whether or not the drawing process of the image corresponding to the drawing data of this time is completed. If the drawing process is not completed, the processes of step S1303 and step S1304 are repeatedly executed. If the drawing process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, by stopping the output of the non-access signal, the write control unit 121 is made to recognize that the VDP 105 may access the bridge side RAM 107. As a result, the write control unit 121 recognizes that it cannot access the bridge side RAM 107. After that, this output processing ends.

Here, during the period from the execution of the process of step S1302 to the execution of the process of step S1306, the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107. It is set longer than the period required to do so. Therefore, the write control unit 121 transfers one unit of unit data from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 while the VDP 105 refers to the drawing data and performs drawing processing on the symbol display device 31. be able to.

<Access timing of write control unit 121 and VDP105 to bridge side RAM 107>
Next, the access timing of the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 to the bridge side RAM 107 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 24.

FIG. 24 (a) shows the access period of the regular area 137 by the VDP 105, FIG. 24 (b) shows the access period of the bridge side RAM 107 by the VDP 105, and FIG. 24 (c) shows the access period of the symbol display device 31 by the VDP 105. The drawing period is shown, FIG. 24 (d) shows the accessible period of the bridge side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121, and FIG. 24 (e) shows the write period of the write control unit 121 to the cache buffer 123. Reference numeral 24 (f) indicates a write period to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121.

First, a case where the VDP 105 performs drawing processing on the symbol display device 31 will be described.

At the timing of t1, the VDP 105 accesses the bridge side RAM 107, and for example, transfers image data from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108, and creates drawing data using the image data stored in the bridge side RAM 107. In this case, the write control unit 121 is in a period in which access to the bridge side RAM 107 is disabled, and in this situation, the unit data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123.

After that, at the timing of t2, the write control unit 121 completes the transfer of the unit data this time to the cache buffer 123, and at the timing of t3, the access to the bridge side RAM 107 by the VDP 105 is completed.

After that, at the timing of t4, the drawing process on the symbol display device 31 is started in the VDP 105. In this case, since the VDP 105 executes the drawing process with reference to the drawing data stored in its own drawing area 135, it is a period in which access to the bridge side RAM 107 is not surely generated in the VDP 105. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the write control unit 121 is in a period in which the bridge side RAM 107 can be accessed, and the write control unit 121 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107. ..

After that, at the timing of t5, the transfer of the unit data to the bridge side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 is completed, and at the timing of t6 thereafter, the drawing process by the VDP 105 to the symbol display device 31 is completed. Then, at the timing of t6, the period during which the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge side RAM 107 is started again.

Next, a case where the VDP 105 accesses the regular area 137 will be described.

During the period when the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 transfers the unit data from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 at the timing of t7. Then, the transfer of the unit data is completed at the timing of t8.

After that, at the timing of t9, the VDP 105 accesses the regular area 137 and creates drawing data using the image data stored in the regular area 137. In this case, since the regular area 137 is provided only in the VDP side RAM 108, the period during which the VDP 105 is accessing the regular area 137 is a period during which access to the bridge side RAM 107 is not reliably generated in the VDP 105. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the write control unit 121 is in a period in which the bridge side RAM 107 can be accessed, and the write control unit 121 transfers the unit data stored in the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107. ..

After that, at the timing of t10, the transfer of the unit data to the bridge side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 is completed, and at the timing of t11 thereafter, the access to the regular area 137 by the VDP 105 is completed. Then, at the timing of t11, the period during which the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge side RAM 107 is started again.

In a configuration in which both the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 are connected to the bridge side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122, the write control unit 121 is provided with a cache buffer 123 while the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107. The unit data is transferred to the cache buffer 123, and the unit data is transferred from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge-side RAM 107 in a situation where the VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107. As a result, the timing of reading the image data from the bridge-side RAM 107 by the VDP 105 and the timing of writing the image data to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 are adjusted, and both operations can be performed satisfactorily.

In particular, it takes a predetermined period to create drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list using the image data stored in the regular area 137 directly connected to the VDP 105. Further, it takes a predetermined period to draw an image for one frame on the symbol display device 31 using the drawing data. Further, since the read speed from the cache buffer 123 configured as RAM is faster than the read speed from the character ROM 106 configured with the NAND flash memory, the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 The time until the transfer of the unit data from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed is shorter than the time until the transfer of the unit data is completed, and the time is shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined period.

In such a situation, the unit data is transferred from the character ROM 106, which has a relatively slow read speed, to the cache buffer 123, while the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107, and the cache buffer, which has a relatively high read speed. By transferring the unit data from 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 during a predetermined period during which the drawing data is created in the VDP 105 or during a predetermined period during which drawing is performed on the symbol display device 31, read timing and writing are performed. Both of the above operations can be performed satisfactorily without setting a dedicated processing waiting time for adjusting with the timing.

Further, since the unit of the image data transferred to the cache buffer 123 is not the entire one data group but the unit data constituting one data group, the cache buffer 123 can store the unit data. It suffices to have a storage capacity. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the cache buffer 123 can be reduced, and both timings can be adjusted while reducing the cost of the cache buffer 123.

Further, by reducing the unit of data to be handled, the time required for one data transfer from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 and the time required for one data transfer from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 can be obtained. The time can be shortened. Therefore, it becomes easy to adjust both of the above timings.

Further, the unit data is the smallest unit data that is individually divided and stored in the character ROM 106. As a result, the time required for one data transfer from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 is shortened. Therefore, aiming at a slight gap in which the VDP 105 does not access the bridge side RAM 107, the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 Data can be transferred to.

Further, when data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123, the write control unit 121 may read the unit data stored in the character ROM 106 as it is, so that the configuration for performing the data transfer is simple. Can be achieved.

<Normal processing of display CPU 102>
Next, the normal processing of the display CPU 102 and the processing in the write control unit 121 and the VDP 105 executed based on the instructions in the normal processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is executed after the main process is completed, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) after the main process is completed.

In step S1401, the game turn control process for displaying the effect for each game turn on the symbol display device 31 is executed. In the following step S1402, the jackpot control process for displaying the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 31 is executed.

In the following step S1403, an abnormality notification control process for displaying the abnormality notification on the symbol display device 31 is executed. In the following step S1404, the standby image control process for switching the display mode based on the setting of the standby image and the operation on the effect operation device 58 is executed. After that, this normal processing is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of steps S1401 to S1404 will be sequentially described.

<Game times control process of display CPU 102>
First, the game rotation control process in step S1401 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the symbol display device 31 is used to produce an effect for game rounds, a normal effect of displaying a variation of the symbol using a normal symbol and a variation display of the symbol using a simple symbol are displayed. A simple effect to be performed is set. Of these effects for both games, the normal effect is basically executed, but if the normal effect cannot be performed, specifically, the data group for the normal symbol after the power is turned on. Is not read from the character ROM 106 into the regular area 137, a simple effect is executed. Therefore, in the game time control process, a process for performing a normal effect as an effect for the game time and a process for performing a simple effect as the effect for the game time are set. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the processing content in the case of performing the simple effect will be described first, and then the processing content in the case of performing the normal effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received. Here, the command received from the voice lamp control device 90 is stored in the command storage area 104a provided in the work RAM 104. The command storage area 104a is a ring buffer that has a plurality of areas for storing commands, writes commands to the area set by the write pointer, and reads commands from the area set by the read pointer.

When the variation command is received, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the transfer of the normal symbol data group to the regular area 137 is completed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not a write completion signal corresponding to the normal symbol data group is received from the VDP 105. Here, as described above, the normal symbol data group is to be transferred to the regular area 137 after the first background data group. Therefore, the timing at which the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed is the timing at which the transfer of the first background data group is also completed, and when the transfer of both data groups is completed, the first 1 It means that it is possible to perform variable display of a symbol using a normal symbol while the background image is displayed.

This time, when the simple effect is performed, that is, the transfer of the normal symbol data group is not completed, a negative determination is made in step S1502, and the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the simple symbol data group to the regular area 137 is completed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not a write completion signal corresponding to the simple symbol data group is received from the VDP 105.

If the transfer of the simple symbol data group is not completed, the game round control process is terminated as it is. That is, even when the variable command is received, if the reading of the simple symbol data group from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM (specifically, the regular area 137) is not completed. , The effect for the game round is not executed by the symbol display device 31. In this case, the symbol display device 31 maintains the display state of the image already displayed, specifically, the display state of the inspection image or the initial display image.

However, even in this situation, the variable display of the pattern is performed on the main display unit 33, which is directly controlled by the main control device 60. Therefore, for the player, by visually observing the main display unit 33, it is confirmed that the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is not invalidated, that the game is being executed, and that the result of the internal lottery is being executed. can do.

On the other hand, when the transfer of the simple symbol data group is completed, the game turn control process is terminated after the variation start process by the simple symbol is executed in step S1504. Here, the fluctuation start processing by the simple symbol will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S1601, the information on the fluctuation display time is grasped from the fluctuation command received this time. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 also transmits a type command when transmitting a variation command. Therefore, in step S1601, the type command received together with the current variable command is read from the command storage area 104a, and from the command, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won and information on the jackpot type when a jackpot result is generated are obtained. Grasp. Then, in step S1601, the grasped information is stored in the register of the display CPU 102.

In the following step S1602, the simple display pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, the program ROM 103 is provided with a simple pattern storage area 103c as a simple pattern information storage means for storing various table information for controlling variable display by a simple symbol.

The table information stored in the simple pattern storage area 103c is mainly composed of game result information such as 15R probability variation jackpot result, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, normal jackpot result and deviation result, and variation display time information as parameters. It is set so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with each combination of the above parameters that can be determined by the control device 60. In step S1602, the table information corresponding to the information grasped in step S1601 is read from the program ROM 103, and the read table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b provided in the work RAM 104.

In the following step S1603, the information on the fluctuation display time grasped in step S1601 is set in the measurement counter as the measurement means for display provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104. The information set in the measurement counter is updated so as to be subtracted by 1 each time the normal processing by the display CPU 102 is newly started.

In the following step S1604, the variation start process is executed and then the variation start process is terminated so that the effect of playing the game with the simple symbol is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

In the fluctuation start processing, the drawing list information at the start of fluctuation is specified with reference to the table information stored in the display table storage area 104b, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image at the start of fluctuation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. ..

Returning to the explanation of the game time control process (FIG. 26), when the variation command is not received (step S1501: NO), it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the variation is being displayed by the simple symbol. .. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the simple changing flag is stored in the simple changing flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The simple changing flag is stored at the start of the change by the simple symbol and is cleared at the end of the game.

Further, in step S1507, it is determined whether or not the variation display by the normal symbol is being performed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the normal fluctuation flag is stored in the normal fluctuation flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The normal changing flag is stored at the start of the change according to the normal symbol, and is cleared at the end of the game round.

If neither the variation display by the simple symbol nor the variation display by the normal symbol is being performed, the game rotation control process is terminated as it is. Since this is a case where a simple effect is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, a changing process using a simple symbol is executed in step S1508, and then the game turn control process is terminated.

Here, the processing during fluctuation by the simple symbol will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation stop timing by referring to the information of the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. If it is not the fluctuation stop timing, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list.

When it is the drawing list setting timing, in step S1703, the current drawing list information is specified by collating the table information stored in the variable display table storage area 104b with the information of the measurement counter, and the drawing list information is specified. The specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and causes the symbol display device 31 to proceed with the variable display using the simple symbol. The image on the display screen G is updated.

When it is not the setting timing of the drawing list (step S1702: NO) or after the process of step S1703 is executed, the data transfer instruction process is executed in step S1704. In the data transfer instruction process, when a big hit result is finally generated in the current game round, the image data for the big hit effect is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 or the VDP side RAM 108 in the middle of the game round. It is a process to keep. Such a process will be described together with the explanation of the process during fluctuation by a normal symbol. After executing the process of step S1704, the process during the change is terminated.

On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation stop timing (step S1701: YES), in step S1705, the information of the game result in the current game is specified from the information stored in the register of the display CPU 102. In the following step S1706, the drawing list information corresponding to the game result information specified in step S1705 is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b, and the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image of the game result by the simple symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Display it. After executing the process of step S1706, the process during the change is terminated.

<Variation display using simple symbols>
Here, a state of variable display using a simple symbol will be described. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of variation display using a simple symbol.

As shown in FIG. 29, the simple symbols include a symbol "◎" as the first simple symbol, a symbol "○" as the second simple symbol, and a symbol "△" as the third simple symbol. , A symbol of "x" is set as the fourth simple symbol. Of these, the first simple symbol corresponds to the symbol showing the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the second simple symbol corresponds to the symbol showing the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the third simple symbol usually corresponds to the symbol. It corresponds to the jackpot result, and the fourth simple symbol corresponds to the off result.

The data capacity of the image data used when displaying the images of the first to fourth simple symbols is larger than any of the data capacities of the image data used when displaying the image of the normal symbol for any of the simple symbols. Is also set small. In addition, the types of simple symbols are less than the types of normal symbols. Therefore, the data capacity of the simple symbol data group including the image data used when displaying the images of the first to fourth simple symbols is the normal symbol including the image data used when displaying the image of the normal symbol. It is smaller than the data capacity of the data group for use. Further, since the background image is displayed when the variable display is usually performed by the symbol, the first background data group or the second background data group is used. That is, the data capacity of the image data required for the variable display by the normal symbol is set larger than the data capacity of the image data required for the variable display by the simple symbol.

When the variation display by the simple symbol is performed, the variation display is started from the state where the predetermined simple symbol among the first to fourth simple symbols is displayed on the display screen G. After that, each time the symbol switching timing is reached, the first to fourth simplified symbols are switched and displayed in a predetermined order. Then, at the timing when the variable display time set in the game round elapses, the variable display is terminated in a state where the simple symbol corresponding to the game result of the game round is displayed on the display screen G.

It should be noted that the mode of variable display of the symbol by the simple symbol is not limited to the above, and for example, the symbol for the jackpot is set in common to all types of jackpot results, and the symbol for the jackpot is set separately. The symbols for the result may be set, and they may be displayed alternately during the variable display, and finally one of the symbols may be stopped and displayed. In this case, when a jackpot result is obtained, the player cannot recognize which type of jackpot result it is, but it can recognize whether it is a jackpot result or a missed result. According to this configuration, the data capacity of the simple symbol data group can be reduced. Further, the display mode of the symbol is not limited to the display such as "○" or "×", and is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize to some extent what the stop result corresponds to. Incidentally, the variable display of the symbol by the simple symbol may be used as a kind of effect.

<Display control after power is turned on>
Next, the state of display control after the power is turned on by executing the above-described processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a timing chart for explaining the state of display control after the power is turned on.

When the power supply is turned on at the timing of t1, the transfer of each data group from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137 is started. In this case, the plurality of types of data groups included in the regular data group are subjected to the initial setting process (FIG. 19) of the regular data group already described by the write control unit 121 in accordance with a predetermined priority. Transferred sequentially.

That is, the inspection data group is transferred from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the initial display data group is transferred from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, and then the timing of t3. The data group for abnormality notification is transferred from the timing of t4 to the timing of t6, and the data group for simple symbols is transferred from the timing of t4 to the timing of t6, and the timing of t6 to t7 thereafter. The first background data group is transferred over the period, and then the normal symbol data group is transferred from the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, and then from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. The second background data group is transferred.

By executing the transfer of the inspection data group with the highest priority, whether the inspection image is normally displayed without waiting for the display of other images when the manufacturer checks the operation of the pachinko machine 10 after manufacturing. You can check whether or not. Further, the data capacity of the inspection data group is set to be smaller than at least the data capacity of the data group required to display the standby image. As a result, even if the transfer of the inspection data group is prioritized, the completion of the transfer of the data group necessary for displaying the standby image is not extremely delayed.

Incidentally, the standby image is an aspect of an image in which either the first background image or the second background image is displayed and the normal symbols are displayed in a state of being stopped on the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In order to display the standby image, it is necessary that the normal symbol data group and the data group corresponding to the background image to be displayed are transferred to the regular area 137.

Since the transfer of the initial display data group is executed with the next priority, the initial display image is displayed after the inspection image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the inspection image from being continued until the display of the standby image is started. Further, the data capacity of the initial display data group is set to be at least smaller than the data capacity of the data group required to display the standby image. As a result, the period until the display of the inspection image is completed can be shortened as compared with the configuration in which the display of the inspection image is continued until the standby image is displayed.

Since the transfer of the abnormality notification data group is executed with the next priority, even if an abnormality occurs at a relatively early timing after the power is turned on, the symbol display device 31 responds to the abnormality. It becomes possible to perform notification. Further, the data capacity of the abnormality notification data group is set to be at least smaller than the data capacity of the data group required to display the standby image. As a result, even if the transfer of the abnormality notification data group is prioritized, the completion of the transfer of the data group required for displaying the standby image is not extremely delayed.

A state in which the effect of playing a game with a normal symbol can be started by executing the transfer of the data group for a simple symbol whose data capacity is smaller than the data group required for the variable display by the normal symbol with the next priority. Compared with the configuration in which the effect of the game rotation is not executed in the symbol display device 31, the timing at which the effect of the game rotation in the symbol display device 31 can be started can be made earlier. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the power is turned on.

That is, if the symbol display device 31 does not display the corresponding image even though the operating ports 23 and 24 have been won, the player has won the operating ports 23 and 24. There is a concern that it will be confused by recognizing that has been invalidated. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, priority is given to the transfer of the data group for simple symbols with a small data capacity, and by shifting to a state where variable display by simple symbols can be performed at an early stage, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. be able to.

By executing the transfer of the first background data group and the normal symbol data group in preference to the transfer of the second background data group, the normal symbol data group is transferred after both background data groups are transferred. Compared to the transfer configuration, the period until the standby image can be displayed can be shortened, and the period until the transition to the state in which the production for the game round using the normal symbol can be started can be shortened. In order to achieve the effect, the normal symbol data group may be transferred before the first background data group.

Next, the execution timing of displaying each image with respect to the transfer timing of the data group will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30, at the timing of t2 when the transfer of the inspection data group is completed, the symbol display device 31 starts displaying the inspection image. After that, the display of the inspection image is continued until the timing of t5. In this case, the data group is transferred to the regular area 137 in parallel in the situation where the inspection image is displayed, and the initial display data group is transferred at the timing of t3, which is the timing before the timing of t5. The transfer is completed, and the transfer of the abnormality notification data group is completed at the timing of t4.

When the display of the inspection image is finished at the timing of t5, the display of the initial display image is started instead. Even in the situation where the initial display image is displayed, the data group is transferred to the regular area 137 in parallel, and the transfer of the simple symbol data group is completed at the timing of t6. Further, the transfer of the first background data group is completed at the timing of t7 in the situation where the initial display image is displayed.

After that, a prize is generated to the operating ports 23 and 24 at the timing of t8 when the transfer of the normal symbol data group is not completed, and the fluctuation start processing is executed by the main control device 60 for the reserved information acquired thereby. To. In this case, the transfer of the data group required for the variable display by the normal symbol has not been completed yet, whereas the transfer of the data group required for the variable display by the simple symbol has been completed. , The variable display by the simple symbol is started.

After that, the data group is transferred to the regular area 137 in parallel even in the situation where the variation display by the simple symbol is performed, and the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed at the timing of t9. However, at this timing, the effect for the game round is not switched from the simple symbol to the normal symbol, and the variable display by the simple symbol is continued.

After that, the transfer of the second background data group is completed at the timing of t10, and the variation display by the simple symbol ends at the timing of t11. In this case, since the transfer of the first background data group and the normal symbol data group has already been completed, the symbol display device 31 starts displaying the standby image using the first background image. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the background image can be switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 58 as the display mode switching, but the first background image after the power is turned on. Is set as the first background image.

After that, a new prize is generated for the operating ports 23 and 24 at the timing of t12, and the main control device 60 executes the fluctuation start processing for the reserved information acquired thereby. In this case, since the transfer of the first background data group and the normal symbol data group has already been completed, the variable display by the normal symbol is started.

By transferring the data group and displaying the image in parallel as described above, the data group is transferred to the normal area 137 after the power is turned on, and the image on the symbol display device 31 after the power is turned on. The display can be performed well.

In addition, even if the transfer of the data group necessary for performing the variation display by the normal symbol is completed in the situation where the variation display by the simple symbol is performed, the variation display by the simple symbol is continued and after the game round is completed. By making the variation display by the normal symbol from the next game round, the complicated processing can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the variation display by the simple symbol is switched to the variation display by the normal symbol in the middle of the game round.

<Game times control processing when variable display by normal symbol>
Next, the game time control process in the case of performing the variable display by the normal symbol will be described.

In the game time control process (FIG. 26), as described above, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the variation command is received, and in step S1502, the normal symbol data group is transferred to the regular area 137. Determine if it is complete. This time, since the variation display by the normal symbol is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the variation start process by the normal symbol is executed in step S1505, and then the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variation command is not received (step S1501: NO), it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the variation is displayed by the simple symbol, and whether or not the variation is displayed by the normal symbol in step S1507. Is determined. This time, since the variation display by the normal symbol is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, the changing process by the normal symbol is executed in step S1509, and then the game round control process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol in step S1505 and the fluctuation processing by the normal symbol in step S1509 will be described.

<Fluctuation start processing by normal symbol in display CPU 102>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol.

First, in step S1801, as in step S1601, based on the received variation command and type command, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type when a jackpot result occurs, and information on the variation display time. Is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the display CPU 102.

In the following step S1802, the stop information setting process is executed. In the stop information setting process, a process for determining the information of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped in the current game round is executed.

Specifically, the work RAM 104 is provided with a symbol update counter and a symbol information acquisition area. The symbol update counter is provided with a counter for the upper symbol row, a counter for the middle symbol row, and a counter for the lower symbol row, and these counters are provided with each symbol row Z1 in the symbol display device 31. Counter values corresponding to the number of symbols set in ~ Z3 are set.

That is, as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a counter for the upper symbol row corresponding to the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbols and the sub symbols. A numerical range of "0 to 17" is set in the counter for the lower symbol sequence. Further, in correspondence with the fact that 20 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, the counter for the middle symbol row has a numerical range of "0 to 19". Is set. The counter value for each symbol sequence is updated at different cycles. The value of the counter for each symbol string corresponds to the type of symbol that stops on the left line in the corresponding symbol string. Then, in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec), all the updated information in the counter for each symbol string is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area.

The symbol information acquisition area includes a 15R probability variation jackpot area, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, an out-of-reach area, and a complete outlier area. Then, it is determined whether or not the information acquired from all the counters for each symbol sequence corresponds to any of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the missed reach, and the complete missed. , The information of the corresponding area in the symbol information acquisition area is updated.

In the stop information setting process of step S1802, first, it is determined whether the game round this time is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a missed reach result, or a complete missed result. Then, the information of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped is acquired from the area corresponding to the determination result in the symbol information acquisition area, and is stored in the register of the display CPU 102. The information of the combination of the symbols includes the combination of the symbols of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the combination of the normal jackpot results, the combination of the symbols of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the information of the effective line for stopping the combination of the out-of-reach symbols. ..

By the way, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result is an embodiment in which the same odd number symbols (specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is a mode in which the same even-numbered symbols (non-specific symbols) are stopped and displayed on one effective line. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a mode in which the reach is out of reach in a predetermined mode. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the out-of-reach is an aspect in which the reach is out-of-reach in a mode different from the above-mentioned predetermined mode. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a predetermined special aspect in which the combination of a pair of reach symbols is not displayed on one effective line. The pattern may be established in.

In the following description, the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result is the stop information corresponding to either the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

In the following step S1803, the lottery process for displaying the notice is executed. In the lottery process of the notice display, the establishment lottery counter of the work RAM 104 and the establishment lottery table stored in the program ROM 103 are used. The establishment lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 each time the normal process (FIG. 25) is started, that is, in a cycle of about 4 msec. , It is configured to be initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

In addition, the establishment lottery table is set corresponding to each of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the out-reach, and the complete outlier. These successful lottery tables are set so that the notice display is displayed at 100% in the successful lottery table corresponding to each jackpot result and the missed reach, and the missed reach → explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result → normal jackpot result. → It is set so that the probability that the notice B is selected increases in the order of the 15R probability variation jackpot result. In addition, the probability that both notice A and notice B will not be performed is the highest in the winning lottery table that corresponds to the complete deviation, then the probability of notice A is the highest, and the probability of notice B is the lowest. It has become. The probability of this notice B is set lower than in the case of off-reach.

In addition, in the case where the result is completely deviated and the shorter the variable display time is selected as the number of pending information is larger, the result is completely deviated and the variable display time is shorter than the predetermined time. The lottery process of the notice display is not executed, and the execution of the notice display may be restricted.

In step S1803, first, it is determined whether the current game round is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, a loss reach result, or a complete loss result, and a winning lottery corresponding to the determination result is determined. The table is read and the counter value for the winning lottery is read. Then, with reference to the establishment lottery table, whether or not the read-out counter value for the establishment lottery corresponds to either the notice A or the notice B, or whether or not both the notice A and the notice B are performed. To judge. In the following step S1804, the result information of the lottery process of the notice display in step S1803 is acquired and stored in the register of the display CPU 102.

In the following step S1805, it is determined whether or not the reach display occurs in the current game round. When the reach display occurs, in step S1806, the reach pattern setting process for determining the reach pattern in the current game round is executed.

In the reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern table stored in the program ROM 103 is used. The reach pattern table is a table for determining the reach pattern according to the fluctuation display time information (variation display time determined by the main control device 60) grasped in step S1801. Specifically, a mode in which only the normal reach is performed, a mode in which the super reach A is performed after the normal reach, and a mode in which the super reach B is performed after the normal reach are set in association with the information of the variable display time. In step S1805, the reach type information corresponding to the current variation display time is acquired by referring to the reach pattern table, and is stored in the register of the display CPU 102.

As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game round is determined by the main control device 60, and the main control device 60 determines whether or not to generate the reach display in each game round, and the determination is made. The variable display time is determined according to the result.

If the reach display does not occur in the current game times (step S1805: NO) or after the processing of step S1806 is executed, in step S1807, if the current game times and the jackpot result occur, the effect for the jackpot is produced. In, a process for setting a display table to be appropriately referred to when performing display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed.

In the following step S1808, the information on the fluctuation display time grasped in step S1801 is set in the measurement counter as the fluctuation time measurement means for display provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104. The measurement counter is a counter that is also used when displaying fluctuations using a simple symbol.

In the following step S1809, a background counter provided as a display mode grasping means is referred to in various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104. The background counter is a storage means for grasping the type of background image currently set in the display CPU 102, and the counter value is set in the background counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. Has been done.

Specifically, since the first display mode in which the first background image is displayed and the second display mode in which the second background image is displayed are set as the display modes, these are set. The counter values of the background counter are set to "0" and "1" in correspondence with. The counter value of the background counter is alternately switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 58 in the situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. The process related to this switching will be described later.

In the following step S1810, after executing the process of starting the effect of playing the game with the normal symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, the variable start process is ended. In step S1810, the drawing list information at the start of fluctuation is specified based on the reference result of the background counter in step S1809 while referring to the display table set in step S1807, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information. Read from the storage area 103b. Then, the read drawing list information is transmitted to the VDP 105.

The VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image at the start of fluctuation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In this case, as described above, since each background data group and normal symbol data group are stored in the regular area 137, the image at the start of fluctuation is immediately obtained without requiring reading of the image data from the character ROM 106. Can be displayed.

<Table configuration and processing configuration related to display table settings>
Here, the table configuration and the processing configuration related to the setting of the display table will be described. The display table includes information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information to the VDP 105 and the type of the drawing list information in the middle of the game round or the production for the jackpot.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when the display control of the symbol display device 31 is performed, the VDP 105 does not directly read the image data from the character ROM 106, but the reading RAM (bridge side RAM 107 or VDP side RAM 108). ) Is transferred from the character ROM 106, and the VDP 105 reads out the transferred image data. In this case, the storage capacity of the RAM for reading is a storage capacity that cannot store all of the data groups corresponding to the effects for each game and the jackpot at one time. For example, in the game round when Super Reach B is displayed, the storage capacity of the data group required to display a series of effects from the start to the end of the game round exceeds 3 Gbits, but for reading. The sum of the storage capacities of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108, which are the RAMs of the above, is about 1.5 Gbits as described above.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, a series of effects is divided into a plurality of effect ranges, and the data group corresponding to each effect range is sequentially transferred to the read RAM, and the read RAM is already transferred. The data group stored in is overwritten with unnecessary data groups. That is, the data group corresponding to the predetermined effect range is transferred to the read RAM in advance before the predetermined effect range is started. In this case, the front side effect range set to be the execution target is executed before the predetermined effect range. Further, in a situation where the predetermined effect range is being executed, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range set to be executed after the predetermined effect range is transferred to the RAM for reading. In this case, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range is overwritten with the data group corresponding to the front side effect range. At the time of this overwriting, due to the relationship between the data group on the newly written side and the data group on the erased side, a part of the data group on the erased side is erased or the data on the erased side is erased. A situation occurs in which the entire group is erased.

In the display table, not only the timing for outputting the drawing list information and the information for specifying the type of the drawing list information, but also the transfer instruction timing for various data groups from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM is specified. Contains information. When setting the display table, the variable display table storage area 103d provided in the program ROM 103 as the variable display information group storage means is referred to, and the program ROM 103 is provided as the jackpot effect information group storage means. The jackpot effect table storage area 103e is referred to.

Hereinafter, while explaining the display table setting process, the contents of various table groups stored as the variable display information group in the variable display table storage area 103d and the jackpot effect table storage area 103e are hit as needed. The contents of various table groups stored as the production information group and the contents of the display table will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the display table. Further, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (d) show various table groups stored as the variable display information group in the variable display table storage area 103d, and FIG. 33 (e) shows the jackpot effect table storage area. Various table groups stored as a jackpot effect information group are shown in 103e. Further, FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) show display tables when the jackpot effect is not performed after the game round effect, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (b) show the jackpot effect after the game round effect. Shows the display table when done.

As shown in FIG. 32, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the reach display occurs in this game round. If the reach display does not occur, in step S1902, a process for acquiring the base table corresponding to the complete deviation is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33A, the base table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The base table group includes a table group for complete disengagement and a table group for generating reach. In the table group for complete deviation, information for specifying the timing of outputting the drawing list information and the type of the drawing list information at the timing from the start of the variable display to the result of the complete deviation (hereinafter, such information is displayed). It contains a large number of completely out-of-order tables with information). These completely disengagement tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the stop information.

The reach generation table group includes a large number of reach generation tables showing display information at the timing from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of the reach. These reach generation tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol.

Further, the image of the variable display of the symbol in the case of complete deviation and from the start of the variable display to the occurrence of reach is composed of only the background image and the image of the normal symbol. Then, as already described, the image data for displaying the background image is stored in the regular area 137 as the first background data group or the second background data group, and is used for displaying the normal symbol. The image data is usually stored as a symbol data group in the regular area 137. Therefore, the information for specifying the transfer instruction timing of various data groups is not set in the complete deviation table or the reach generation table.

In step S1902, among the base table groups, a completely out-of-order table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the stop information in the current game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. To do. After that, in step S1903, it is determined whether or not the notice A is generated in the current game round, and in step S1904, it is determined whether or not the notice B is generated in the current game round.

When the notice A occurs (step S1903: YES), the process for acquiring the notice A table is executed in step S1905. When the notice B occurs (step S1904: YES), the process for acquiring the notice B table is executed in step S1906. If both the notice A and the notice B do not occur (step S1904: NO), the present setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33B, the notice table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The notice table group includes a notice A table and a notice B table. The notice A table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice A at the timing from the start of the variation display to the stop of the variation display of the symbols in the first symbol sequence. The notice B table shows display information necessary for displaying the image of the notice B at the timing from the start of the change display to the stop of the change display of the symbols in the first symbol sequence.

Further, each of the notice A table and the notice B table has a transfer instruction timing for transferring the notice A data group or the notice B data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107). Information for identification is set. In the pachinko machine 10, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the data group for notice A or the data group for notice B is given immediately after the start of the variable display of the symbol (see FIG. 34 (a) and the like). .. In this case, among the completely off table and the reach generation table included in the base table group, the table that can be selected when the notice display is executed is the table in the first symbol column from the start of the variable display. As the period until the variable display is stopped, a sufficient period is secured for both the notice A and the notice B to complete the notice display after the transfer of the notice data group is completed.

If the transfer of the data group corresponding to the notice display can be completed by the start of the notice display, the transfer instruction timing is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

In step S1905, the notice A table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the display table storage area 104b. Further, in step S1906, the notice B table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the display table storage area 104b.

Since the notice A and the notice B are effects that are simultaneously executed in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed based on the base table, the change display of the symbol and the change display of the symbol are required to display the image corresponding to the effect. It is necessary to set the drawing list information for displaying both the notice display at the same time. In this case, in the process of acquiring the notice table, the base already stored in the display table storage area 104b so that the drawing list information for simultaneously displaying both the variable display of the symbol and the notice display can be set. Overwrite the information in the notice table with respect to the information in the table.

Further, in the display table storage area 104b, a display area for storing display information and a transfer instruction area for storing transfer instruction timing information are set, and a notice table is acquired. In the process, the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Specifically, in the transfer instruction area, a flag storage area is individually set for the possible transfer instruction timing, and the data group to be transferred that can be assumed corresponding to each transfer instruction timing. On the other hand, the flag storage area is set individually. When storing transfer instruction timing information in the transfer instruction area, a flag is stored for the area corresponding to the transfer instruction timing to be set this time, and the area corresponding to the data group to be transferred to be set this time. The flag is stored for the area set in association with the transfer instruction timing. The configuration related to the setting of information in the transfer instruction area is also the same when the configuration is based on the acquisition of other tables such as the normal reach table, the super reach table, and the jackpot effect table.

Returning to the description of the display table setting process (FIG. 32), if the reach display occurs in the current game round (step S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, a process for acquiring the base table corresponding to the reach display is executed. Specifically, among the base table groups already described, the reach generation table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol in this game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is displayed in the display table storage area. Store in 104b.

In the following step S1908, it is determined whether or not the notice A is generated in this game round. When the notice A occurs, in step S1909, the notice A table is acquired from the variable display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is stored in the variable display table storage area 104b. Overwrite the information in. If the notice A does not occur, this time it is a game time in which the reach display occurs, and in the game time in which the reach display occurs, the notice display will surely occur as described above, so that the change occurs in step S1910. The notice B table is acquired from the display table storage area 103d, and the acquired table information is overwritten with the base table information stored in the variable display table storage area 104b. The processing content related to the acquisition of these notice tables is the same as in the cases of step S1905 and step S1906.

After executing the process of step S1909 or step S1910, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not only normal reach occurs in this game round and super reach does not occur. When only the normal reach occurs, the process for acquiring the normal reach table is executed in step S1912. After that, in step S1916, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in this game round, and if no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, in the variable display table storage area 104b, the creation of the display table as shown in FIG. 34A is completed.

Here, the normal reach table will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a).

As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the normal reach table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The normal reach table group includes a normal hit table group, a non-normal table group, and a super reach development table group. The normal hit table group includes a large number of normal hit tables that show display information necessary for displaying a normal reach image at the timing from the start of reach display to the result of a big hit. These normal hit tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result.

The normal out-of-normal table group includes a large number of normal out-of-normal tables showing display information necessary for displaying a normal reach image at the timing from the start of reach display to the out-of-normal result. These normal deviation tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the fluctuation display time and the stop information corresponding to the deviation result.

The super reach development table group includes a large number of super reach development tables showing display information necessary for displaying a normal reach image at the timing from the start of reach display to the start of super reach. It has been. These super reach development tables are set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time and the reach symbol.

In addition, each of the normal reach tables contains information for specifying a transfer instruction timing (or transfer start timing) for transferring the normal reach data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107). It is set. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), normal reach data is used at a predetermined intermediate timing from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the stop of the variation display of the symbol in the first symbol sequence. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the group is performed. By the way, in the game times when the notice display is performed, the transfer instruction timing of the normal reach data group is the timing immediately after the notice display is started. In the above configuration, all the reach generation tables included in the base table group are sufficient to complete the transfer of the normal reach data group as the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach display. The period is secured.

If the transfer of the normal reach data group can be completed by the start of the reach display, the transfer instruction timing is not limited to the above and is arbitrary. By the way, in the normal reach display, the display mode of the normal symbol is different from that in the non-reach state, and therefore, the data for displaying the image of the mode is included in the normal reach data group.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and if a jackpot result is generated, it corresponds to a combination of the variable display time in the current game round and the stop information for the jackpot result. The obtained normal hit table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. If the jackpot result does not occur, a normal out-of-order table corresponding to the combination of the variable display time in this game round and the stop information for out-of-reach is acquired, and the acquired table information is displayed in the display table storage area. Store in 104b.

Since the normal reach display is an effect executed after the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the reach generation table, the information of the normal reach table acquired in step S1912 is continuous with respect to the reach generation table. The table is stored in the display table storage area 104b. At this time, the display information among the acquired normal reach table information is stored in the display area, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. By the way, in the display table shown in FIG. 34A, the case where the table for the notice A is acquired and the table for the normal reach deviation is acquired is shown.

If it is determined in step S1911 that super reach will occur in this game round, an affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S1913. In step S1913, it is determined whether or not Super Reach A occurs in this game round. When the super reach A occurs, the process for acquiring the super reach A table is executed in step S1914. After that, in step S1916, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in this game round, and if no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, in the display table storage area 104b, the creation of the display table as shown in FIG. 34 (b) is completed.

Here, the table for Super Reach A will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (d) and 34 (b).

As shown in FIG. 33 (d), the super reach table group is stored in the variable display table storage area 103d. The table group for super reach includes a table group for hitting super reach A and a table group for removing super reach A.

In the super reach A hit table group, there is a super reach A hit table showing display information necessary for displaying the super reach image at the timing from the start of the super reach display to the jackpot result. Many are included. These super reach A hit tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result.

In addition, the table group for Super Reach A removal shows the display information necessary for displaying the image of Super Reach at the timing from the start of the Super Reach display to the deviation result. Many tables are included. These super reach A out-of-reach tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with the stop information corresponding to the reach out-of-reach result.

Here, the data capacity of the data group for super reach A referred to when displaying the super reach A is for changing the RAM for reading (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108) excluding the regular area 137. It exceeds the capacity when the data capacity of the normal reach data group is subtracted from the storage capacity of the area. On the other hand, the data group for Super Reach A is set in a state of being divided into a plurality of data groups. As the plurality of data groups, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), an initial division data group, an intermediate division data group, and a final division data group are set.

In each of the super reach A tables, information for specifying a transfer instruction timing for transferring each division data group to a read RAM (specifically, a bridge side RAM 107) is set. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the initial division data group is performed immediately after the normal reach display is started, and the super reach A display is displayed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the intermediate division data group is given immediately after the start, and the transfer instruction of the final division data group is issued at the timing when the super reach A display corresponding to the initial division data group is completed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that it is performed.

In the above configuration, all the normal reach tables included in the super reach development table group among the normal reach table groups are the initial division data group as the period from the start of the normal reach display to the end of the normal reach display. There is sufficient time to complete the transfer. In addition, all the tables for Super Reach A included in the table group for Super Reach A transfer the intermediate division data group as a period from the start to the end of the display of the image corresponding to the initial division data group. A sufficient period is secured for the completion of the data group, and the period from the start to the end of the display of the image corresponding to the intermediate division data group is sufficient for the transfer of the final division data group to be completed. The period is secured.

If the data group for Super Reach A can be transferred satisfactorily, the number of divisions of the data group for Super Reach A and the transfer instruction timing of each division data group may be limited to the above. Not optional.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and if a jackpot result is generated, a table for super reach A hit corresponding to the stop information for the jackpot result in the current game round. Is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. If the jackpot result does not occur, a super reach A out-of-order table corresponding to the stop information for out-of-reach in this game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b.

Since the super reach A display is an effect executed after the normal reach display is performed based on the normal reach table, the information of the super reach A table acquired in step S1914 is continuous with respect to the normal reach table. The table is stored in the display table storage area 104b. At this time, the display information among the acquired information of the super reach A table is stored in the display area, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Incidentally, in the display table shown in FIG. 34 (b), the case where the notice A table and the super reach development table are acquired and the super reach A off table is acquired is shown.

If it is determined in step S1913 that Super Reach A does not occur in this game round, an affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S1915. In step S1915, a process for acquiring the table for super reach B is executed. After that, in step S1916, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in this game round, and if no jackpot result is generated, the present setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, in the display table storage area 104b, the creation of the display table as shown in FIG. 34 (c) is completed.

Here, the table for Super Reach B will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (d) and 34 (c).

As shown in FIG. 33 (d), the super reach table group in the variable display table storage area 103d includes a table group for hitting super reach B and a table group for leaving super reach B. ..

In the super reach B hit table group, there is a super reach B hit table showing display information necessary for displaying the super reach image at the timing from the start of the super reach display to the jackpot result. Many are included. These super reach B hit tables are prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with the stop information corresponding to the jackpot result.

In addition, the table group for Super Reach B removal shows the display information necessary for displaying the image of Super Reach at the timing from the start of the Super Reach display to the deviation result. Many tables are included. These super reach B off-off tables are prepared so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with the stop information corresponding to the reach off result.

Here, in Super Reach B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is executed, and the effect operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined manner and is not operated. Depending on the case, the content of the subsequent production will be changed. The data capacity of the super reach B data group referred to in performing the super reach B display is the change area excluding the regular area 137 in the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108). It exceeds the capacity when the data capacity of the normal reach data group is subtracted from the storage capacity of.

On the other hand, the data group for Super Reach B is set in a state of being divided into a plurality of data groups. As the plurality of data groups, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), an initial division data group, a first operation system data group, and a second operation system data group are set. Further, the first operation system data group includes a data group for displaying an image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58, and after that, when the effect operation device 58 is not operated in a predetermined manner. A data group for displaying an effect range (an unfinished state effect range) to be progressed to is included. On the other hand, the second operation system data group is data for displaying the effect range (the effect range of the completed mode) that will proceed thereafter when the effect operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined mode. A group is included.

One of the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group includes a data group for displaying the effect range of the unfinished mode, and the other is for displaying the effect range of the completed mode. Since the data group is included, both the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group are for reading from the character ROM 106 in the situation where the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is started. Must have been transferred to RAM. In this case, the data capacity of the sum of the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group does not exceed the storage capacity of the sum of the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108, but these RAMs 107 and 108 are changed. The storage capacity of the usage area is exceeded. Therefore, in order to transfer both the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group to the reading RAM, it is necessary to use the regular area 137 as well.

Information for specifying the transfer instruction timing for transferring each division data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108) is set in each of the super reach B tables. There is. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the initial division data group is performed immediately after the normal reach display is started, and the super reach B display is displayed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the first operation system data group is performed immediately after the start, and the second operation system data group is immediately after the transfer of the first operation system data group is completed. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of.

Further, for the first operation system data group, information is set to the effect that the data needs to be transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108. Furthermore, in each of the tables for Super Reach B, the regular data group to be erased at the time of overwriting is assigned to the regular area 137 in correspondence with the first operation data group being overwritten in the regular area 137. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction is given in order to return to 137. The transfer instruction timing for the return is set immediately after the effect has progressed to either the unfinished mode effect range or the completed mode effect range.

In the above configuration, all the normal reach tables included in the super reach development table group among the normal reach table groups are the initial division data group as the period from the start of the normal reach display to the end of the normal reach display. There is sufficient time to complete the transfer. In addition, all the tables for Super Reach B included in the table group for Super Reach B have the first operation system data as the period from the start to the end of the display of the image corresponding to the initial division data group. A sufficient period is secured for completing the transfer of both the group and the second operation system data group, and the period from the start to the end of the unfinished production range and the production range of the completed mode are set. As the period from the start to the end, a sufficient period is secured to complete the restoration of the regular data group.

If the super reach B data group can be transferred satisfactorily, the number of divisions of the super reach B data group and the transfer instruction timing of each division data group may be limited to the above. Not optional.

In step S1915, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and if a jackpot result is generated, a table for super reach B hit corresponding to the stop information for the jackpot result in the current game round. Is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. If the jackpot result does not occur, the super reach B out-of-order table corresponding to the out-of-reach stop information in the current game round is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b.

Since the super reach B display is an effect executed after the normal reach display is performed based on the normal reach table, the information of the super reach B table acquired in step S1915 is continuous with respect to the normal reach table. The table is stored in the display table storage area 104b. At this time, the display information among the acquired information of the super reach B table is stored in the display area, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. Incidentally, in the display table shown in FIG. 34 (c), the case where the notice B table and the super reach development table are acquired and the super reach B off table is acquired is shown.

If it is determined in step S1916 that a jackpot result will occur in this game round, an affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S1917. In step S1917, it is determined whether or not a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated in the current game round, and further, in step S1918, it is determined whether or not a normal jackpot result is generated in the current game round.

When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs (step S1917: YES), the present setting process ends after executing the process for acquiring the 15R probability variation jackpot table in step S1919. An example of the display table created in the display table storage area 104b in this case is shown in FIG. 35 (a). If a normal jackpot result occurs (step S1918: YES), the setting process ends after executing the process for acquiring the normal jackpot table in step S1920. Further, when the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs (step S1918: NO), the present setting process ends after executing the process for acquiring the explicit 2R jackpot table in step S1921. An example of the display table created in the display table storage area 104b in this case is shown in FIG. 35 (b).

Here, the jackpot effect table will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (e) and 35 (a) to 35 (b).

As shown in FIG. 33 (e), the jackpot effect table group is stored in the jackpot effect table storage area 103e. The jackpot effect table group includes a table for 15R probability variation jackpot, a table for normal jackpot, and a table for explicit 2R probability variation jackpot. The display information required to display the image of the jackpot effect at the timing from the start of the jackpot effect to the end of the jackpot effect on the table for the 15R probability variation jackpot, the table for the normal jackpot, and the table for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot. It is shown.

Here, in the jackpot production corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the jackpot production corresponding to the normal jackpot result, after the jackpot start production is executed, the round production corresponding to each round is executed in each round, and finally the jackpot The end effect is executed. The data capacity of the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group referred to in performing such a jackpot effect excludes the regular area 137 in the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108). It exceeds the capacity when the data capacity of the final division data group in the super reach A data group or the data capacity of the second operation system data group in the super reach B data group is subtracted from the storage capacity of the change area. ..

On the other hand, the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group are set in a state of being divided into a plurality of data groups. As the plurality of data groups, as shown in FIG. 35A, a start effect data group, an all-round effect data group, and an end effect data group are set. In this case, the data capacity of the all-round effect data group does not exceed the storage capacity of the sum of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108, but exceeds the storage capacity of the changing areas of these RAMs 107 and 108. Therefore, in order to transfer the data group for all-round production to the RAM for reading, it is necessary to use the regular area 137 as well.

In order to transfer the start effect data group of each division data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108) in each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table. Information for specifying the transfer instruction timing of is set. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 35A, the transfer instruction of the start effect data group is given immediately after the normal reach is started or immediately after the effect of the last division is started in the super reach. The transfer instruction timing is set.

Here, the transfer instruction timing of the start effect data group when the jackpot effect is executed after the game times in which the super reach display is displayed will be described in detail. The jackpot will be performed after the game times in which the super reach A display is performed. When the effect is executed, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the start effect data group is given immediately after the effect corresponding to the final division data group is started.

In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed after the game in which the super reach B display is performed, the transfer instruction of the start effect data group is given instead of the return instruction of the regular data group in the super reach B display. The transfer instruction timing is set so as to. That is, in step S1919 and step S1920, it is determined whether or not the table information corresponding to the super reach B display is stored in the display table storage area 104b, and if it is stored, the transfer instruction of the display table storage area 104b is instructed. The flag related to the return instruction of the regular data group in the service area is deleted, and the flag related to the transfer instruction of the start effect data group is stored.

In the above configuration, among the normal reach table groups, all the normal reach tables included in the normal hit table group are transferred with the start effect data group as the period from the start to the end of the normal reach display. There is sufficient time to complete it. In addition, among the super reach table groups, all the super reach tables included in the table group for super reach A and the table group for super reach B have started the production of the last division in super reach. A sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer of the start effect data group as the period from the completion to the end.

On the other hand, for the data group for all-round effect and the data group for end effect, the transfer instruction timing is not set in the table for 15R probability variation jackpot and the table for normal jackpot, and these transfer instruction timings are displayed for the jackpot effect. Is predetermined on the processing program for controlling. In the open / close execution mode, the duration of each round and the end period of all rounds change according to the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22, so that the transfer instruction timing is set in the table set based on the elapsed time. This is because it is possible to reduce the complexity of the process related to the transfer instruction when the transfer instruction is set so as to be triggered by the reception of, for example, a predetermined command on the processing program. Such processing will be described later.

In the above processing program, the data group for all-round effect is set so that the transfer instruction is given when the jackpot start effect is started, and the data group for end effect is the reference round (specifically, 13 rounds). It is set so that a transfer instruction is given when the round effect of the eye) is completed. In this case, for the data group for all-round production, information is set that the data group of the first half round needs to be transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108.

In addition, each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table is subject to being erased at the time of overwriting in correspondence with a part of the data group for all-round production being overwritten in the regular area 137. It is necessary to return the regular data group to the regular area 137. The return instruction timing is also predetermined in the processing program, and the return instruction timing is set as a case where the jackpot end effect is started.

By the way, for each of the 15R probability variation jackpot table and the normal jackpot table, the period from the start to the end of the jackpot start effect is sufficient to complete the transfer of the data group for the all-round effect. While the period is secured, the transfer of the end effect data group is completed as the period from the end of the round effect of the reference round (specifically, the 13th round) to the start of the jackpot end effect. Sufficient period is secured above. Furthermore, each of the table for the 15R probability variation jackpot and the table for the normal jackpot has a sufficient period for completing the return of the regular data group as the period from the start to the end of the jackpot end effect. It is secured.

If the 15R probability variation jackpot data group and the normal jackpot data group can be transferred satisfactorily, the number of divisions of the jackpot data group and the transfer instruction timing of the divided data group are as described above. It is not limited and is optional.

The effect corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is an effect in which the same image is displayed from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and the data group for displaying the same image in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group. It is included. Therefore, since the data capacity is relatively small, it is not necessary to divide the data into a plurality of data groups.

In the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot table, information for specifying the transfer instruction timing for transferring the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group to the read RAM (specifically, the bridge side RAM 107) is set. .. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), a transfer instruction for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is given immediately after the normal reach is started or immediately after the production of the last division in the super reach is started. The transfer instruction timing is set so as to.

Here, if the transfer instruction timing of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is explained in detail when the jackpot effect is executed after the game times in which the super reach display is performed, the game times in which the super reach A display is performed When the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is executed later, the transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group is given immediately after the effect corresponding to the final division data group is started. .. In addition, when the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is executed after the game times when the super reach B display is performed, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data is executed immediately after the return of the regular data group is performed in the super reach B display. The transfer instruction timing is set so that the transfer instruction of the group is performed.

In the above configuration, among the normal reach table groups, all the normal reach tables included in the normal hit table group have the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group as the period from the start to the end of the normal reach display. There is sufficient time to complete the transfer. In addition, among the super reach table groups, all the super reach tables included in the table group for super reach A and the table group for super reach B have started the production of the last division in super reach. As a period from the completion to the end, a sufficient period is secured to complete the transfer of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group.

As long as the data group for explicit 2R probability variation jackpot can be transferred satisfactorily, the transfer instruction timing of the data group is not limited to the above and is arbitrary. For example, when the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is executed after the game in which the super reach B display is performed, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is used instead of the return instruction of the regular data group during the execution of the super reach B display. The transfer instruction timing may be reset so that the transfer instruction of the data group is performed. That is, in step S1921, it is determined whether or not the table information corresponding to the super reach B display is stored in the display table storage area 104b, and if it is stored, in the transfer instruction area of the display table storage area 104b. The flag related to the return instruction of the regular data group may be deleted, and the flag related to the transfer instruction of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group may be stored. However, in this configuration, since it is necessary to restore the regular data group in the situation where the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is being executed, the return instruction of the regular data group is issued immediately after the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot effect is started. It is necessary to set the transfer instruction timing so that it is performed.

In step S1919, the 15R probability variation jackpot table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. Further, in step S1920, a normal jackpot table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b. Further, in step S1921, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot table is acquired, and the acquired table information is stored in the display table storage area 104b.

Since the jackpot effect is an effect executed after the variable display of the symbol is performed, the information of the 15R probability variation jackpot table acquired in step S1919, step S1920 or step S1921, the information of the normal jackpot table, or the explicit effect. The information of the 2R probability variation jackpot table is stored in the display table storage area 104b so as to be continuous with any of the normal reach table, the super reach A table, and the super reach B table. At this time, the display information among the acquired normal reach table information is stored in the display area, and the transfer instruction timing information is stored in the transfer instruction area. By the way, in the display table shown in FIG. 35 (a), the case where the notice A table and the normal reach table are acquired and the 15R probability variation jackpot table is acquired is shown. Further, the display table shown in FIG. 35B shows a case where the notice B table and the normal reach table are acquired, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot table is acquired.

Although detailed description is omitted, the setting of each jackpot table is also executed in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 27) by the simple symbol. As a result, in the game times in which the variation display by the simple symbol is performed and the game times correspond to the jackpot result, the effect for the jackpot can be started after the game times in which the variation display is performed on the simple symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the game times in which the variation display by the simple symbol is performed, even if the big hit result occurs in the game times, the effect for the big hit may not be executed. In this case, the symbol display device 31 does not produce a jackpot effect, but the variable winning device 22 is opened and closed.

<Processing during fluctuation by normal symbol>
Next, the process during fluctuation by the normal symbol in step S1509 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the processing during fluctuation by the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received. When the fluctuation end command has not been received, the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 is referred to in step S2002, the display table of the work RAM 104 is referred to in step S2003, and the operation correspondence effect is produced in step S2004. Determine if it is a period.

As described above, the super reach B display is set to have an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the super reach B display is executed in the current game round based on the specific result of step S2003, and if the super reach B display is not executed, a negative determination is made. Further, when the super reach B display is executed, the information on the elapsed time of the game times specified in step S2002 is collated with the display table specified in step S2003, and it corresponds to the operation corresponding effect period. Judge whether or not.

If it corresponds to the operation correspondence effect period, the operation correspondence processing is executed in step S2005. Here, the operation correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not an operation occurrence command is received from the voice lamp control device 90. As described above, the operation generation command is transmitted when the voice lamp control device 90 detects the operation of the effect operation device 58.

When the operation generation command is received, the operation generation flag is stored in the operation generation flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104 in step S2102. In the following step S2103, the information of the counter is updated so as to add 1 to the value of the operation occurrence counter provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104.

After executing the process of step S2103, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the operation occurrence command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the game times measured by the measurement counter has reached the end timing of the operation corresponding effect period, or whether or not the end timing has passed.

If it has not elapsed, this operation corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it has passed, the value of the operation occurrence counter is referred to in step S2105, and it is determined whether or not the value of the operation occurrence counter is equal to or greater than the reference number of times stored in advance in the program ROM 103.

If the number of times exceeds the reference number, the operation completion flag is stored in the operation completion flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104 in step S2106, and then the operation corresponding process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of times is less than the reference number, in step S2107, the operation incomplete flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104 stores the operation incomplete flag, and then the operation corresponding process ends.

By storing the operation completion flag, in the super reach B display, the effect range of the completion mode is executed after the operation corresponding effect period elapses. On the other hand, by storing the operation incomplete flag, in the super reach B display, the effect range of the unfinished mode is executed after the operation corresponding effect period elapses.

That is, when the super reach B display is performed, the effect operation device 58 is operated more than the reference number of times in the operation support effect period, so that the effect range of the completed mode is executed after the operation support effect period elapses, and the effect If the number of operations of the operating device 58 is less than the reference number of times, the unfinished effect range is executed after the operation corresponding effect period elapses. By setting the effect range of the completed mode and the effect range of the unfinished mode in this way, the effect content can be changed depending on whether the effect operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined mode or not. It will be changed, and the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 31 will be diversified.

Returning to the explanation of the process during fluctuation by the normal symbol (FIG. 36), after executing the operation corresponding process in step S2005, or when it is determined in step S2004 that the operation corresponding effect period has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2006. .. In step S2006, the information on the elapsed time of the game times specified in step S2002 is collated with the display table specified in step S2003, and it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list.

When it is the drawing list setting timing, the drawing list setting process is executed in step S2007. Here, the drawing list setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S2201, the background counters provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104 are referred to. As already described, the background counter is a storage means for grasping the background image to be displayed this time by the display CPU 102. When setting the following drawing list, the drawing list corresponding to the background image corresponding to the reference result in step S2201 is set, although not particularly mentioned each time. In the following step S2202, it is determined whether or not the reach is being displayed.

If the reach is not displayed, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the notice is being displayed. If the notice is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the currently stored display table and the information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to, and among the drawing list information for variable display at the time of non-reach, the drawing list information corresponding to the current setting timing is obtained. Read from the storage area 103b. After that, this setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2204 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image in which the variation display of the symbol during non-reach is advanced. Is displayed on the display screen G of.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the reach is not being displayed (step S2202: NO) and the notice is being displayed (step S2203: YES), the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, the currently stored display table and the information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to, and among the drawing list information for advance notice, the one corresponding to the current setting timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. .. In this case, the drawing list information corresponding to the side set in the display table currently stored in the notice A and the notice B is read out. After that, this setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2205 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and advances the variable display of the symbol in the situation where the notice display is performed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), when the reach is being displayed (step S2202: YES), it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the normal reach is being displayed. If the normal reach is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, the currently stored display table and the information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to, and among the drawing list information for normal reach, the one corresponding to the current setting timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. .. After that, this setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2207 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 to advance the normal reach display. Let me.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the normal reach is not displayed (step S2206: NO), it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the super reach A is being displayed. If Super Reach A is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2209. In step S2209, the currently stored display table and the information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to, and among the drawing list information for Super Reach A, the drawing list information storage area 103b corresponding to the current setting timing is used. Read from. After that, this setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2209 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image on which the super reach A display is advanced on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. To display.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), when the super reach A is not displayed (step S2208: NO), it means that the super reach B is being displayed. Therefore, the super reach corresponding to the steps S221 to S2217 is displayed. B The setting process for display is executed.

In this process, first, in step S2210, it is determined whether or not the operation response period has elapsed. If the operation response period has not elapsed, it is determined in step S2211 whether or not the operation occurrence flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the operation occurrence flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2212. In step S2212, the non-operated part and the information on the elapsed time of the game round are referred to in the display table currently stored, and among the drawing list information for Super Reach B, the non-operated part is supported this time. The one corresponding to the setting timing of is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. After that, this setting process ends.

Note that the situation in which the operation support period has not passed and the operation occurrence flag is not stored means that the operation support period has not started in the Super Reach B display or the operation support period is the operation support period. The situation is that 58 is not operated.

The drawing list information read in step S2212 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image in which the non-operation compatible effect is advanced in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of the device 31.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the operation occurrence flag is stored (step S2211: YES), the process proceeds to step S2213. In step S2213, in the display table currently stored, the operation-corresponding part and the information on the elapsed time of the game round are referred to, and among the drawing list information for Super Reach B, the operation-corresponding part is set this time. The one corresponding to the timing is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. After that, after clearing the operation occurrence flag in step S2214, the present setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2213 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image in which the operation-compatible effect is advanced in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of 31.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), when the operation correspondence period has elapsed (step S2210: YES), it is determined in step S2215 whether or not the operation completion flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the operation completion flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2216. In step S2216, in the display table currently stored, the part for completing the operation and the information on the elapsed time of the game round are referred to, and among the drawing list information for Super Reach B, the information for completing the operation is used this time. The one corresponding to the setting timing of is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. After that, this setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2216 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image in which the operation completion effect is advanced in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of the device 31.

In the drawing list setting process (FIG. 38), if the operation completion flag is not stored in the work RAM 104 (step S2215: NO), the process proceeds to step S2217. In step S2217, the unfinished operation part and the information on the elapsed time of the game round are referred to in the display table currently stored, and the drawing list information for Super Reach B is the unfinished operation this time. The one corresponding to the setting timing of is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b. After that, this setting process ends.

The drawing list information read in step S2217 is output to the VDP 105 in step S2008 of the process during fluctuation (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays an image in which the unfinished operation is advanced in the super reach B display. It is displayed on the display screen G of the device 31.

When the process for outputting the drawing list information (step S2008) is executed or it is determined that the timing is not the setting timing of the drawing list (step S2006: NO) in the process during fluctuation by the normal symbol (FIG. 36), the step After executing the data transfer instruction process in S2009, the process during this change is terminated.

On the other hand, if the variable end command is received (step S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, the currently stored display table is referred to, drawing list information corresponding to the one set as the final setting timing in the display table is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b, and the read drawing is performed. The list information is output to VDP105. In the VDP 105, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the final image in the game round is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. As a result, the variable display of the symbols for one game is completed.

After that, in step S2011, after executing the variable end processing for executing the processing such as erasing the flag stored in the work RAM 104 in order to advance the effect for the game round such as the operation completion flag and the operation incomplete flag, The processing during this change is terminated.

<Processing related to image data transfer during the game>
Next, the processing related to the image data in the middle of the game round will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a data transfer instruction process.

As shown in FIG. 39, first, in step S2301, the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104 and the information on the elapsed time of the game times are referred to, and at the transfer instruction timing of the data group for the notice A. Determine if it exists. If the transfer instruction timing of the data group for notice A is set in the display table and the transfer instruction timing is reached, the transfer instruction process of the data group for notice A is executed in step S2302. In the transfer instruction process, the transfer command for the notice A is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. After that, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

Below, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the data group for notice B, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the data group for normal reach, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the initial division data group for super reach A, and whether it is the intermediate of the data group for super reach A. Step S2303, step S2303, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the division data group, whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the final division data group for super reach A, and whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the initial division data group for super reach B. Judgment is made in each of S2305, step S2307, step S2309, step S2311, and step S2313. The method of such determination is the same as that of step S2301 except that the determination target is different.

Further, according to each of the above determination results, the transfer instruction processing of the data group for notice B, the transfer instruction processing of the data group for normal reach, the transfer instruction processing of the initial division data group for super reach A, and the intermediate division for super reach A. Data group transfer instruction processing, final division data group transfer instruction processing for super reach A, and initial division data group transfer instruction processing for super reach B are performed in steps S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2310, and step S2312. , Step S2314, respectively. Such processing is the same as in step S2302 except that the transfer command to be set is different.

If a negative determination is made in step S2313, the display table currently stored and the information on the elapsed time of the game round are referred to in step S2315 to determine whether or not the timing is the transfer instruction timing of the operation data group. To do. The operation system data group includes a first operation system data group and a second operation system data group.

If the transfer instruction timing of the operation system data group is set in the display table and the transfer instruction timing is set, the transfer instruction process of the operation system data group is executed in step S2316. In the transfer instruction process, the transfer command of the operation system data group is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109.

Here, as described above, when the operation system data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM, a part of the operation system data group is overwritten in the regular area 137. Therefore, in step S2317, the overwrite instruction process of the regular data group is executed. In the overwrite instruction process of the regular data group, the overwrite command of the regular data group is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the VDP 105. After that, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

If the transfer instruction timing of the operation data group is not set in the display table, or if the transfer instruction timing of the operation data group is set but the transfer instruction timing is not set, it is denied in step S2315. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S2318. In step S2318, it is determined whether or not it is the return instruction timing of the regular data group by referring to the display table currently stored and the information on the elapsed time of the game times.

If the return instruction timing of the regular data group is set in the display table and the return instruction timing is set, the return instruction process of the regular data group is executed in step S2319. In the return instruction process, the return command for the bridge LSI is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read return command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, and the return command for VDP is returned from the command storage area 103a. The command is read and the read return command is transmitted to the VDP 105. After that, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

Here, when overwriting the regular area 137 is executed, as described above, there is a case where the super reach B display is executed, and in this overwriting, the effect operation device 58 is predetermined. The first operation system data group including the data group for displaying the effect range of the unfinished mode corresponding to the case where the operation is not performed in the above mode is overwritten in the normal area 137, and the effect operation device 58 is predetermined. A second operation system data group including a data group for displaying the effect range of the completed mode corresponding to the operation in the above mode is written in the bridge side RAM 107.

In this case, the return of the regular data group is performed either when the unfinished mode effect range is executed or when the completed mode effect range is executed, but the unfinished mode effect range is executed. In this case, since it is necessary to store the first operation system data group in the regular area 137, the regular data group cannot be returned to the regular area 137. However, even in this case, in the bridge side RAM 107, the regular data group can be written to the area in which the initial division data group of the super reach B display has been stored and further saved.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the regular data group is restored, if the non-erasable data group is stored in the regular area 137, the regular data group is saved in the bridge side RAM 107 in step S2319. In the return instruction processing of the regular data group of, it is determined whether or not the operation incomplete flag is stored in the work RAM 104, and if the operation incomplete flag is stored, a save support return command is transmitted as a return command to the VDP 105. At the same time, if the operation incomplete flag is not stored, a normal return command is transmitted as a return command to VDP105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the process corresponding to each return command, and the write control unit 121 executes the save process based on the information received from the VDP 105. The specific contents of these processes will be described later.

In the data transfer instruction process, if the return instruction timing of the regular data group is not set in the display table, or if the return instruction timing is set but the return instruction timing is not set, it is denied in step S2318. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S2320. In step S2320, it is determined whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the jackpot start effect data group by referring to the display table currently stored and the information on the elapsed time of the game times.

If the transfer instruction timing is not set, or if the transfer instruction timing is set but the transfer instruction timing is not set, the data transfer instruction process is terminated as it is. When the transfer instruction timing is set in the display table and the transfer instruction timing is set, the transfer instruction process of the jackpot start effect data group is executed in step S2321. In the transfer instruction process, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a normal jackpot result, or an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. Then, the transfer command corresponding to each jackpot result is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. After that, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

<Process related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 when the regular area 137 is not overwritten>
Next, a process related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 when the regular area 137 is not overwritten will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a data transfer setting process in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. The data transfer setting process is set as a part of the bridge side main process.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the data transfer setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a transfer command for instructing the transfer of a predetermined data group has been received from the display CPU 102. If none of the transfer commands have been received, step S2402 determines whether or not the data is in the normal data transfer state.

If none of the transfer commands have been received (step S2401: NO) and the data transfer state is not normal (step S2402: NO), the data transfer setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when any of the transfer commands is received (step S2401: YES), the process proceeds to the process of step S2403 and subsequent steps.

In step S2403, the data transfer state at the normal time is set, and in step S2404, the type of the data group to be transferred is specified from the transfer command received this time. Then, in step S2405, the transfer state of the data group to be transferred is set based on the specific result of step S2404.

After that, in step S2406, it is confirmed to which area the data group of the transfer instruction target set this time can be transferred in the bridge side RAM 107, and in the following step S2407, the transferable area is set this time. Set as the transfer target area of the data group to be transferred. Specifically, regarding the processing of steps S2406 and S2407, information on the area to be written in the bridge side RAM 107 is set in the control ROM 124 of the write control unit 121 in correspondence with the data group to be transferred. ..

In this case, the data group to be transferred is the effect executed immediately before the currently executed effect range (that is, the effect range to be executed immediately before the effect range corresponding to the data group to be transferred). The information of the area to be written is set so that the data group corresponding to the range is written to the area including at least a part of the area of the bridge side RAM 107 in which the data group is stored. Here, since the type of the data group stored in the bridge side RAM 107 is different immediately before the transfer of the data group to be transferred is started according to the effect for the game round or the effect for the jackpot, each can be assumed. The area to be written is set according to the situation.

Specifically, since the data group for the notice A and the data group for the notice B are the data groups to be written first in the production for the game round, basically, at the timing when these data groups are to be written, the bridge side The data that cannot be erased is not stored in the RAM 107. Therefore, the data group for the notice A and the data group for the notice B are set to be written in an arbitrary area in the bridge side RAM 107.

However, as will be described later, a situation may occur in which the regular data group is saved in the bridge side RAM 107. In this case, the area where the regular data group is stored should be avoided for the notice A. The data group and the data group for notice B are written.

The area to be written for the normal reach data group is set so as to be written in an area set so as not to overlap with the area in which the notice A data group or the notice B data group is stored.

The area to be written for the initial division data group for Super Reach A is set to include at least a part of the advance notice area, more specifically, the entire area, and is set so as not to overlap with the normal reach area. ing. Further, the area to be written for the intermediate division data group for Super Reach A is set to include at least a part of the normal reach area, more specifically, the entire area, and is the Super Reach A initial division area. It is set so that it does not overlap. Further, the area to be written for the final division data group for Super Reach A is set to include at least a part, more specifically, the entire area for the initial division of Super Reach A, and the intermediate division of Super Reach A. It is set so that it does not overlap with the usage area.

The area to be written for the initial division data group for Super Reach B is set to include at least a part of the advance notice area, more specifically, the entire area, and is set so as not to overlap with the normal reach area. ing. Further, the area to be written for the operation data group is set to include at least a part of the normal reach area, more specifically, the entire area, and is set so as not to overlap with the super reach B initial division area. Has been done.

In the operation system data group, the data capacity of the sum of the first operation system data group and the second operation system data group exceeds the storage capacity of the operation system area. On the other hand, as described above, the first operation system data group is transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108, and the operation system area has a data capacity smaller than the storage capacity of the operation system area. Only the operation system data group of 2 is written. In this case, the first operation system data group is once written in the operation system area as a preliminary step before being transferred to the normal area 137, and then transferred to the normal operation system area 137, and is also transferred to the second operation system data group. Is written in the operation system area after the first operation system data group is transferred from the operation system area to the regular area 137.

The area to be written for the start effect data group corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result is the effect range currently executed in the bridge side RAM 107 (that is, the effect range executed immediately before the jackpot start effect). ) Is set as an area including at least a part of the area in which the data group corresponding to the effect range executed immediately before is stored. Further, the area to be written for the data group for all-round effect is an area including at least a part of the area in which the data group corresponding to the effect range executed immediately before the jackpot start effect is stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Is set as.

The data capacity of the data group for all-round production exceeds the storage capacity of the area to be written, which can be set. On the other hand, as already explained, the data group of the first half of the data group for all-round production is transferred to the regular area 137 of the RAM 108 on the VDP side, and the area to be written has a data capacity larger than the storage capacity of the area. Only the small second half of the data group is written. In this case, the data group in the first half is once written in the area to be written as a preliminary step before being transferred to the regular area 137, and then transferred to the regular area 137, and the data group in the second half is in the first half. After the data group is transferred from the area to be written to the regular area 137, it is written to the area to be written.

Further, the area to be written for the end effect data group is set as an area including at least a part of the area in which the start effect data group is stored. Further, the area to be written for the effect data group corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the effect range currently executed in the bridge side RAM 107 (that is, the effect range executed immediately before the jackpot start effect). It is set as an area including at least a part of the area in which the data group corresponding to the effect range executed immediately before is stored.

By executing the processes of steps S2403 to S2407 in the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40), the data group set as the current transfer instruction target is executed in the data transfer process (FIG. 20) already described. To do. In this case, in the data read start process of the corresponding data in step S1003, the transfer table corresponding to the type of the data group set as the transfer instruction target and the set write target area is read from the control ROM 124 and the control RAM 125 is read. Data is transferred according to the transfer table.

After executing the process of step S2407, the process proceeds to step S2408. Further, when it is determined in step S2402 that the data is in the normal data transfer state, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the data group to be transferred is completed. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the completion flag corresponding to the current transfer state is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. As described above, the completion flag is stored in step S1009 of the data transfer process (FIG. 20).

If the transfer of the data group to be transferred is not completed, the data transfer setting process is terminated as it is. When the transfer of the data group to be transferred is completed, the transfer completion process is executed in step S2409 to release the current transfer state. After that, the data transfer setting process is terminated.

<Process related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and VDP 105 when the regular area 137 is overwritten>
Next, a process related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 when the normal area 137 is overwritten will be described.

The write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 executes the processes of steps S2401 to S2408 when the normal area 137 is overwritten. That is, data transfer is performed using the same subroutine regardless of whether the regular area 137 is not overwritten or overwritten.

Here, the data group set as the transfer target by the write control unit 121 when the overwrite instruction is given includes the data group to be overwritten (specifically, the first data group) to be overwritten in the regular area 137. Operation system data group or data group of the first half of the all-round production data group) and non-overwrite target data group finally written to the bridge side RAM 107 (specifically, the second operation system data group) Alternatively, the latter half of the data group for all-round production) is included. In this configuration, when writing to the regular area 137 is performed, the data group to be overwritten is transferred to the transfer table (information group for reference at the time of transfer) set in the data transfer process (FIG. 20). The information and the information for transferring the non-overwrite target data group are set, but the overwrite target data group is set to be the transfer target first. Further, in the transfer table, the transfer start timing of the non-overwrite target data group is set so that a sufficient period is secured for transferring the overwrite target data group from the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 in the VDP 105. ing.

The VDP 105 overwrites the regular area 137 by executing the overwrite process. The overwriting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The overwrite process is set as a part of the VDP side main process.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not an overwrite command has been received from the display CPU 102. If the overwrite command has not been received, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the overwrite command has been received. If it is not in the overwrite state (step S2502: NO), the overwrite process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the overwrite command is received (step S2501: YES), the overwrite state is set in step S2503. Further, in step S2503, the overwrite table corresponding to the overwrite instruction this time is read from the control ROM 131 of the VDP 105 to the control RAM 132. In the overwrite table, the address information of the area to be referred to when reading data from the bridge side RAM 107, the reference order information when the address information is sequentially referred to, and the data type to be read from each address information area are displayed. Information and is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the data group to be overwritten is either the first operation system data group or the data group of the first half of the all-round production data group, but the latter data group is used. As described above, the area once read by the bridge side RAM 107 varies depending on the effect content for the game round. On the other hand, in the overwrite table, a plurality of patterns are set corresponding to each possible situation, and the display CPU 102 indicates which game rotation effect content is incidentally performed on the VDP 105. Send the overwrite command in a manner that can be recognized by. As a result, the VDP 105 can read the overwrite table corresponding to each situation.

After executing the process of step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. Further, when it is determined in step S2502 that the overwrite state is in effect, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the data to be read is stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Here, the data to be read is unit data that constitutes any of the image data groups, and in step S2504, in the area of the bridge side RAM 107 corresponding to the address information to be read this time in the overwrite table. It is determined whether or not the unit data to be read is stored.

The processing configuration for specifying the data to be read in the VDP 105 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, the unit data included in the data group to be overwritten in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. A write completion signal is transmitted from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105 each time the writing to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, and the VDP 105 may be configured to make an affirmative determination in step S2504 by receiving the write completion signal.

Further, the data to be read is not limited to the configuration of unit data, and a group of image data groups may be set as the data to be read. In this case, the VDP 105 waits until a group of image data groups is newly written to the bridge side RAM 107 without transferring the data to the VDP side RAM 108. In this respect, a configuration in which data is transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 for each unit data is preferable in order to transfer the data group to be overwritten to the VDP-side RAM 108 at an early stage.

If the data to be read is not stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S2504: NO), the overwrite process is terminated as it is. If the data to be read is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S2504: YES), the process proceeds to step S2505.

In step S2505, a writing process for writing the unit data to be read in the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP-side RAM 108 is executed. In this case, the overwrite table is set with information for specifying in the VDP 105 which address unit area in the regular area 137 the unit data is to be written. In the VDP 105, when the unit data is written in the regular area 137, the unit data is written in the unit area of the regular area 137 predetermined.

Here, among the regular data groups transferred to the regular area 137 at the time of initial setting, as described above, the inspection data group, the initial display data group, the abnormality notification data group, and the simple symbol data are included. A group, a first background data group, a normal symbol data group, and a second background data group are set. Of these data groups, the data group excluding the abnormality notification data group has a situation in which the effect range corresponding to the data group to be overwritten is executed and a situation in which the effect range immediately before the effect range is executed. It is a data group that is not used in.

That is, in the super reach B display, the image dedicated to the effect is displayed in the effect range corresponding to the operation data group, and the initial division data group corresponding to the effect range immediately before the effect range is supported. An image dedicated to the production is also displayed in the production range. In addition, an image dedicated to the production is displayed in each round production corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the jackpot start production corresponding to the production range immediately before the production range is also dedicated to the production. The image is displayed.

In the above configuration, the inspection image, the initial display image, and the simple symbol are executed in the situation where the effect range corresponding to the data group to be overwritten is executed and the effect range immediately before the effect range is executed. The image, each background image, and the image of the normal pattern are unnecessary. On the other hand, the abnormality can occur at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the jackpot is being executed, and it is necessary to enable the abnormality notification to be executed at the arbitrary timing accordingly. .. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, an overwrite table is set so that the abnormality notification data group among the regular data groups is not erased when writing the data group to be overwritten, and the other data groups are the data groups to be overwritten. The overwrite table is set so that it will be erased when writing.

In the following step S2506, it is determined whether or not the overwriting this time is completed. If the overwriting is not completed, the overwriting process is terminated as it is. If the overwriting is completed, in step S2507, after canceling the overwriting state, the overwriting process ends.

<Process related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and VDP 105 when the regular data group is returned to the regular area 137>
Next, a process related to data transfer executed by the bridge LSI 109 and the VDP 105 when the regular data group is returned to the regular area 137 will be described.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a data transfer setting process for restoration in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. The data transfer setting process for restoration is set as a part of the bridge side main process.

As shown in FIG. 42, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a return command has been received from the display CPU 102. If the return command has not been received, step S2602 determines whether or not the normal data group is in the return state.

If the return command has not been received (step S2601: NO) and the normal data group is not in the return state (step S2602: NO), the data transfer setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the return command is received (step S2601: YES), the process proceeds to the process after step S2603.

In step S2603, it is confirmed to which area the regular data group can be transferred in the bridge side RAM 107, and in the following step S2604, the transferable area is set as the transfer target area of the regular data group. .. Here, as the situation where the regular data group is restored, the operation system is produced in the super reach B display, and the jackpot ends in the jackpot production corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result. The situation is that the production is being performed. In each of these situations, in the former situation, the area that includes at least a part of the area where the initial division data group is stored in the Super Reach B display and does not overlap with the area where the operation system data group is stored is the writing target. It is set as an area of. On the other hand, in the latter situation, an area that includes at least a part of the area where the round effect data group is stored and does not overlap with the area where the end effect data group is stored is set as the area to be written. ing.

In the following step S2605, the normal data group is set to the return state and the inspection data group is set to the transfer state. After executing the process of step S2605, the process proceeds to step S2606. Further, when it is determined in step S2602 that the normal data group is in the restored state, the process proceeds to step S2606.

Hereinafter, in steps S2606 to S2617, the transfer state of each data group constituting the regular data group to be restored is set and canceled in sequence. In this case, in steps S2606 to S2607, the same processing as in steps S904 to S905 in the initial setting processing (FIG. 19) of the regular data group is executed. Further, in step S2608, it is determined whether or not the initial display data group has been transferred, and if it has not been transferred, the process proceeds to step S2610 as it is, and if it has been transferred, in step S2609, for initial display. After canceling the transfer state of the data group and setting the transfer state of the simple symbol data group, the process proceeds to step S2610.

Further, in steps S261 to S2611, the same processing as in steps S910 to S911 in the initial setting processing (FIG. 19) of the regular data group is executed. Further, in steps S2612 to S2613, the same processing as in steps S912 to S913 in the initial setting processing (FIG. 19) of the regular data group is executed. Further, in steps S2614 to S2615, the same processing as in steps S914 to S915 in the initial setting processing (FIG. 19) of the regular data group is executed. Further, in step S2616, it is determined whether or not the second background data group has been transferred, and if it has not been transferred, the present data transfer setting process is terminated as it is, and if it has been transferred, step S2617 is performed. Then, after canceling the transfer state of the second background data group and canceling the return state of the regular data group, the present data transfer setting process is terminated.

When each transfer state is set as described above, the data group corresponding to the set transfer state is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 in the data transfer process (FIG. 20). In this case, each data group is transferred to the transfer target area set in step S2604.

Here, as described above, when overwriting the regular area 137, the abnormality notification data group is excluded from the regular data group. Therefore, when the regular data group is restored, the abnormality notification data group is not transferred. As a result, the time until the transfer is completed is shortened when the regular data group is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 at the time of recovery as compared with the case where the regular data group is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 at the time of initial setting. There is.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a return process in the VDP 105. The return process is set as a part of the VDP side main process.

In the return process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a return command has been received from the display CPU 102. If the return command has not been received, in step S2702, it is determined whether or not the normal data group is in the return state.

If the return command has not been received (step S2701: NO) and the normal data group is not in the return state (step S2702: NO), the main return process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the return command is received (step S2701: YES), the return state of the regular data group is set in step S2703. Further, in step S2703, the return table corresponding to the current return instruction is read from the control ROM 131 of the VDP 105 to the control RAM 132. In the return table, the address information of the area to be referred to when reading data from the bridge side RAM 107, the reference order information when the address information is sequentially referred to, and the data type to be read from each address information area are displayed. Information and is set.

In the following step S2704, it is determined whether or not the return command received this time is a save-compatible return command. In the case of the evacuation correspondence return command, the evacuation state is set in step S2705. Here, as already explained, the evacuation support return command has reached the return timing of the regular data group, but since the non-erasable data group is stored in the current regular area 137, the regular data group is stored in the regular area. This command is transmitted from the display CPU 102 when it is necessary to save the data in the bridge side RAM 107 without returning to the 137. Therefore, the save state is a state in which the regular data group is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107, but is saved in the bridge side RAM 107 without being written in the regular area 137.

After executing the process of step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. Further, when it is determined in step S2702 that the normal data group is in the return state, or when it is determined in step S2704 that the normal return command is received instead of the save response return command, the process proceeds to step S2706.

In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the evacuation state is in effect. If it is in the saved state, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not a command corresponding to the information for releasing the saved state has been received from the display CPU 102. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a variation end command is received from the display CPU 102. The change end command is transmitted to the VDP 105 when the change end process of step S2011 in the change process (FIG. 36) by the normal symbol is executed in the display CPU 102.

If the variable end command has not been received, the return process ends after starting the transmission of the save status signal in step S2708. If the evacuation status signal has already been transmitted, that state is maintained. The evacuation status signal is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. When the save status signal is received from the VDP 105, the write control unit 121 regulates the regular data group stored in the bridge side RAM 107 so as not to overwrite other data groups.

Specifically, in step S2406 in the data transfer process (FIG. 40) of the write control unit 121, it is determined whether or not a save status signal is received from the VDP 105. Then, when the save status signal is received, the area in which the regular data group is stored in the bridge side RAM 107 is excluded from the transferable area. As a result, in the saved state, it is possible to prevent other data groups from being overwritten on the regular data group saved in the bridge side RAM 107.

When the variable end command is received (step S2707: YES), the return process is terminated after the save state is released in step S2709. That is, the situation in which the regular data group is saved is a situation in which the production range of the unfinished mode is executed in the super reach B display as already explained, and the situation is canceled when the game round is completed. Will be done. Therefore, when the variable end command is received, the save state is released.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the data is not in the retracted state, it is determined in step S2710 whether or not the data to be read is stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Here, the data to be read is unit data constituting any of the image data groups, and in step S2710, in the area of the bridge side RAM 107 corresponding to the address information to be read this time in the return table. It is determined whether or not the unit data to be read is stored.

The processing configuration for specifying the data to be read in the VDP 105 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. For example, the unit data included in the data group to be restored in the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. A write completion signal is transmitted from the write control unit 121 to the VDP 105 each time the writing to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, and the VDP 105 may receive the write completion signal to make an affirmative determination in step S2710.

Further, the data to be read is not limited to the configuration of unit data, and a group of image data groups may be set as the data to be read. In this case, the VDP 105 waits until a group of image data groups is newly written to the bridge side RAM 107 without transferring the data to the VDP side RAM 108. In this respect, a configuration in which data is transferred from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108 for each unit data is preferable in order to transfer the data group to be restored to the VDP-side RAM 108 at an early stage.

If the data to be read is not stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S2710: NO), the main return process is terminated as it is. If the data to be read is stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 (step S2710: YES), the process proceeds to step S2711.

In step S2711, a writing process for writing the unit data to be read in the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 of the VDP-side RAM 108 is executed. In this case, the return table is set with information for specifying in the VDP 105 which address unit area in the regular area 137 the unit data is to be written. In the VDP 105, when the unit data is written in the regular area 137, the unit data is written in the unit area of the regular area 137 predetermined.

Here, as described above, among the regular data groups, the abnormality notification data group is not overwritten and is stored and held in the regular area 137. In this case, in the return table, the information of the area to be written is set so that the normal data group is not overwritten in the area where the abnormality notification data group is stored when the normal data group is returned. Has been done.

In the following step S2712, it is determined whether or not the restoration of the regular data group is completed. If the restoration is not completed, the main restoration process is terminated as it is. When the restoration is completed, in step S2713, after releasing the restoration state of the regular data group, the main restoration process is terminated.

<Transfer of various data groups as the production for the game is progressed>
Next, a state in which various data groups are transferred along with the progress of the production for the game round will be described. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how various data groups are transferred as the production progresses in the game times in which the notice B display and the super reach B display are performed and the final reach result is lost. ..

FIG. 44A shows a display table when the super reach B display is performed, and FIG. 44B shows data stored in the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108 and the bridge side RAM 107 at each timing of the game round. Shows a group. Further, FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (h) show images displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 at each timing.

The timing of t1 is the start timing of this game round. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the initial variation display data group, specifically, each background data group and the normal symbol data group are stored in the regular area 137, and the initial variation display data group is stored. The drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the variable display data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44A, the variable display of the symbol in the current game round is started.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the transfer timing of the data group for the notice B is set, so that the transfer of the data group for the notice B to the bridge side RAM 107 is started, and at the timing of t3. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the transfer of the notice B data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed. The data capacity of the notice B data group is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107, and the notice B data group is written in a part of the bridge side RAM 107. By the way, even in the situation where the data group for the notice B is being transferred, the symbol display device 31 is performing variable display of the symbols in all the symbol sequences.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the start timing of the notice B display is reached. In this case, the advance notice B data group is already stored in the bridge side RAM 107, and the image data included in the notice B data group is appropriately used and stored in the regular area 137 as the initial change data group. The drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the included image data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the character for the notice B is displayed in the situation where the symbol display device 31 is performing the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the transfer timing of the normal reach data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is reached, so that the transfer of the normal reach data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is started, and t6 At the timing of, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the transfer of the normal reach data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed. The data capacity of the normal reach data group is set smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107 minus the data capacity of the notice B data group, and the normal reach data group is set in a part of the bridge side RAM 107. It is written in an area that does not overlap with the area where the data group for notice B is stored. By the way, even in the situation where the normal reach data group is being transferred, the character for notice B is displayed in the situation where the symbol display device 31 is displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in all the symbol rows. There is.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 44A, the start timing of the normal reach display is reached. In this case, the normal reach data group is already stored in the bridge side RAM 107, and the image data included in the normal reach data group is appropriately used and included in the initial fluctuation data group stored in the regular area 137. The drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 using the image data as appropriate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), the symbol display device 31 performs reach display.

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the transfer timing of the initial division data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is reached, so that the transfer of the initial division data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is started, and t9 At the timing of, the transfer of the initial division data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed as shown in FIG. 44 (B).

The data capacity of the initial division data group is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107 minus the data capacity of the normal reach data group, and the initial division data group is set in a part of the bridge side RAM 107. It is written in an area that does not overlap with the area where the normal reach data group is stored. Further, in this case, since the area in which the initial division data group is written includes the area in which the notice B data group has been stored up to that point, the notice B data group is deleted.

Here, in FIG. 44 (B), for convenience, the area where the data group for notice B is stored and the area where the initial division data group is stored are shown as if they are the same. The size of the area to be written varies depending on the data capacity of the data group to be written. This also applies to other data groups. That is, a plurality of data groups are stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 at the same time, but the size of the area in which each of these data groups is stored varies depending on the type of the stored data group. ..

By the way, even in the situation where the initial division data group is being transferred, the symbol display device 31 is performing the normal reach display.

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the start timing of the super reach B display is reached. In this case, the initial division data group is already stored in the bridge side RAM 107, and the drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the initial division data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the effect range of the initial division in the super reach B display.

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the operation system data group is transferred to the regular area 137 and the bridge side RAM 107, so that the operation system data group is transferred to these RAMs 137 and 107. Is started. In this case, the transfer of the first operation system data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is started first, and the transfer of the first operation system data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed at the timing of t12.

The data capacity of the first operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the initial division data group from the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107, and the first operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity of the bridge side RAM 107. It is written in a part of the area that does not overlap with the area where the initial division data group is stored. Further, since the area in which the first operation system data group is written includes the area in which the normal reach data group has been stored up to that point, the normal reach data group is deleted.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the transfer of the first operation system data group from the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 is started, and at the timing of t14, the transfer to the regular area 137 is started. The transfer of the first operation system data group is completed. The data capacity of the first operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the abnormality notification data group from the storage capacity of the regular area 137, and the first operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the abnormality notification data group. It is written in a part of the area of 137 that does not overlap with the area in which the abnormality notification data group is stored. In FIG. 44B, for convenience, only the first operation system data group is shown in the regular area 137 as if it is stored in the regular area 137, but in reality, it is shown in the regular area 137. As described above, the first operation system data group and the abnormality notification data group are stored.

Further, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 44B, the transfer of the second operation system data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is started, and at the timing of t15, the second operation system to the bridge side RAM 107 is started. The transfer of the data group is completed.

The data capacity of the second operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity obtained by subtracting the data capacity of the initial division data group from the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107, and the second operation system data group is set to be smaller than the capacity of the bridge side RAM 107. It is written in a part of the area that does not overlap with the area where the initial division data group is stored. Further, in this case, the area in which the second operation system data group is written includes the area in which the first operation system data group has been stored so far, so that the first operation system data group is deleted. ..

When the transfer of the second operation system data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, the transfer of the operation system data group from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM is completed. By the way, even in the situation where the operation system data group is being transferred, the symbol display device 31 executes the effect range of the initial division in the super reach B display.

After that, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the start timing of the operation effect is reached. During the period corresponding to the operation effect (operation support effect period), the image of the effect range of the initial division is continuously displayed, and the image corresponding to the operation device 58 is displayed as a symbol each time the effect operation device 58 is operated. This is the period displayed by the device 31. In this case, the first operation system data group is already stored in the regular area 137, and the initial division data group is still stored in the bridge side RAM 107. When the effect operation device 58 is operated, the drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the initial division data group and the image data included in the first operation system data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), in the situation where the symbol display device 31 displays the image of the effect range of the initial division in the super reach B display, the character corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is displayed. Is displayed.

After that, the operation corresponding production period elapses at the timing of t17. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the effect operating device 58 has been operated in a predetermined manner during the operation corresponding effect period, specifically, when the effect operation device 58 has been operated more than the reference number of times. After that, the effect range of the completed mode progresses, and if the operation is not performed in the predetermined mode, the effect range of the unfinished mode progresses thereafter.

Even when the effect range is branched into a plurality of patterns in this way, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the image data corresponding to the unfinished effect range is the first operation system. The data group is stored in the regular area 137, and the image data corresponding to the effect range of the completed mode is stored in the bridge side RAM 107 as the second operation system data group. Therefore, it is possible to correspond to any production range.

When the effect range of the completion mode is executed, the drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the second operation system data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), the symbol display device 31 displays the character according to the completion mode. On the other hand, when the unfinished effect range is executed, the drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the first operation system data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (g), the symbol display device 31 displays the character corresponding to the incomplete mode.

After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the return timing of the regular data group is set. In this case, the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 is started regardless of whether the effect range of the completed mode is being executed or the effect range of the unfinished mode is being executed. Then, at the timing of t19, the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed.

The data capacity of the regular data group is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the bridge side RAM 107 minus the data capacity of the second operation system data group, and the regular data group is set to be a part of the area of the bridge side RAM 107. The second operation system data group is written in an area that does not overlap with the storage area. Further, since the area in which the regular data group is written includes the area in which the initial division data group has been stored up to that point, the initial division data group is deleted.

In the situation where the effect range of the completion mode is executed at the timing when the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed as described above, the transfer of the regular data group from the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 is immediately performed. The transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is completed at the timing of t20. In this case, the abnormality notification data group is already stored in the regular area 137, and the abnormality notification data group is not included in the normal data group to be restored. Therefore, when transferring the regular data group from the bridge-side RAM 107 to the regular area 137, the regular data group is written in an area that does not overlap with the area in which the abnormality notification data group is stored in the regular area 137.

On the other hand, in the situation where the effect range of the unfinished mode is executed, even if the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is not started, and the regular data is not started. The group is in a state of being retracted to the bridge side RAM 107.

After that, at the timing of t21, the fluctuation end timing is set as shown in FIG. 44 (A). In this case, the drawing process is executed by the VDP 105 by appropriately using the image data included in the initial division data group of the regular data group. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (h), the symbol display device 31 displays the stop result corresponding to the current game result. By the way, when displaying the stop result, when the regular data group is returned to the regular area 137, the regular data group stored in the regular area 137 is referred to, and the regular data group is saved in the bridge side RAM 107. If so, the regular data group stored in the bridge side RAM 107 is referred to.

In addition, when the unfinished production range is executed in this game round, the transfer of the regular data group from the bridge side RAM 107 to the regular area 137 is started at the timing of t21 when the variation display of the symbol ends. At the timing of t22, the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is completed. The erasure of the regular data group from the bridge side RAM 107 is restricted until the transfer of the regular data group to the regular area 137 is completed.

<Big hit control process of display CPU 102>
Next, the jackpot control process in step S1402 will be described.

The jackpot control process includes an effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot from the end of the game round that results in the 15R probability variation jackpot until the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result, and the normal jackpot result. The effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot from the end of the game round to the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result, and the game round that results in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The effect control process for controlling the effect for the jackpot until the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result ends is set. However, the effect control process for the 15R probability variation jackpot and the effect control process for the normal jackpot have the same processing configuration. Hereinafter, the effect control process for the 15R probability variation jackpot and the effect control process for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot will be described.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for a 15R probability variation jackpot.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not it is after the jackpot start effect. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the post-start effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The post-start effect flag is stored when the end timing of the jackpot start effect is reached, and is deleted when the end of the current jackpot effect.

If it is not after the jackpot start effect, it is determined in step S2802 whether or not the jackpot start effect is in progress. If the jackpot start effect is not in progress, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the opening command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received.

If the opening command has not been received, the effect control process is terminated as it is. When the opening command is received, in step S2804, the period for the jackpot start effect is specified, and the information of the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. Information on the period for the jackpot start effect is stored in advance in the program ROM 103. Further, the measurement counter is also used when measuring the elapsed time of the game times, and the method of updating the counter has already been described.

In the following step S2805, the type of the current drawing list information is specified by referring to the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. It is read from the storage area 103b and output to the VDP 105. As a result, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image of the jackpot start effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. ..

In the following step S2806, the transfer instruction processing of the all-round effect data group is executed. In the transfer instruction process, the transfer command of the all-round effect data group is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109.

Here, as described above, when the all-round effect data group is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM, a part of the all-round effect data group is overwritten in the regular area 137. Therefore, in the following step S2807, the overwrite instruction process of the regular data group is executed. In the overwrite instruction process of the regular data group, the overwrite command of the regular data group is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read command is transmitted to the VDP 105. After that, the present effect control process is terminated.

By receiving the transfer command of the data group for all-round effect, the bridge LSI 109 executes the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) already described, and displays the data group for all-round effect. Transfer to the bridge side RAM 107. Further, in the VDP 105, by receiving the overwrite command, the overwrite process (FIG. 41) already described is executed, and the data group of the first half portion of the data group for all-round effect is overwritten in the regular area 137. At the time of this overwriting, as described above, the area in which the data group excluding the abnormality notification data group among the regular data group is stored is overwritten.

When the jackpot start effect is in progress (step S2802: YES), it is determined in step S2808 whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list. If it is not the set timing, the present effect control process is terminated as it is, and if it is the set timing, the present effect control process is terminated after the drawing list information of this time is output in step S2809.

In these steps S2808 and S2809, by referring to the elapsed time of the jackpot start effect measured by the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b, the drawing list can be displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the setting timing, and the type of drawing list information is specified. Further, by outputting the drawing list information in step S2809, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and produces a jackpot start effect. The image to be advanced is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

If it is after the jackpot start effect (step S2801: YES), the effect control process ends after the start effect post-processing is executed in step S2810. The post-start effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 22a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The opening flag is stored when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received, and is cleared when the closing command is received.

If it is not being released, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not the release command has been received. When the release command is received, the period for one round is specified in step S2903, and the information of the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. The information for the period for one round is stored in advance in the program ROM 103.

In the following step S2904, the information of the round counter provided in the various counter areas 104c of the work RAM 104 is updated so that the counter value is incremented by 1. In the following step S2905, the round counter is referred to.

After that, in step S2906, by referring to the number of rounds measured by the round counter and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b, the start of the round related to the start of this time is supported. The type of drawing list information is specified, and the specified drawing list information is output to the VDP 105. After that, the post-processing of the main start effect is completed. The VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and displays the image corresponding to this round on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

When the large winning opening 22a is open (step S2901: YES), it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the closing command is received. If the close command has not been received, it is determined in step S2908 whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list. If it is not the set timing, the post-start effect process is terminated as it is, and if it is the set timing, the post-start effect process is terminated after the drawing list information of this time is output in step S2909.

In these steps S2908 and S2909, the drawing list is set by referring to the elapsed time of the round effect measured by the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b. Determine whether it is timing or not, and specify the type of drawing list information. Further, by outputting the drawing list information in step S2909, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and proceeds with the round effect. The image to be to be displayed is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

When the closing command is received (step S2907: YES), it is determined in step S2910 whether or not the counter value of the round counter is the counter value corresponding to the return target round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to 13 rounds.

If the counter value corresponds to the return target round, the return instruction process of the regular data group is executed in step S2911. In the return instruction process, the return command for the bridge LSI is read from the command storage area 103a of the program ROM 103, and the read return command is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, and the return command for VDP is returned from the command storage area 103a. The command is read and the read return command is transmitted to the VDP 105.

Here, when the first operation system data group is overwritten in the regular area 137 in the situation where the super reach B display is performed, the first operation system data group is still at the return instruction timing of the regular data group. A situation may occur in which the data group is in use. In this case, by sending a save support return command as a return command to VDP105, it is not necessary to use the first operation data group once. The regular data group is saved in the bridge side RAM 107 until it becomes. On the other hand, when a part of the data group for all-round effect is overwritten on the regular area 137 in the situation where the effect for big hit is performed, the data group of the first half of the data group for all-round effect is displayed. The regular area 137 is overwritten. In addition, the return instruction timing of the regular data group is set after the first half of the rounds of all rounds are completed. That is, at the timing when the return instruction process of step S2911 is executed, there is no problem even if the regular data group is restored to the regular area 137. Therefore, in step S2911, a normal return command is always transmitted to the VDP 105.

By receiving the return command, the bridge LSI 109 executes the return data transfer setting process (FIG. 42) described above, and transfers the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107. Further, in the VDP 105, by receiving the normal return command, the return process (FIG. 43) already described is executed, and the regular data group is returned to the regular area 137. At the time of this return, as described above, the current regular data group is written to the area other than the area in which the abnormality notification data group is already stored in the regular area 137.

After executing the process of step S2911, the process proceeds to step S2912. Further, even if a negative determination is made in step S2910, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the round counter is the counter value corresponding to the final round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to 15 rounds.

If the counter value does not correspond to the final round, the post-processing for the main start effect is terminated as it is. If the counter value corresponds to the final round, the period for the end effect is specified in step S2913, and the information of the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. Information on the period of the end effect is stored in advance in the program ROM 103.

In the following step S2914, the type of the current drawing list information is specified by referring to the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. It is read from the storage area 103b and output to the VDP 105. After that, the post-processing of the main start effect is completed. In the VDP 105, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the image of the jackpot end effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

If it is determined in step S2902 that the release command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, it is determined whether or not the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received.

If the ending command has not been received, in step S2916, it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list in the situation where the jackpot end effect is being executed. If it is not the set timing, the post-start effect process is terminated as it is, and if it is the set timing, the post-start effect process is terminated after the drawing list information of this time is output in step S2917.

In these steps S2916 and S2917, the elapsed time of the jackpot end effect measured by the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b are referred to, and the drawing list is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the setting timing, and the type of drawing list information is specified. Further, by outputting the drawing list information in step S2917, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and produces a jackpot end effect. The image to be advanced is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

On the other hand, if the ending command has been received (step S2915: YES), the process proceeds to step S2918. In step S2918, the content of the current standby image is grasped. Specifically, the type of background image currently set can be grasped by referring to the counter value of the background counter of the work RAM 104. In the following step S2919, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the standby image to be displayed using the background image grasped in step S2918 is specified, and the specified drawing list information is stored in the drawing list information storage of the program ROM 103. It is read from the area 103b and output to the VDP 105. After that, the post-processing of the main start effect is completed.

In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S2919, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the standby image of this time is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. By the way, in the production for the jackpot, the background image used for the variable display of the design is not displayed.

Next, the effect control process for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for explicit 2R probability variation jackpot.

First, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the production for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is in progress. The determination is made by determining whether or not the effecting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The effect during effect flag is stored when the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is started, and is deleted when the effect is ended.

When the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is not being performed, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the opening command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received. If the opening command has not been received, the effect control process is terminated as it is. When the opening command is received, in step S3003, the period for a series of effects is specified for the effect for the explicit 2R jackpot, and the information of the specified period is set in the measurement counter of the work RAM 104. The information of the period is stored in advance in the program ROM 103. Further, the measurement counter is also used when measuring the elapsed time of the game times, and the method of updating the counter has already been described.

In the following step S3004, the type of the current drawing list information is specified by referring to the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b of the work RAM 104, and the specified drawing list information is used as the drawing list information of the program ROM 103. It is read from the storage area 103b and output to the VDP 105. After that, the present effect control process is terminated. In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3004, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is used. The image of the effect of is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

When the production for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is in progress (step S3001: YES), whether or not the ending command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received in step S3005. Is determined. If the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3006.

In step S3006, it is determined whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list. If it is not the set timing, the effect control process is terminated as it is. If it is the setting timing, the present effect control process is terminated after the drawing list information of this time is output in step S3007.

In these steps S3006 and S3007, the elapsed time of the effect for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot measured by the measurement counter of the work RAM 104 and the display table currently stored in the display table storage area 104b can be referred to. , Determines whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list, and specifies the type of drawing list information. Further, by outputting the drawing list information in step S3007, the VDP 105 executes the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described, and explicitly 2R probability variation jackpot. The image for advancing the effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

On the other hand, when the ending command is received (step S3005: YES), the effect control process ends after the processes of steps S3008 and S3009 are executed. The processes of steps S3008 and S3009 are the same as the processes of steps S2918 and S2919, and by executing such processes, a standby image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

As described above, in the effect control process for the 15R probability variation jackpot (FIG. 45), a part of the image data group used in the VDP 105 at the time of the effect for the jackpot is overwritten on the regular area 137, and the effect for the jackpot is produced. In contrast to the configuration in which the regular data group is returned to the regular area 137 by the end of, the effect control process (FIG. 47) for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot does not perform the above-mentioned overwriting or restoration.

In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the duration of each round changes according to the winning frequency to the variable winning device 22, so that the start timing of the effect corresponding to each round becomes an arbitrary timing. Then, the image data group used in the VDP 105 for displaying the effect for each round is collectively transferred from the character ROM 106 to the RAM for reading as the data group for all round effect as described above. Is preferable. However, since the data capacity is relatively large, by overwriting a part of the data group of the data group for all-round production in the regular area 137, the storage capacity of the RAM for reading is suppressed and for each round. It is possible to display the effect of.

On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the total number of rounds is set to be smaller and the duration of each round is definitely shorter than the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Become. Therefore, the data capacity of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot data group becomes relatively small, and it is not necessary to use the regular area 137. Therefore, it is not necessary to overwrite the regular area 137 or restore the regular data group.

<Abnormality notification control process of display CPU 102>
Next, the abnormality notification control process in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the abnormality is being notified. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the abnormality notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104. The abnormality notification flag is stored when the abnormality identification command transmitted from the main control device 60 and relayed by the voice lamp control device 90 is received, and is deleted when the abnormality release command is received.

If the abnormality is not being notified, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the abnormality identification command has been received. If it has not been received, this abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. If it is being received, in step S3103, the abnormality notification flag is stored and the abnormality notification state is set. In the following step S3104, the type of drawing list information for abnormality notification is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and output to the VDP 105. After that, the abnormality notification control process is terminated.

In VDP105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3104, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the image for abnormality notification is executed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In the image, the specific content of the abnormality is shown.

Here, the abnormality notification data group referred to for displaying the abnormality notification image on the VDP 105 is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108 as a regular data group when the power is turned on. That state is maintained while the power is turned on. Assuming a configuration in which the abnormality notification data group is not resident in the regular area 137, it becomes necessary to read the image data included in the abnormality notification data group from the character ROM 106 every time the abnormality notification is executed, and the character ROM 106 needs to read the image data. In a configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used, there is a concern that the start timing of abnormality notification may be delayed with respect to the occurrence timing of the abnormality due to the slow transfer speed. On the other hand, since the abnormality notification data group is resident in the regular area 137 as described above, the abnormality notification can be started immediately when an abnormality occurs.

In addition, when the super reach B display is performed as the effect for the game round, or when the effect corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is performed as the effect for the jackpot, a part of the data group for the effect is performed. Is overwritten in the regular area 137, and the abnormality notification data group is excluded from the deletion target at the time of this overwriting. It is conceivable that an abnormality will occur even in a situation where a game-use effect is being performed or a jackpot-use effect is being performed, and in such a situation, as described above, an abnormality is notified from the erase target when overwriting. By excluding the data group for games, even if an abnormality occurs in a situation where a game rounding effect is being performed or a jackpot production is being performed, abnormality notification can be started immediately. it can.

By the way, even in the situation where the abnormality notification flag is stored, the display CPU 102 shifts to the processing of each subroutine other than the abnormality notification control processing (game times control processing, jackpot control processing, and standby image control processing). However, in the situation where the abnormality notification flag is stored, the drawing list information is not output in the processing of those other subroutines. Specifically, although not shown in each flowchart, it is determined whether or not the abnormality notification flag is stored before each process in which the drawing list information is output, and the abnormality notification flag is stored. If it is, it is regulated so that the drawing list information is not output. However, since processing other than the output processing is executed, the transfer of the data group corresponding to the elapsed time of the game times and the elapsed time of the jackpot effect is performed even during the abnormality notification.

If the abnormality is being notified (step S3101: YES), it is determined in step S3105 whether or not the abnormality release command has been received. If the error release command has not been received, step S3106 determines whether or not the drawing list is set at the same time. If it is not the setting timing of the drawing list, the abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. When it is the setting timing, the type of the current drawing list information is specified in step S3107, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and output to the VDP 105. After that, the abnormality notification control process is terminated.

In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3107, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the abnormality notification is advanced. The image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In this case, the symbol display device 31 is controlled so that characters or the like indicating the specific contents of the abnormality blink. It should be noted that the process of steps S3106 to S3107 may not be executed, and the same image may be continuously displayed at the time of abnormality notification.

On the other hand, when the abnormality release command is received (step S3105: YES), the abnormality notification state is released by clearing the abnormality notification flag in step S3108. After that, the abnormality notification control process is terminated.

By canceling the abnormality notification state, the drawing list information is not output in the processing of each subroutine (game turn control processing, jackpot control processing, and standby image control processing) other than the abnormality notification control processing in the display CPU 102. The state regulated by is released. As a result, the drawing list information is first output in any of the processes of the above subroutines, so that the image of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is changed from the image for abnormality notification to the output drawing list information. Switch to the corresponding image. In this case, the effect for the game round and the effect for the jackpot may be restarted, but as already explained, the data group based on the display table is transferred even during the abnormality notification, so that effect. The data group necessary for resuming the above is read from the character ROM 106 into the reading RAM.

In addition, a configuration may be configured in which a plurality of types of abnormalities to be notified of abnormalities are set. In this case, the main control device 60 includes information on the type of abnormality in the abnormality identification command, and when the display CPU 102 receives the abnormality identification command, it identifies the type of abnormality and displays an image corresponding to the identification result. It is good to do so.

<Standby image control process of display CPU 102>
Next, the standby image control process in step S1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the production for the game round is in progress. If the production for the game round is in progress, the standby image control process is terminated as it is, and if the production for the game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the jackpot production is in progress. If the jackpot effect is being produced, the standby image control process is terminated as it is, and if the jackpot effect is being produced, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular data group is completed. If the transfer of the regular data group is not completed, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed. If the transfer of the normal symbol data group is not completed, the standby image control process is terminated as it is. When the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed, it is determined in step S3205 whether or not it is the update timing of the standby image. This update timing is set as a period for a predetermined number of repetition cycles in the display CPU 102, for example, once every 20 msec.

If it is not the update timing, the standby image control process is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, in step S3206, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the update of the standby image this time is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103. Output to VDP105. After that, the standby image control process is terminated. In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3206, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the standby image of the update destination is executed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

Here, in the situation where the transfer of the regular symbol data group is not completed, the situation where the transfer of the normal symbol data group is completed means that the first background data group and the normal symbol data group are regularly used when the power is turned on. The transfer to the area 137 has been completed, but the transfer of the second background data group to the regular area 137 has not been completed. That is, the transfer of the data group corresponding to the all display modes is not completed when the power is turned on, but the transfer of the data group corresponding to the reference display mode is completed. By starting the display of the standby image in such a situation, the display of the standby image is powered by the standby image display as compared with the configuration in which the standby image display is not started until the transfer of the data group corresponding to the full display mode is completed. It can be started early after launch.

On the other hand, when the transfer of the regular data group is completed (step S3203: YES), the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, it is determined whether or not an operation occurrence command is received from the voice lamp control device 90. When the operation occurrence command is received, the background counter update process is executed in step S3208. As described above, two types of display modes are set, a first display mode in which the first background image is displayed and a second display mode in which the second background image is displayed. Therefore, in step S3208, when the counter value corresponds to the first display mode, the counter value is updated to the counter value corresponding to the second display mode, and when the counter value corresponds to the second display mode, the first display is performed. Update to the counter value corresponding to the mode.

In the following step S3209, it is determined whether or not the background counter has a counter value corresponding to the first display mode, and if it is a counter value corresponding to the first display mode, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the first background image and the current stop symbol in each symbol string is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and VDP105. Output to. After that, the present effect control process is terminated. In VDP105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3210, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the first background image is displayed. The standby image used is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

If the background counter does not have a counter value corresponding to the first display mode (step S3209: NO), the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the second background image and the current stop symbol in each symbol string is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and VDP105. Output to. After that, the present effect control process is terminated. In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3211, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the second background image is displayed. The standby image used is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

Here, the first background data group and the second background data group referred to for displaying the background image on the VDP 105 are used areas from the character ROM 106 to the VDP side RAM 108 as regular data groups when the power is turned on. It is transferred to 137, and the state is maintained in a situation where the effect for game rounds and the effect for big hits are not performed while the power is turned on. Assuming a configuration in which these background data groups are not stored in the regular area 137, it becomes necessary to read image data from the character ROM 106 each time the display mode is switched, and a NAND flash memory is used for the character ROM 106. In such a configuration, there is a concern that the timing at which the display mode is switched is delayed with respect to the operation timing of the effect operating device 58 due to the slow transfer speed. On the other hand, since each background data group is stored in the regular area 137 as described above, the display mode can be switched immediately when the effect operation device 58 is operated.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the operation occurrence command has not been received, it is determined in step S3205 whether or not it is the update timing of the standby image. If it is not the update timing, the standby image control process is terminated as it is.

If it is the update timing, in step S3206, the type of drawing list information corresponding to the update of the standby image this time is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103. Output to VDP105. After that, the standby image control process is terminated. In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3206, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the standby image of the update destination is executed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By using the NAND flash memory as the character ROM 106 of the display control device 100, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, by using the NAND flash memory, rewriting can be repeated at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed. However, the NAND type flash memory has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR type flash memory. On the other hand, reading RAMs such as the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 are provided, and the image data is not read from the character ROM 106 at the drawing timing of the VDP 105, but the bridge-side RAM 107 or the VDP-side RAM 108 is used in advance. The transferred image data is read out. As a result, the time required for reading the image data in the VDP 105 can be shortened, and the image can be drawn satisfactorily.

A series of effects are divided into a plurality of effect ranges, and the data group corresponding to each effect range is sequentially transferred to the bridge side RAM 107, and at the time of the transfer, the data group already stored in the bridge side RAM 107 is not available. It is configured to overwrite the required data group. More specifically, in a situation where a predetermined effect range is being executed, a data group corresponding to the rear side effect range set to be executed after the predetermined effect range is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107. When this is done, the data group corresponding to the rear side effect range is overwritten with respect to the data group corresponding to the front side effect range whose execution is completed before the predetermined effect range. As a result, it is not necessary to store all of each data group at the same time in the read RAM, so that the storage capacity of the read RAM can be made smaller than that of the character ROM 106, and the cost of the read RAM can be reduced. At the same time, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the character ROM 106. Further, when the data group is overwritten, the data group corresponding to the effect range being executed is not deleted as described above, so that the execution of the effect range is not affected.

Each of the data group for super reach A, the data group for super reach B, the data group for 15R probability variation jackpot, and the data group for normal jackpot is divided into a plurality of data groups. As a result, even when executing an effect range with a large data capacity, if the plurality of divided data groups are sequentially transferred to the reading RAM and the unnecessary data groups are sequentially erased. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the RAM for reading can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the data group corresponding to the predetermined additional effect range is collectively transferred.

On the other hand, the data group for notice A, the data group for notice B, and the data group for normal reach, which have a small data capacity and a short effect execution time, are not divided into a plurality of data groups, so that a plurality of data groups can be transferred in a short time. There is no need to perform this, and it is possible to prevent the processing related to the transfer of the data group from becoming complicated.

When the symbol display device 31 executes the variable display of the symbol of each game and the effect for the jackpot, a display table is created in advance, and each drawing timing is referred to by referring to the information set in the display table. The drawing content in is determined. In this case, the transfer start timing of each divided data group is set in association with each drawing timing in the display table. As a result, the display CPU 102 can suitably perform drawing of the image on the symbol display device 31 and transfer of each divided data group while linking each other by referring to the display table.

In the configuration in which the transfer start timing is set by linking to the drawing contents from the start to the end of the effect as described above, it is preferable to proceed with the effect while referring to a series of display tables from the start to the end of the effect. .. However, assuming a configuration in which a display table is prepared in advance for each series of effects from the start to the end, the data capacity will be large. That is, there are a notice display and a super reach display in the effect range that can be performed in the middle of a series of effects, and a plurality of types of the notice display and the super reach display are set respectively. Further, in each game, when only one notice display is executed, or when any one of a plurality of types of notice displays and any one of a plurality of types of super reach displays are executed in combination, the notice display is displayed. And both super reach display may not be executed. In this case, in a configuration in which a series of display tables from the start to the end of the effect are prepared in advance, it is necessary to cover all of the above patterns, and the data capacity of each display table is also large.

On the other hand, a variable display table is prepared in advance for each effect range, and a display table is created by combining the tables acquired from the variable display tables. Further, in each variation display table, the transfer start timing of the data group required in the effect range corresponding to the variation display table is set. As a result, it is sufficient that the tables prepared in advance are prepared for the types of the effect range, and since each table is for the corresponding effect range, the data capacity of each table is also reduced. Therefore, the above effect can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required for the program ROM 103.

In the game round in which the jackpot result occurs, a display table including the jackpot effect is created at the start of the game round, and the transfer start timing of the data group for starting the jackpot effect is the game round effect. It is set as an intermediate timing. As a result, there is no waiting time for transferring the data group from the end of the game round to the start of the big hit effect. Further, in the configuration, the jackpot effect table is set according to the type of the jackpot effect, and the transfer start timing for the data group used in the corresponding effect range is set in each jackpot effect table. Has been done. Therefore, in the configuration in which the display table including the effect for the jackpot is created at the start of the game round, the data capacity of the table to be stored in advance is suppressed, and as a result, the storage capacity required in the program ROM 103 is suppressed. be able to.

The VDP 105 can access all areas of the bridge side RAM 107 at the read timing, and the write control unit 121 can access all the areas of the bridge side RAM 107 at the transfer timing. As a result, the degree of freedom in the capacity of a group of information that can be stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 at one time is increased as compared with the configuration in which the area of the bridge-side RAM 107 is divided into a plurality of areas and switched between reading and transferring. Further, when a plurality of types of data groups are simultaneously stored in the bridge side RAM 107, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of the data groups to be stored at the same time is increased.

Further, in the above configuration, when the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107, access to the bridge side RAM 107 of the write control unit 121 is restricted, and when the VDP 105 is not accessing the bridge side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 is restricted. Is configured to access the bridge side RAM 107. As a result, the occurrence of inconvenience such that the write control unit 121 overwrites the data group with respect to the area being read by the VDP 105 is suppressed.

A cache buffer 123 is provided in the write control unit 121, unit data is transferred to the cache buffer 123 while the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107, and the cache is cached in a situation where the VDP 105 does not access the bridge side RAM 107. Unit data is transferred from the buffer 123 to the RAM 107 on the bridge side. As a result, the timing of reading the image data from the bridge-side RAM 107 by the VDP 105 and the timing of writing the image data to the bridge-side RAM 107 by the write control unit 121 are adjusted, and both operations can be performed satisfactorily.

A VDP-side RAM 108 is provided as a read-out RAM in addition to the bridge-side RAM 107, and the VDP-side RAM 108 is connected to the VDP 105 without passing through the bridge LSI 109. As a result, in a situation where the VDP 105 creates drawing data using the image data transferred to the VDP side RAM 108, the write control unit 121 can transfer the data group to the bridge side RAM 107. As a result, the creation of drawing data and the transfer of the data group to the bridge side RAM 107 can be performed in parallel, and the progress speed of the drawing process can be increased.

The VDP side RAM 108 is provided with a regular area 137 for storing a regular data group. The regular data group stored in the regular area 137 is image data processed by the VDP 105 in order to display a predetermined image for a specific event that occurs at an arbitrary timing, and the regular data transferred to the regular area 137. The group is memorized for the duration of the situation in which the corresponding specific event can occur. As a result, when a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, the time required to read the image data corresponding to the specific event in the VDP 105 can be shortened, and the image corresponding to the specific event can be smoothly displayed. Can be done.

A regular area 137 is provided in the VDP side RAM 108 instead of the bridge side RAM 107. Assuming that the bridge side RAM 107 is provided with the regular area 137, a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the write control unit 121 can flexibly respond to the arbitrary timing on the bridge side. It becomes necessary to transfer the data group to the RAM 107. On the other hand, since the VDP side RAM 108 is provided with the regular area 137, it is possible to simplify the configuration for transferring the data group in the write control unit 121.

The regular data group includes a data group (specifically, a background data group and a normal symbol data) necessary for starting the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31, and the regular data group. Is read from the character ROM 106 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and transferred to the regular area 137. As a result, even if the start condition of the game round is satisfied at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to immediately start the variable display of the symbol.

When the power supply is turned on, if the data group required to start the variable display of the symbol is transferred, the data group for the simple symbol is transferred prior to that. The data capacity of this simple symbol data group is set to be smaller than that of the data group required to start the fluctuation display of a normal symbol. Then, when the transfer of the data group necessary for starting the normal symbol variation display is not in time for the establishment of the game round start condition, the symbol variation display is performed using the simple symbol. As a result, even if the start condition of the game round is satisfied in a situation where the normal symbol variation display cannot be performed, the player is made to recognize that the establishment of the start condition of the game round is not invalidated. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused in a situation where the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed.

Since the data capacity of the data group for the simple symbol is smaller than the data group required to start the variable display of the normal symbol, it takes time until the variable display of the symbol using the simple symbol can be performed. It can be shortened. In addition, even if the data group for simple symbols is transferred before the data group required to start the variable display of the normal symbol, the data group required to start the variable display of the normal symbol. It is possible to prevent the timing of completing the transfer from becoming extremely late.

Even when the variation display of the symbol using the simple symbol is performed, the variation display time at that time is the variation display time determined by the main control device 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of the game from fluctuating depending on the presence or absence of the variation display of the symbol using the simple symbol. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variation display time of the game times grasped by the main control device 60 does not match the variation display time of the game times grasped by the display control device 100.

In a configuration in which a plurality of data groups including each data group of the regular data group are transferred from the character ROM 106 to the RAM for reading when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, these plurality of data groups are transferred according to a predetermined priority. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the display of an image that needs to be started early after the power is turned on.

In a situation where a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 by processing the previously transferred data group, the data group having the rear priority is transferred in parallel. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time required to complete the transfer of a plurality of data groups to be transferred can be shortened.

In a configuration in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 in response to an operation of the effect operation device 58 when the predetermined operation correspondence status is reached, the data group corresponding to the predetermined image corresponds to the predetermined operation. It is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM before the situation is reached. As a result, the time from the operation of the effect operation device 58 to the display of a predetermined image can be shortened. Further, in a predetermined operation correspondence situation, the data group corresponding to the predetermined image is stored and held in the reading RAM. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time until a predetermined image is displayed for the operation of the effect operating device 58 that occurs at an arbitrary timing.

In the configuration in which the display mode of the symbol display device 31 is switched each time the effect operation device 58 is operated in the state of waiting for the start of the game round, the display mode of each background data group corresponding to each display mode can be switched. It is read from the character ROM 106 into the reading RAM before the situation is reached, and is stored and held in a situation where the display mode can be switched. As a result, the display mode can be smoothly switched with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 58 that occurs at an arbitrary timing.

In the super reach B display, if the effect operation device 58 is operated more than the reference number of times during the operation corresponding effect period, the effect range of the completed mode advances after that, and if it is not operated more than the reference number of times, then. The unfinished production range will progress. In this case, both of the data groups corresponding to each effect range are transferred to the reading RAM by the time the branch is performed between the effect range of the completed mode and the effect range of the unfinished mode. As a result, no matter which production range is advanced, the transfer waiting time of the data group does not occur at the time of branching, and the production proceeds smoothly.

Regarding the data group of the effect range that was not selected as the progress destination among the effect range of the completed mode and the effect range of the unfinished mode, the effect of the effect range selected as the progress destination is executed by another data group. It will be overwritten. As a result, the area of the RAM for reading can be effectively utilized.

When transferring the operation data group used to execute the effect of the branch mode to the reading RAM, the operation data is assigned to an area including at least a part of the area in which the regular data group is stored. The group is overwritten. As a result, it is possible to collectively store the operation data group having a relatively large data capacity in the read RAM while suppressing the storage capacity required in the read RAM.

Since the regular data group to be deleted is a data group that is not used when the operation system effect is executed, such as each background data group and the normal symbol data group, the regular data group is temporarily deleted. Even if it does, there is no problem. Further, at the time of this return, the regular data group is overwritten on the area of the data group corresponding to the side not selected as the progress destination in the effect range of the completed mode and the effect range of the unfinished mode. As a result, it is possible to restore the regular data group while effectively utilizing the area of the RAM for reading.

On the other hand, in normal reach where the data capacity is not so large, a situation may occur in which the regular data group is erased and restored in a relatively short time by not overwriting the area where the regular data group is stored. It can be suppressed.

In the 15R probability variation jackpot production and the normal jackpot production, when the data group for all-round production is transferred to the RAM for reading, the data group is overwritten on the area where the regular data group is stored. .. As a result, it is possible to collectively store the all-round effect data group having a relatively large data capacity in the read RAM while suppressing the storage capacity required in the read RAM.

Since the regular data group to be deleted is a data group that is not used when a jackpot effect is executed, such as each background data group or a normal symbol data group, the regular data group is temporarily deleted. Even if it does, there is no problem. In addition, since the regular data group to be erased is restored by the time the jackpot production is completed, when it is necessary to display an image using the regular data group, the display of such an image is good. It can be carried out.

On the other hand, in the production for explicit 2R probability variation jackpot where the data capacity is not so large, the area where the regular data group is stored is not overwritten, so that the regular data group can be erased and restored in a relatively short time. The occurrence of the situation to be done is suppressed.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the display control device 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 50, unlike the first embodiment, the VDP side RAM 108 and the bridge side RAM 107 are not provided, and the RAM for reading the image data from the character ROM 106 in advance is the read RAM 161. It is aggregated. The read RAM 161 is connected to the input / output driver circuit 122 provided in the bridge LSI 109, and is connected to each of the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 through the input / output driver circuit 122.

The write control unit 121 transfers data groups for various images stored in the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 161 based on instructions from the display CPU 102. Further, the VDP 105 executes drawing processing on the symbol display device 31 using data groups for various images stored in the read RAM 161. Since the read RAM 161 for reading the data group in advance is connected to the bridge LSI 109 and aggregated, only the transfer from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 161 needs to be performed in advance transfer of the data group, and VDP. Compared with the first embodiment, which requires the transfer of the data group to the side RAM 108, the processing related to the transfer of the data group can be simplified.

However, in the first embodiment, since the VDP side RAM 108 is connected to the VDP 105 without going through the input / output driver circuit 122, the data group stored in the VDP side RAM 108 is referred to during the drawing process of the VDP 105. , The VDP 105 did not access the bridge side RAM 107, and in this situation, the write control unit 121 was able to access the bridge side RAM 107. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the read RAM 161 is connected to the bridge LSI 109 and aggregated as described above, the chance for the write control unit 121 to access the read RAM 161 is reduced.

In this case, the bridge LSI 109 is provided with a cache buffer 123, and the image data read from the character ROM 106 can be temporarily stored. Therefore, the image data is read into the cache buffer 123 during the period when the write control unit 121 cannot access the read RAM 161 and the read image data is written to the read RAM 161 when the access period is reached. Can be done. As a result, the data group can be satisfactorily transferred to the read RAM 161.

The storage capacity of the read RAM 161 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 106. In this case, the storage capacity of the read RAM 161 can be suppressed, but the data group to be read in the read RAM 161 needs to be changed as appropriate, and the data group to be read in the read RAM 161 needs to be adjusted satisfactorily. The regular area 162 and the change area 163 are set in 1.

In the regular area 162, as in the first embodiment, the regular data group such as the abnormality notification data group, the normal symbol data group, and the background data group is read out. In the change area 163, the change data group such as the advance notice data group and the normal reach data group is read, and the data group to be read is appropriately changed. The appropriately modified configuration is the same as the configuration related to the transfer of the data group to the bridge-side RAM 107 in the first embodiment. By providing the regular area 162, it is possible to satisfactorily execute the drawing process for the drawing instruction generated at an arbitrary timing, and by providing the changing area 163, a series of series over a relatively long time. The drawing process for displaying each image of the effect can be satisfactorily executed.

Further, in the above configuration, when it is necessary to read a data group having a relatively large amount of data into the read RAM 161 when the effect for game rounds or the effect for big hits is performed, the same as in the first embodiment. The data group is overwritten in the regular area 162, and then the regular data group is restored. In this case, since the regular area 162 is aggregated in the read RAM 161, when transferring the data group to be overwritten or the regular data group to be restored, the character ROM 106 may be transferred to the read RAM 161. At that time, VDP105 does not intervene. Therefore, the complicated processing at the time of overwriting and restoration can be suppressed, and the time required for overwriting and restoration can be shortened.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the display control device 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 51, unlike the first embodiment, the first bridge side RAM 171 and the second bridge side RAM 172 are provided as the bridge side RAM, and the first bridge side RAM 171 and the second bridge are provided. Each of the side RAMs 172 is individually connected to the input / output driver circuit 173 of the bridge LSI 109. Further, the input / output driver circuit 173 is connected to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 and is also connected to the VDP 105.

The input / output driver circuit 173 sets one of the first bridge side RAM 171 and the second bridge side RAM 172 as a data group write target by the write control unit 121, and sets the other as a data group read target by the VDP 105. Further, it has a function of appropriately switching between the side to be written and the side to be read as needed.

Specifically, in a series of effects including the first effect range, the second effect range, and the third effect range in this order in a continuous manner, the first effect corresponding to the first effect range. Data group is stored in the first bridge side RAM 171 and in a situation where the first data group is to be read by the VDP 105, the second bridge side RAM 172 corresponds to the second effect range. It is a write target by the write control unit 121 of the data group. In this case, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the first effect range.

After that, when the first effect range ends, the second data group stored in the second bridge side RAM 172 becomes a read target by the VDP 105, and the first bridge side RAM 171 corresponds to the third effect range. It is switched to the writing target by the writing control unit 121 of the third data group. In this case, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the second effect range.

After that, when the second effect range ends, the third data group stored in the first bridge side RAM 171 becomes a read target by the VDP 105, and the second bridge side RAM 172 becomes the effect after the third effect range. The data group corresponding to the range is switched to the writing target by the writing control unit 121. In this case, the symbol display device 31 displays an image of the third effect range.

According to this configuration, the reading of the data group by the VDP 105 from one of the first bridge side RAM 171 and the second bridge side RAM 172 and the writing of the data group by the write control unit 121 to the other are performed in parallel at the same time. Therefore, it is not necessary to adjust the read timing by the VDP 105 and the write timing by the write control unit 121. Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to perform processing for adjusting both of these timings, and the degree of freedom in setting the read timing by the VDP 105 and the write timing by the write control unit 121 is increased.

By the way, this embodiment focuses on the remarkable effect of increasing the degree of freedom in setting both timings, and adjusts the write timing by using the cache buffer 123 as in the first embodiment. The cache buffer 123 is inadequate because it is not necessary to do so. However, a cache buffer 123 may be provided.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the display control device 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 52, unlike the first embodiment, the VDP 105, the bridge LSI 109, the bridge side RAM 107, and the VDP side RAM 108 are not provided. Instead, in the present embodiment, a three-dimensional image processing unit 181 and a read RAM 182 are provided. The three-dimensional image processing unit 181 is connected to the display CPU 102, the character ROM 183, and the read RAM 182, and has a function of transferring a data group from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM 182 and a data group transferred to the read RAM 182. It has a function of displaying a three-dimensional image on the symbol display device 31.

A function for displaying a three-dimensional image in the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 will be described.

The three-dimensional image processing unit 181 has a viewpoint and a character ROM 183 in advance in the world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, in order to realize a display mode according to a command from the display CPU 102. Various stored objects are arranged, and so-called geometry calculation processing is performed, in which the objects are changed or the viewpoint is displaced. In addition, projection information that is two-dimensional coordinate information obtained by projecting an object in the world coordinate system onto a projection plane based on the line of sight from the viewpoint is generated. Based on the projection information, a position corresponding to the apex of each polygon of each object in the frame memory provided in the drawing storage unit 195, that is, an address in the frame memory is obtained. Further, the texture stored in advance in the character ROM 183 is deformed so as to match the vertices of each polygon of each object, and the texture is drawn based on each address in the frame memory. Then, when the drawing of the texture on all the objects is completed, the display image is generated in the frame memory, and the display image is output to the symbol display device 31.

The object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Further, the polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices having three-dimensional coordinates. Further, the texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object, and when the texture is pasted on the object, it includes an image corresponding to the object, for example, a normal symbol, a simple symbol, a background image, an abnormality notification image, and the like. A display image is generated. Further, the image data of the object is stored in advance in the area 184 for the object data of the character ROM 183, the image data of the texture is stored in advance in the area 185 for the texture data of the character ROM 183, and the image data of the background image is It is stored in advance in the area 186 for background data of the character ROM 183.

A more specific hardware configuration of the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 will be described.

The three-dimensional image processing unit 181 has a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image, such as an I / F 191 for exchanging data with the display CPU 102, the character ROM 183, and the reading RAM 182, and data received by the I / F 191. Geometry calculation processing unit 192 that performs coordinate calculation processing based on, rendering processing unit 193 that generates display images based on data received by I / F 191 and rendering processing unit that renders color information based on multiple types of color palettes. A palette processing unit 194 appropriately provided to 193, a drawing storage unit 195 having a plurality of frame memories including a first frame memory 195a and a second frame memory 195b, and a plurality of frame memories provided in the drawing storage unit 195 are provided. It includes a selector unit 196 for switching and a video output unit 197 for outputting a display image to the symbol display device 31.

The I / F 191 receives various commands transmitted from the display CPU 102. The I / F 191 includes coordinates such as the storage address of the object stored in the read RAM 182, the arrangement coordinate value for arranging the object in the world coordinate system, and the arrangement coordinate value for setting the viewpoint, which are included in the various commands. The data to be calculated is given to the geometry calculation processing unit 192, and the data of the storage address such as the texture transferred to the reading RAM 182 included in the command to be image drawing is given to the rendering processing unit 193. Further, the I / F 191 provides the palette processing unit 194 with a color palette for instructing the hue of the texture included in the command.

The geometry calculation processing unit 192 performs coordinate calculation processing associated with movement, rotation, and the like of three-dimensional coordinate points based on the data given from the I / F 191. Specifically, the geometry calculation processing unit 192 reads out a plurality of polygon-structured objects arranged in the local coordinate system based on the storage address of the object. Then, the coordinate value of each polygon of the object in the world coordinate system when arranging the object in the world coordinate system is calculated based on the coordinate value in which the object in the rotated posture is arranged based on the rotation angle data. Here, the local coordinate system is an object-specific coordinate system in which an object with a reference posture is set. In addition, the coordinate value of each polygon of the object in the viewpoint coordinate system based on the viewpoint set based on the coordinate value of the viewpoint and the rotation angle is calculated. Further, the projection information including the two-dimensional coordinate values of each polygon of the object on the projection plane when the object is projected on the projection plane set perpendicular to the line of sight based on the viewpoint is calculated. Then, the geometry calculation processing unit 192 gives the projection information to the rendering processing unit 193.

The process of determining the movement and rotation of the three-dimensional coordinate points and the movement and rotation of the viewpoint is performed by the display CPU 102, and the geometry calculation processing unit 192 reads out the object based on the information determined by the display CPU 102. And arrangement may be performed, and projection information may be calculated.

The palette processing unit 194 includes a palette RAM (not shown) that stores a plurality of types of color palettes composed of a plurality of types of color information written by the display CPU 102, and is a color palette instructed by the display CPU 102 through the I / F 191. The data is given to the rendering processing unit 193. Giving a color palette means, for example, giving the storage address of the color palette stored in the palette RAM to the rendering processing unit 193, and the rendering processing unit 193 is stored in the storage address when generating a display image. Refer to the color information. Each data of the color palette, that is, each palette is assigned to each dot constituting the texture, and by drawing each dot with the color information of each palette, the entire texture is drawn.

The rendering processing unit 193 first reads the background image based on the storage address in which the data of the background image in the reading RAM 182 is transferred and stored, and the background image is read into the frame provided in the drawing storage unit 195. Draw in memory and expand each polygon of the object based on the projection information in the frame memory. Further, the rendering processing unit 193 transfers the texture data read from the read RAM 182 to each polygon in the frame memory based on the storage address and the color palette data in which the texture data in the read RAM 182 is transferred and stored. Draw on the corresponding area.

In the geometry calculation processing unit 192 and the rendering processing unit 193 described above, clipping processing for determining the portion to be displayed on the display screen G, hidden surface processing for determining the visible portion and the invisible portion depending on the context of the polygon, and the light source Processing such as shading calculation processing for calculating the degree of light hitting and the state of reflection is also performed as appropriate.

The selector unit 196 appropriately selects a plurality of frame memories. Specifically, the selector unit 196 is a plurality of frame memories provided in the drawing storage unit 195 when the image is drawn by the rendering processing unit 193 described above, for example, the first frame memory 195a or the first frame memory 195a. Select either one of the two-frame memory 195b. In this case, the display image is generated in the frame memory on the selected side. On the other hand, the selector unit 196 reads out the display image for which the display image has already been generated from the frame memory on the side where drawing is not performed, and sends the display image to the video output unit 197. The selector unit 196 sequentially switches between the frame memory on the reading side and the frame memory on the drawing side. The video output unit 197 converts the display image sent from the selector unit 196 into a video signal and outputs it to the symbol display device 31.

With the above configuration, the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 causes the symbol display device 31 to display a three-dimensional image corresponding to the drawing instruction from the display CPU 102. For example, as already described in the first embodiment, the symbol display device 31 displays an image corresponding to the effect for the game round, an image corresponding to the effect for the jackpot, and the like.

Next, a function for transferring the data group from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM 182 in the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 will be described.

Prior to the description of the configuration for transferring the data group in the three-dimensional image processing unit 181, the configuration of the character ROM 183 and the read RAM 182 will be described. Like the character ROM 183 in the first embodiment, the character ROM 183 is configured by using a NAND flash memory, and has a data capacity of, for example, 4 Gbits. Further, the character ROM 183 is connected to the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 by, for example, a 16-bit bus line.

The read RAM 182 is a VRAM made of a volatile semiconductor memory, and for example, DDR is used. The storage capacity is about 2 Gbits because, for example, four 512 Mbit DDRs are provided as the read RAM 182. Each of these four DDRs is connected to the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 by, for example, a 16-bit bus line. Here, the storage capacity of the character ROM 183 is about 4 Gbits, whereas the storage capacity of the read RAM 182 is about 2 Gbits. That is, the storage capacity of the read RAM 182 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the character ROM 183.

The three-dimensional image processing unit 181 includes a write control unit 198 as a configuration for transferring image data from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM 182. The write control unit 198 receives a transfer command as described in the first embodiment from the display CPU 102 via the I / F 191. Then, the image data corresponding to the received transfer command is read from the character ROM 183 via the I / F 191 and the read image data is written to the reading RAM 182.

Here, the read RAM 182 is provided with a regular area 201, and each area 184 to 186 of the character ROM 183 is set with an area for storing the regular data group. When the power supply is turned on, the write control unit 198 reads out the regular data group from the areas 184 to 186 of the character ROM 183 and writes the read regular data group in the regular area 201, as in the first embodiment.

The regular data group includes at least an abnormality notification data group, a normal symbol data group, and each background data group. It should be noted that each data group of the regular data group includes object data and texture data, respectively. As a result, it is not necessary to read data from the character ROM 183 having a slow transfer rate each time for a drawing instruction generated at an arbitrary timing, and it is sufficient to read data from the read RAM 182 having a high transfer rate. , The image can be displayed well.

The read RAM 182 is provided with a change area 202 in addition to the normal area 201, and the write control unit 198 is provided with a game rotation effect and a jackpot effect in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the situation where the front data group is stored in the change area 202 and used for image display among the data groups of each effect range before and after in chronological order, the front data group in the change area 202 The data group on the rear side is pre-transferred to an area different from the area where is stored. Each of these data groups includes object data and texture data used for each effect range. As a result, in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the read RAM 182 is smaller than that of the character ROM 183, it is possible to satisfactorily display an image corresponding to the effect for the game round or the effect for the jackpot.

In the above configuration, as in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the regular area 201 is overwritten and the regular data group is restored after that is applied even if the regular area 201 is overwritten during the game rounding effect or the jackpot effect. Good. In this case, while suppressing the storage capacity of the read RAM 182, the image can be displayed satisfactorily in response to the drawing instruction generated at an arbitrary timing, and a data group having a large data capacity can be read at the same time.

Further, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 52, a cache buffer 203 is provided in the three-dimensional image processing unit 181 to read data from the read RAM 182 in order to display an image, as in the first embodiment. The timing and the timing of transferring the data group from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM 182 may be adjusted.

Further, the configuration in which the bridge LSI 109 is not provided as shown in FIG. 52 may be applied to a configuration for displaying a two-dimensional image instead of a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the type of the data group transferred as the regular data group to the regular area 137 when the power supply is turned on is different from that of the first embodiment. FIG. 53 is an initial setting process executed by the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109 in place of the initial setting process of the regular data group in the first embodiment.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the initial setting command is received from the display CPU 102. If the initial setting command has not been received, it is determined in step S3302 whether or not it is in the initial setting state. If it is not in the initial setting state (step S3302: NO), the initial setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the initial setting command is received (step S3301: YES), in step S3303, the initial setting state is set and the transfer state of the inspection data group is set. Here, when setting various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be set is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121, and when canceling various states, the setting flag corresponding to the state to be released is deleted. Will be done.

By setting the transfer state of the inspection data group, the write control unit 121 executes the data transfer process (FIG. 20), and transfers the inspection data group from the character ROM 183 to the bridge side RAM 107. However, unlike the first embodiment, the inspection data group is not transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108.

After executing the process of step S3303, the process proceeds to step S3304. Further, when it is determined in step S3302 that the initial setting state is set, the process proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the inspection data group has been transferred. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the completion flag corresponding to the transfer state of the inspection data group is stored in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121. If it is determined that the inspection data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the inspection data group is released in step S3305. When the transfer state is released, both the transfer state setting flag and the completion flag corresponding to the current release target in the control RAM 125 of the write control unit 121 are deleted.

Further, in step S3305, the transfer state of the initial display data group is set. As a result, in the next data transfer process (FIG. 20), the transfer of the initial display data group from the character ROM 183 to the bridge side RAM 107 is executed. In this case, the write control unit 121 transfers the initial display data group so as not to overwrite the initial display data group in the area where the inspection data group is stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Further, the initial display data group is not transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108.

In the following step S3306, the transfer completion signal of the inspection data group is output to the display CPU 102. By receiving the transfer completion signal of the inspection data group, the display CPU 102 makes an affirmative determination in step S802 of the main process (FIG. 18), proceeds to step S803, and instructs VDP105 to draw the inspection image. I do.

If the inspection data group has not been transferred (step S3304: NO) or after executing the process of step S3306, in step S3307, it is determined whether or not the initial display data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the initial display data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the initial display data group is released and the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is set in step S3308. As a result, in the next data transfer process (FIG. 20), the transfer of the simple symbol data group from the character ROM 183 to the bridge side RAM 107 is executed. In this case, the write control unit 121 does not overwrite the simple symbol data group in the area where the inspection data group and the initial display data group in the bridge side RAM 107 are stored. Transfer the group. Further, the simple symbol data group is not transferred to the regular area 137 of the VDP side RAM 108.

In the following step S3309, the transfer completion signal of the initial display data group is output to the display CPU 102. The display CPU 102 receives the transfer completion signal of the initial display data group, and when the display period of the inspection image has elapsed, affirmative determination is made in step S805 of the main process (FIG. 18), and the step. Proceeding to S806, the VDP 105 is instructed to draw the initial display image.

When the initial display data group has not been transferred (step S3307: NO) or after the process of step S3309 is executed, it is determined in step S3310 whether or not the simple symbol data group has been transferred.

When it is determined that the simple symbol data group has been transferred, the transfer state of the simple symbol data group is released and the transfer state of the regular data group is set in step S3311. In this case, the regular data group includes an abnormality notification data group, a normal symbol data group, and each background data group. As a result, in the next data transfer process (FIG. 20), the transfer of the regular data group from the character ROM 183 to the bridge side RAM 107 is executed. In this case, the write control unit 121 is concerned so as not to overwrite the regular data group in the area where the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group are stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Transfers regular data groups.

In the following step S3312, the transfer completion signal of the simple symbol data group is output to the display CPU 102. When the display CPU 102 receives the variation command after receiving the transfer completion signal of the simple symbol data group and at the timing when the transfer of the normal symbol data group or the background data group is not completed, the display CPU 102 receives the variation command. A drawing instruction is given so that the variable display of the symbol by the simple symbol is performed.

In the following step S3313, the transfer start signal of the regular data group is output to the VDP 105. In the VDP 105, by receiving the transfer start signal of the regular data group, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101 of the initial transfer process (FIG. 21), and the regular data group transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 is used regularly in the VDP side RAM 108. Transfer to area 137.

When the simple symbol data group has not been transferred (step S3310: NO) or after the processing of step S3313 is executed, it is determined in step S3314 whether or not the regular data group has been transferred. If the regular data group has not been transferred, the initial setting process is terminated as it is. If the regular data group has already been transferred, the initial setting process is terminated after canceling the initial setting state in step S3315.

According to the above configuration, the data capacity of the regular data group can be suppressed, and the storage capacity allocated as the regular area 137 can be suppressed. In addition, it is necessary to shorten the period until the display of the inspection image and the initial display image is started after the power is turned on, and the period until it becomes possible to perform the variable display of the symbol using the simple symbol. Can be done.

By the way, the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group stored in the bridge side RAM 107 by executing the above initial setting process are used for game forwarding when the variable display by the normal symbol is performed. It is deleted when the data group for displaying the effect image of the above and the data group for displaying the image for the jackpot effect are transferred to the bridge side RAM 107. Further, in the present embodiment, after overwriting the data group for displaying the image of the effect for the game round and the data group for displaying the image of the effect for the jackpot on the regular area 137, the return of the regular data group is performed. When this is done, the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group are not restored as a matter of course, but the normal symbol data group and each background data group are restored.

The configuration in which the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group are excluded from the regular data group as described above is applied to the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment. You may. In this case, at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on, the write control units 121 and 198 write the inspection data group, the initial display data group, and the simple symbol data group to the change areas 163 and 202, and are used regularly. It is preferable to write the abnormality notification data group, the normal symbol data group, and each background data group to the areas 162 and 202. Even in this case, the storage capacity required for the regular areas 162 and 202 can be suppressed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, a plurality of types of abnormalities to be notified of the abnormality are set in the symbol display device 31, and the display CPU 102 performs the abnormality notification in the symbol display device 31 correspondingly. The data structure and processing structure for the above are different from those of the first embodiment.

As a data structure for performing abnormality notification, the character ROM 183 has an initial notification data group as an abnormality notification data group and a first abnormality corresponding to an abnormality of the first aspect (for example, an abnormality of magnetic detection). The type data group and the second abnormality type data group corresponding to the abnormality of the second aspect (for example, the abnormality of vibration detection) are included. The initial notification data group includes image data used when displaying an image for notifying that some abnormality has occurred on the symbol display device 31. The first abnormality type data group includes image data used when displaying an image for notifying that the abnormality generated this time is the abnormality of the first aspect on the symbol display device 31. The second abnormality type data group includes image data used when displaying an image for notifying that the abnormality generated this time is the abnormality of the second aspect on the symbol display device 31.

Of these, the initial notification data group will be transferred to the regular area 137 as a part of the regular data group when the power is turned on, and each abnormal type data group constitutes a change area as necessary. It will be transferred to the bridge side RAM 107.

Next, a processing configuration for performing abnormality notification will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an abnormality notification control process executed by the display CPU 102.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is being notified as in step S3101 in the first embodiment. If the abnormality is not being notified, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the abnormality identification command has been received. If it has not been received, this abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. If it is being received, it is set to the abnormality notification state in step S3403. In the following step S3404, the type of drawing list information for initial notification is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and output to the VDP 105.

In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3404, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the image for initial notification is executed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The image informs that some abnormality has occurred. As the image, for example, a mode in which characters such as "abnormality has occurred !!" can be displayed can be considered.

In the following step S3405, the abnormality type determination process is executed. In the abnormality type determination process, it is specified from the abnormality identification command received in step S3402 whether the mode of the current abnormality is the abnormality of the first aspect or the abnormality of the second aspect. Then, when it is identified as an abnormality of the first aspect, the first abnormality flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 104d of the work RAM 104, and when it is identified as an abnormality of the second aspect, various types are obtained. The second abnormality flag is stored in the flag storage area 104d.

By the way, when the main control device 60 transmits an abnormality identification command based on the occurrence of the abnormality of the first aspect, the main control device 60 transmits a command including information to that effect, and the abnormality of the second aspect has occurred. When sending an abnormality identification command based on, send a command containing information to that effect.

After that, in step S3406, after executing the transfer instruction processing of the data group for the abnormality type corresponding to the current abnormality type, the abnormality notification control processing is terminated. In the transfer instruction process, a transfer command for the abnormality type data group is transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109. The write control unit 121 transfers the data group for the abnormality type corresponding to the current transfer instruction to the bridge side RAM 107 by executing the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) already described. .. In this case, the data group for the abnormality type is transferred so as not to erase the data group that may be used after the abnormality notification is canceled in the bridge side RAM 107. Further, when the data group for the effect is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 in the situation where the notification for the abnormality type is being performed, the data group for the effect is transferred to the area where the data group for the abnormality type is stored. Is regulated not to overwrite.

If the abnormality is being notified (step S3401: YES), it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the abnormality release command has been received. If the abnormality release command has not been received, it is determined in step S3408 whether or not the current abnormality type data group has been transferred. The write control unit 121 is configured to transmit a transfer completion signal to the display CPU 102 when the transfer of the abnormal type data group that has started transfer based on the transfer instruction in step S3406 is completed. In step S3408, this is configured. It is determined whether or not the transfer completion signal has been received.

If the abnormality type data group has not been transferred (step S3408: NO), it is determined in step S3409 whether or not the drawing list is set at the same time. If it is not the setting timing of the drawing list, the abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. When it is the setting timing, in step S3410, the drawing list information for the initial notification corresponding to this time is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and VDP105. Output to. After that, the abnormality notification control process is terminated.

In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3410, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the initial notification is advanced. The image is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In this case, the symbol display device 31 is controlled so that a character or the like indicating that some abnormality has occurred blinks. It should be noted that the process of steps S3409 to S3410 may not be executed, and the same image may continue to be displayed at the time of initial notification.

On the other hand, when the abnormality type data group has already been transferred (step S3408: YES), it is determined in step S3411 whether or not it is the setting timing of the drawing list. If it is not the setting timing of the drawing list, the abnormality notification control process is terminated as it is. If it is the setting timing, in step S3412, the drawing list information for type notification corresponding to this time is specified, and the specified drawing list information is read from the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 and VDP105. Output to. After that, the abnormality notification control process is terminated.

In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing list information output in step S3412, the drawing data setting process (FIG. 22) and the drawing signal output process (FIG. 23) already described are executed, and the type notification is performed. Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. As the image, for example, a mode in which characters such as "abnormal occurrence of the first aspect" or "abnormal occurrence of the second aspect" are displayed can be considered. Further, the symbol display device 31 is controlled so that the characters and the like blink. It should be noted that the same image may be continuously displayed at the time of type notification.

Further, when the abnormality release command is received, an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, and the process proceeds to step S3413. In step S3413, the abnormality notification state is released. In this case, the flag stored in step S3405 is deleted in order to specify the type of abnormality notification. After that, the abnormality notification control process is terminated.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence of some abnormality is first notified, and in the situation where the initial notification is performed, the abnormality type data group corresponding to the current abnormality type is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107. Since the configuration is such that the type of abnormality is notified after the transfer is completed, it is not necessary to store the abnormality notification data group corresponding to each type of abnormality in the regular area 137. It is possible to perform notification corresponding to each type of abnormality while suppressing the storage capacity required for the regular area 137.

In addition, although the type of abnormality is not specified, the initial notification data group for notifying that an abnormality has occurred is read out in the regular area 137, and even if any type of abnormality occurs, the initial notification is first performed. By performing the initial notification using the data group for use, it is possible to immediately start the abnormality notification at the timing of the occurrence of the abnormality.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the image displayed by the symbol display device 31 is different from that of the first embodiment in the situation where the variable display of the symbol using the normal symbol cannot be started. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed by the symbol display device 31 in the situation. In the following description, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the center frame 211 surrounding the symbol display device 31 is provided with a main display unit 212 whose display is controlled by the main control device 60 as each game round progresses. The main display unit 212 is installed at a position adjacent to the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 on the center frame 211, specifically, a position adjacent to the display screen G above the display screen G.

On the main display unit 212, the variable display of the pattern is started at the start of the game round, and the variable display of the above pattern is ended with the game result of the game round displayed at the end of the game round. Specifically, the main display unit 212 has a display unit that finally indicates that the game result corresponds to any of the jackpot results, and finally indicates that the game result corresponds to the off result. The display units shown are arranged side by side, and by alternately lighting these display units, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and finally the display unit on the side corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed in a lit state. ..

In a situation where the display control device 100 can start the variable display of the symbol using the normal symbol, the symbol display device 31 is used in accordance with the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 212. A variable display is usually performed using a symbol. On the other hand, in a situation immediately after the power is turned on and the transfer of the normal symbol data group and the background data group from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM is not completed, the player displays the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 212. An image for showing the position of the main display unit 212 is displayed on the symbol display device 31 in order to pay attention to. Specifically, the display CPU 102 of the display control device 100 replaces the configuration of executing the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 27) by the simple symbol and the fluctuation processing (FIG. 28) by the simple symbol, as described above, in the main display unit. A process for displaying an image for indicating the position of 212 is executed.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where it is not possible to start variable display of a symbol using a normal symbol, the symbol display device 31 displays an image for attracting attention to the main display unit 212. In this situation, the player pays attention to the main display unit 212. As a result, the possibility that the player misunderstands that the operating ports 23 and 24 have been invalidated even though the winnings have been generated is reduced.

Further, the data group for displaying the image showing the position of the main display unit 212 has a larger data capacity than the data group for performing variable display of the symbol using the simple symbol as in the first embodiment. It is thought to be smaller. As a result, the data capacity of the data group read from the character ROM 183 to the read RAM when the power supply is turned on can be suppressed.

<8th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration and the processing configuration of the display control device 100 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the display control device 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 56, the image data area 222 and the frame area 223 are set in the VDP side RAM 221. The image data area 222 is an area in which the image data read from the character ROM 106, more specifically, the image data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107 and stored in the bridge side RAM 107 is written, and at least the image data thereof. Part of it includes the regular area 137. The entire image data area 222 may be the regular area 137.

The frame area 223 is an area used when drawing data of one frame at each drawing timing is generated in the VRAM, specifically, in the VDP side RAM 221. In the frame area 223, a first frame area 224 and a second frame area 225 are set as a plurality of frame areas (or frame memories). Each of the first frame area 224 and the second frame area 225 includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The frame area included in the frame area 223 is not limited to two areas, and may be a single area or three or more areas.

For each frame area 224 and 225, drawing data is created by VDP226 based on the drawing list information transmitted from the display CPU 102. In this case, the VDP 226 creates the drawing data using the image data already transferred and stored from the character ROM 106 to the image data area 222 or the bridge side RAM 107.

Further, the VDP 226 is provided with a line buffer 227 instead of the drawing area 135 in the first embodiment. The line buffer 227 includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In other words, the line buffer 227 contains the same number of unit areas as each frame area 224 and 225. When it is time to transfer the drawing data to the line buffer 227, the VDP 226 transfers the drawing data from the frame area to be read out of the plurality of frame areas 224 and 225 to the line buffer 227. The line buffer 227 is not limited to a configuration in which only an area for a single frame is set, and an area for a plurality of frames may be set.

The drawing data transferred to the line buffer 227 is transferred to the image processing device 231 of the symbol display device 31 based on the timing of drawing the image. The transfer of the drawing data is performed via the harness 232 as a connecting member that electrically connects the display control device 100 and the symbol display device 31.

The image processing device 231 is provided with a storage unit 233 for drawing data. The storage unit 233 for drawing data includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. In other words, the storage unit 233 for drawing data includes the same number of unit areas as the line buffer 227. The drawing data transferred from the line buffer 227 to the image processing device 231 is written in the storage unit 233 for drawing data. In the image processing device 231, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen G by drawing the drawing data written in the storage unit 233 for the drawing data on the liquid crystal display unit 234. The storage unit 233 for drawing data is not limited to a configuration in which only an area for a single frame is set, and an area for a plurality of frames may be set.

Next, the processing configuration of VDP226 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a drawing data setting process.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information is received from the display CPU 102. If it has not been received, the present setting process is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to read the data from the bridge side RAM 107 in order to create the drawing data corresponding to the current drawing list information.

When it is necessary to read the data from the bridge side RAM 107, the data instructed by the drawing list information is read from the currently stored area in step S3503, and the read data is used for the frame in the subsequent step S3504. Write to the frame area to be written this time in area 223. After that, in step S3505, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data this time is completed, and if it is not completed, the process returns to step S3503, and if it is completed, this setting process is terminated. ..

By executing the processes of steps S3503 to S3505, drawing data for the frame area is created using at least the image data transferred to the bridge side RAM 107.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to read the data from the bridge side RAM 107 (step S3502: NO), the processes after step S3506 are executed. That is, in step S3506, the output of the non-access signal is started. The non-access signal may be directly transmitted to the write control unit 121 of the bridge LSI 109, output to the display CPU 102 from the VDP 226, and input the non-access signal from the VDP 226, as in the first embodiment. In the meantime, the display CPU 102 may output a non-access signal to the write control unit 121.

In the following step S3507, the data instructed by the drawing list is read from the image data area 222 of the VDP side RAM 221 and the read data is read from the frame area to be written this time in the frame area 223 in step S3508. Write. After that, in step S3509, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data this time is completed, and if it is not completed, the process returns to step S3507, and if it is completed, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, the output of the non-access signal is stopped. After that, this setting process ends.

By executing the processes of steps S3507 to S3509, drawing data for the frame area is created using the image data transferred to the image data area 222 of the VDP side RAM 221.

Next, the output processing of the drawing signal executed in the VDP 226 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not it is the transfer timing of the drawing data to the line buffer 227. If it is not the transfer timing, the main output process is terminated as it is, and if it is the transfer timing, the process proceeds to step S3602. In step S3602, the output of the non-access signal is started, and in the following step S3603, the transfer of the drawing data stored in the frame area to be read this time in the frame area 223 to the line buffer 227 is started. After that, in step S3604, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the line buffer 227 is completed, and the process waits in step S3604 until the transfer is completed.

When the transfer of the drawing data this time to the line buffer 227 is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3604, and the process proceeds to step S3605. In step S3605, the line buffer 227 is referred to, and in step S3606, the drawing signal corresponding to the referred data is output to the image processing device 231 through the output port 136. After that, in step S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the drawing data this time is completed. If it is not completed, the process returns to step S3605, and if it is completed, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, the output of the non-access signal is stopped. After that, this output processing ends.

By performing the output processing of the drawing signal, the drawing data is transferred to the storage unit 233 for drawing data in the image processing device 231, and based on this, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 determines the number of frames for one frame. Image is displayed.

Even in the present embodiment described in detail above, at least in the situation where the drawing data is transferred from the line buffer 227 to the image processing device 231, the VDP 226 does not reliably access the bridge side RAM 107, and this period is used. Then, the write control unit 121 can transfer the data to the bridge side RAM 107.

A configuration in which the frame area 223 and the line buffer 227 are provided as in the present embodiment may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment, and the read RAM is on the bridge side. It may be applied to the configuration in which the RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 221 are not distinguished.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the main process in the display CPU 102 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In step S3701, the initial setting instruction processing for the bridge LSI 109 (specifically, the write control unit 121) is executed. Specifically, the initial setting command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

By receiving the initial setting command, the bridge LSI 109 executes the initial setting process (FIG. 19) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) of the regular data group in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this case, in the present embodiment, the initial setting command transmitted from the display CPU 102 includes the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107, the transfer order of each unit data constituting each of these data groups, and the transfer order. Information that can identify the address in the bridge-side RAM 107 to which each unit data should be written is included, and the bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads the unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the initial setting command, and reads the unit data. Write the unit data to the area of the specified address.

Further, in the bridge LSI 109, in the process of transferring the unit data from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107, the unit data is temporarily held in the cache buffer 123 and then transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 as in the first embodiment. .. In this case, in the first embodiment, the unit data is transferred from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107 when the non-access signal is received from the VDP 105. However, in the present embodiment, the unit data is transferred. The configuration is different. Specifically, the VDP 105 transmits an access signal to the display CPU 102 when accessing the bridge side RAM 107, and an access signal is transmitted from the display CPU 102 to the bridge LSI 109 when the access signal is received from the VDP 105. The access situation includes not only the situation where the VDP 105 is actually accessing the bridge side RAM 107 but also the situation where it may be accessed at an arbitrary timing, but only the former situation is applicable. May be.

In the bridge LSI 109, when the access signal is received from the display CPU 102, the unit data is transferred from the character ROM 106 to the cache buffer 123 without transferring the unit data from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107. Do. Further, when the access signal is not received from the display CPU 102, the unit data is transferred from the cache buffer 123 to the bridge side RAM 107.

Further, in the bridge LSI 109, when the transfer of a predetermined type of data group included in the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, the transfer completion signal corresponding to the data group for which the transfer is completed is transmitted to the display CPU 102. To do.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 59), after executing the process of step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not a predetermined transfer completion signal is received from the bridge LSI 109. When the predetermined transfer completion signal is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3703. Specifically, this time, the data group that has been transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 and the address of the bridge-side RAM 107 in which the data group is stored are stored in the work RAM 104 with information that can be specified by the display CPU 102.

In the following step S3704, the VDP 105 is instructed to transfer the data group that has been transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108. Specifically, the transfer command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the VDP 105. In the transfer command, the type of data group to be transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108, the transfer order of each unit data constituting the data group, and the address of the bridge side RAM 107 in which each unit data is stored are specified. It contains possible information and information that can identify the address in the VDP side RAM 108 to which each unit data should be written.

In the VDP 105, the unit data is sequentially read from the bridge side RAM 107 according to the instruction of the information included in the transfer instruction command, and the read unit data is written to the area of the instructed address.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when data is transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, it is the same regardless of whether it is the initial setting of the regular data group or the restoration of the regular data group. Data transfer processing is executed. Further, at the timing when the data transfer by the data transfer process is performed, since the data to be transferred already exists in the bridge side RAM 107, whether or not the data to be transferred exists in the bridge side RAM 107 in the data transfer process. Is not determined. Further, since the situation in which the data transfer process is being performed is the situation in which the VDP 105 accesses the bridge side RAM 107, an access signal is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the display CPU 102. Further, in the VDP 105, when the transfer from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108 is completed for the predetermined data group, the transfer completion signal corresponding to the data group for which the transfer is completed is transmitted to the display CPU 102.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 59), when a negative determination is made in step S3702 or after the process of step S3704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether or not an access signal is received from the VDP 105. When the access signal is received, in step S3706, the transmission of the access signal from the display CPU 102 to the bridge LSI 109 is started. When the transmission of the access signal from the VDP 105 to the display CPU 102 is stopped, the transmission of the access signal whose transmission is started is stopped.

When a negative determination is made in step S3705 or after the process of step S3706 is executed, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not a predetermined transfer completion signal has been received from the VDP 105. When the predetermined transfer completion signal is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3708. Specifically, this time, the data group for which the transfer to the VDP side RAM 108 has been completed and the address of the VDP side RAM 108 in which the data group is stored are stored in the work RAM 104 with information that can be specified by the display CPU 102.

When a negative determination is made in step S3707 or after the process of step S3708 is executed, it is determined in step S3709 whether or not it is necessary to draw a predetermined image. When it is necessary to draw a predetermined image, the drawing instruction process of the predetermined image is executed in step S3710. In this case, the drawing list information corresponding to the current drawing instruction timing is transmitted to the VDP 105.

When a negative determination is made in step S3709 or after the process of step S3710 is executed, it is determined in step S3711 whether or not the transfer of the regular data group is completed. If the transfer of the regular data group is not completed, the process returns to step S3702, and if the transfer of the regular data group is completed, the process proceeds to the normal process.

By the way, in the determination of whether or not it is necessary to draw a predetermined image in step S3709, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing of the inspection image and whether or not it is the drawing instruction timing of the initial display image. The judgment is made. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the fluctuation command is received, and if the fluctuation command is received in the situation where the main process is being executed, the simple symbol data group is sent to the regular area. On condition that the transfer is completed, the process for starting the variable display by the simple symbol is executed in step S3710. The process for starting the variation display by the simple symbol is the same as the variation start process by the simple symbol (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Furthermore, from the start to the end of the variation display by the simple symbol, the drawing list information for advancing the variation display by the simple symbol is displayed every time the drawing instruction timing is reached in the main process or the normal process. It is transmitted from the CPU 102 to the VDP 105.

Next, the drawing data setting process in the VDP 105 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the drawing list information is received. Here, the drawing list information in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining drawing list information. As shown in FIG. 61, the drawing list information includes information on data to be written, information on the address of the area in which the data should be written in each area in the drawing area 135, and among the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108. It contains information on the address of the area where the data to be written is currently stored.

Specifically, the data to be written by making a one-to-one correspondence with the address information (WA (1), WA (2), ... WA (n), ...) of each area in the drawing area 135. Information (KD (1), KD (2), ... KD (n), ...) and address information of the area where the data to be written is currently read (RA (7), RA ( A combination with 108), ... RA (m), ...) is set. In VDP105, by referring to the drawing list information, the type of data to be written, the area where the data to be written is currently read, and the area to which the data to be written should be written are uniquely specified. Can be done.

By the way, when the display CPU 102 transmits the drawing list information, the display CPU 102 grasps the content of the image to be drawn and the area in which the image data necessary for displaying the image is stored, and the drawing list information corresponding to the grasped result. To send. In this case, a large amount of drawing list information is stored in the drawing list information storage area 103b of the program ROM 103 corresponding to all the assumed patterns, and the display CPU 102 selects one drawing list information from the drawing list information. It is transmitted to VDP105. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the regular data group may be stored in both the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108 at the same time. In this case, the display CPU 102 stores the regular data group in the VDP side RAM 108. Select the drawing list information as if it were. However, the configuration is not limited to the above, and the display CPU 102 may generate drawing list information.

A frame area for creating drawing data is provided in the VDP side RAM 108 as in the eighth embodiment, and drawing data is transferred from a predetermined frame area of the frame area to the line buffer of the VDP 105. The configuration of the drawing list information may be applied to the configuration to be transferred. In this case, the drawing list information includes information on which frame area of the frame area is to be written, information on the address of each area in the frame area, and information on data to be written in the area of the address. And the information of the address of the area where the data to be written is currently being read may be included.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when displaying a predetermined image on the display screen G, the display CPU 102 gives a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 before the display timing of the predetermined image. In the VDP 105, by receiving the drawing instruction, drawing data corresponding to the drawing instruction is created in a predetermined frame area of the frame area by the display timing, and the created drawing data is stored in the line buffer in accordance with the display timing. Transfer. In this case, since it is necessary for the VDP 105 to grasp the display timing or the timing corresponding to the display timing, it is preferable that the drawing list information includes the information of the timing.

Returning to the explanation of the drawing data setting process (FIG. 60), if it is determined in step S3801 that the drawing list information has not been received, the present setting process is terminated as it is, and the drawing list information is received in step S3801. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, by referring to the drawing list information received this time, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to read the data from the bridge side RAM 107 in order to create the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list information this time.

When it is necessary to read data from the bridge side RAM 107, the output of the access signal is started in step S3803. The access signal is transmitted to the display CPU 102 instead of being transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. As described above, the display CPU 102 transmits the access signal to the bridge LSI 109 when the access signal is received from the VDP 105.

In the following step S3804, the data instructed by the drawing list information is read from the area indicated by the drawing list information, and in the following step S3805, the read data is transferred to the area indicated by the drawing list information. Write against. After that, in step S3806, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data this time is completed, and if it is not completed, the process returns to the process of step S3804, and if it is completed, the process proceeds to step S3807. In step S3807, the output of the access signal is stopped. After that, this setting process ends.

By executing the processes of steps S3804 to S3806, drawing data for the drawing area 135 is created using at least the image data transferred to the bridge side RAM 107.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to read the data from the bridge side RAM 107 (step S3802: NO), the processes after step S3808 are executed. In step S3808, the data specified by the drawing list information is read from the area indicated by the drawing list information, and in the following step S3809, the read data is read from the area indicated by the drawing list information. Write. After that, in step S3810, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data this time is completed, and if it is not completed, the process returns to step S3808, and if it is completed, this setting process is terminated. ..

By executing the processes of steps S3808 to S3810, drawing data for the drawing area 135 is created using only the image data transferred to the VDP side RAM 108.

Next, the data transfer instruction processing in the display CPU 102 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the predetermined data group. The predetermined data group corresponds to various data groups included in the change data group in the first embodiment. Further, it is determined whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing by referring to the display table and the information on the elapsed time of the game times. This also applies to the case of determining whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing for other data groups in the present data transfer instruction process. If it is the transfer instruction timing of the predetermined data group, the transfer instruction process of the predetermined data group is executed in step S3902. Specifically, the transfer command corresponding to the data group to be transferred this time is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109.

Upon receiving the transfer command, the bridge LSI 109 executes the data transfer setting process (FIG. 40) and the data transfer process (FIG. 20) in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this case, in the present embodiment, the transfer command transmitted from the display CPU 102 includes the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107, the transfer order of each unit data constituting each of these data groups, and each. Information that can identify the address in the bridge side RAM 107 to which the unit data should be written is included, and the bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads the unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the transfer command, and the read unit. Write data to the area of the indicated address. The configuration for such data transfer is as described in the description of the main process in the display CPU 102.

Further, when the transfer of the predetermined data group to be transferred this time to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, the bridge LSI 109 transmits a transfer completion signal corresponding to the data group for which the transfer is completed to the display CPU 102. ..

When a negative determination is made in step S3901 or after the process of step S3902 is executed, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not a transfer completion signal for a predetermined data group is received from the bridge LSI 109. When the transfer completion signal for the predetermined data group is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3904. Specifically, this time, the data group that has been transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 and the address of the bridge-side RAM 107 in which the data group is stored are stored in the work RAM 104 with information that can be identified by the display CPU 102.

When a negative determination is made in step S3903 or after the processing of step S3904 is executed, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not it is the transfer instruction timing of the data group to be overwritten on the regular area 137. If it is the transfer instruction timing, the transfer instruction process of the data group to be overwritten is executed in step S3906. Specifically, the transfer command corresponding to the data group to be transferred this time is read from the program ROM 103, and the read transfer command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. The specific contents of the information included in the transfer command and the processing contents in the bridge LSI 109 based on the reception of the transfer command are as described above.

When a negative determination is made in step S3905 or after the processing of step S3906 is executed, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not the transfer completion signal of the data group to be overwritten is received from the bridge LSI 109. When the transfer completion signal for the data group is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3908. The details of the processing have already been described.

In the following step S3909, the overwrite instruction process for the VDP 105 is executed. Specifically, this time, the VDP 105 is instructed to transfer the data group that has been transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 to the VDP-side RAM 108. In the overwrite instruction process, the transfer command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the VDP 105. The specific contents of the transfer command transmitted to the VDP 105 and the processing contents in the VDP 105 based on the reception of the transfer command are as described in the explanation of the main processing in the display CPU 102. However, when the overwriting is completed, the VDP 105 transmits an overwriting completion signal to the display CPU 102.

When a negative determination is made in step S3907 or after the process of step S3909 is executed, it is determined in step S3910 whether or not an overwrite completion signal is received from the VDP 105. When the overwrite completion signal is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3911. Specifically, this time, the data group for which the transfer to the VDP side RAM 108 has been completed and the address of the VDP side RAM 108 in which the data group is stored are stored in the work RAM 104 with information that can be specified by the display CPU 102.

When a negative determination is made in step S3910 or after the process of step S3911 is executed, it is determined in step S3912 whether or not it is the return instruction timing of the regular data group. When it is the return instruction timing of the regular data group, it is determined in step S3913 whether or not the evacuation should be executed. The situation in which the evacuation should be executed is a situation in which the non-erasable data group is stored in the regular area 137 and the regular data group cannot be restored, as in the first embodiment.

When the situation is such that the evacuation should be executed, the evacuation return instruction process for the bridge LSI 109 is executed in step S3914. Specifically, the evacuation correspondence return command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. In this save support return command, the type of data group to be transferred from the character ROM 106 to the bridge side RAM 107, the transfer order of each unit data constituting each of these data groups, and the address in the bridge side RAM 107 to write each unit data. The bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads the unit data from the character ROM 106 according to the instruction of the information included in the save support return command, and the read unit data is stored in the area of the specified address. Write against. Then, when the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, the return completion signal is transmitted from the bridge LSI 109 to the display CPU 102.

In addition, the save-correspondence return command includes information instructing not to erase the regular data group transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107 when transferring other data groups. In the bridge LSI 109, when the regular data group is transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 based on the reception of the save support return command, the normal data group is not erased until the save release command is received from the display CPU 102. ..

On the other hand, when the situation is not such that the evacuation should be executed (step S3913: NO), the normal return instruction processing for the bridge LSI 109 is executed in step S3915. Specifically, the normal return command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109. This normal return command includes information excluding the information instructing not to erase the regular data group transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 in the save support return command. The bridge LSI 109 sequentially reads the unit data from the character ROM 106 as instructed by the information included in the normal return command, and writes the read unit data to the area of the instructed address. Then, when the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed, the return completion signal is transmitted from the bridge LSI 109 to the display CPU 102.

When a negative determination is made in step S3912, it is determined in step S3916 whether or not a return completion signal has been received from the bridge LSI 109 after the process of step S3914 is executed or the process of step S3915 is executed. .. When the return completion signal is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3917. The details of the processing have already been described.

When a negative determination is made in step S3916 or after the processing of step S3917 is executed, it is determined in step S3918 whether or not it is possible to return the regular data group to the regular area 137. Specifically, after the evacuation-corresponding return command has been transmitted, the situation in which the normal data group cannot be returned to the normal area 137 has been resolved, and the return completion signal is received from the bridge LSI 109. Determine if it is. Further, after the normal return command has been transmitted, it is determined whether or not the return completion signal has been received from the bridge LSI 109.

When it is possible to return the regular data group to the regular area 137 (step S3918: YES), the return instruction process for the VDP 105 is executed in step S3919. Specifically, this time, the VDP 105 is instructed to transfer the regular data group that has been transferred to the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108. In the return instruction process, the transfer command read from the program ROM 103 is transmitted to the VDP 105. The specific contents of the transfer command transmitted to the VDP 105 and the processing contents in the VDP 105 based on the reception of the transfer command are as described in the explanation of the main processing in the display CPU 102. However, the VDP 105 transmits a return completion signal to the display CPU 102 when the return of the regular data group is completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3918 or after the process of step S3919 is executed, it is determined in step S3920 whether or not a return completion signal is received from the VDP 105. If the return completion signal has not been received, the data transfer instruction process is terminated as it is. When the return completion signal is received, the written area grasping process is executed in step S3921. The details of the processing have already been described.

In the following step S3922, the evacuation release instruction process is executed. In the save release instruction process, the save release command is transmitted to the bridge LSI 109 on condition that the save response return command has been transmitted. By receiving the save release command, the bridge LSI 109 handles the area in which the regular data group is stored in the bridge side RAM 107 as an area to be written in future data transfer. After executing the process of step S3922, the data transfer instruction process is terminated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the display CPU 102 grasps which area of the bridge-side RAM 107 and the VDP-side RAM 108 stores the image data read from the character ROM 106, and causes the VDP 105 and the bridge LSI 109. In the data transfer instruction of, the instruction is given including the information related to the address of the reading source area and the address of the writing destination area. Further, when the drawing instruction is given to the VDP 105, the instruction is given including the information related to the address of the reading source area. As a result, the VDP 105 and the bridge LSI 109 only need to perform processing according to the instruction from the display CPU 102, so that the configuration of the VDP 105 and the bridge LSI 109 can be simplified.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hardware configuration of the display control device 100 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the display control device 100 according to the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 63, unlike the first embodiment, the bridge side RAM 107 and the VDP side RAM 108 are not provided, and the RAM for reading the image data from the character ROM 106 in advance is the read RAM 241. It is aggregated. Further, the bridge LSI 109 is not provided, and the functions of the bridge LSI 109 are concentrated in the VDP 242.

The VDP 242 in the present embodiment is electrically connected to the display CPU 102, the character ROM 106, and the read RAM 241 via the I / F 243, and is determined by the arithmetic processing unit 244 provided in the VDP 242 based on the instruction from the display CPU 102. Processing is executed. The predetermined process includes a drawing process on the symbol display device 31 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 102. The content of this drawing process is the same as that of the eighth embodiment. Briefly, the arithmetic processing unit 244 has a frame for a frame provided in the read RAM 241 based on the drawing list information received from the display CPU 102. Drawing data is created for the area 241a. Then, the created drawing data is transferred to the line buffer 245 of the VDP 242, and a drawing signal is sent to the symbol display device 31 via the output port 136 of the display control board 101 according to the drawing data transferred to the line buffer 245. Output.

Further, as a predetermined process in the arithmetic processing unit 244, a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 106 based on the transfer instruction from the display CPU 102 to the read RAM 241 is included. In the transfer process, the data transfer unit 246 is set to transfer data to the data transfer unit 246 provided in the VDP 242, and the data transfer unit 246 is set to transfer data to read from the character ROM 106. Image data is transferred to the RAM 241 for use.

In this case, the data transfer unit 246 transfers the image data in parallel with the drawing process by the arithmetic processing unit 244, but the VDP 242 has a cache buffer 247 provided in the bridge LSI 109 in the first embodiment. The image data read from the character ROM 106 is temporarily stored in the cache buffer 247 and then transferred to the read RAM 241. Thereby, the timing of accessing the read RAM 241 for drawing processing by the arithmetic processing unit 244 and the timing of transferring the image data to the read RAM 241 by the data transfer unit 246 can be adjusted so as not to overlap.

By the way, the read RAM 241 is provided with a regular area 241b and a change area 241c, and a regular data group is basically written in the regular area 241b and a change data is written in the change area 241c. The group is written. In this case, when transferring the regular data group to the regular area 241b, the transfer to the regular area 241b is performed without the transfer to the change area 241c. However, as described above, each area of the read RAM 241 is not limited to the configuration in which the frame area 241a, the regular area 241b, and the change area 241c are previously distinguished, and the drawing data can be created and the regular data can be created. The group and the data group for change may be written to any area. In this case, the display CPU 102 or the arithmetic processing unit 244 shall be configured to grasp the contents of the data stored in the area of each address in the read RAM 241 so that the necessary data is not erased. Is preferable.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, although the configuration of the VDP 242 is more complicated than that of the first embodiment, the bridge LSI 109 can be omitted.

The data transfer from the character ROM 106 to the read RAM 241 and the drawing process to the symbol display device 31 may not be performed in parallel. In this case, it is necessary to adjust the data transfer timing and the drawing process timing. Therefore, the cache buffer 247 may not be provided.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied independently to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment not exemplified as an application target of the configuration.

(1) In the first embodiment, the bridge-side RAM 107 may not store a plurality of types of data groups at the same time. In this case, one type of data group is alternately stored in the bridge side RAM 107. Even with this configuration, it is possible to satisfactorily display images for a predetermined period using the data group transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107. However, in this configuration, a waiting time for transferring the data group occurs between one effect range and the next effect range, and the progress of the effect is likely to be interrupted. Therefore, in this respect, the first implementation described above. A configuration in which a plurality of types of data groups are simultaneously stored in the bridge-side RAM 107 as in the form is preferable.

(2) Instead of the configuration in which the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 are each connected to the bridge side RAM 107 via the input / output driver circuit 122 of the bridge LSI 109, the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 are individually connected to the bridge side RAM 107. It may be a connected configuration. Further, a relay board may be provided instead of the bridge LSI 109, and the VDP 105, the bridge side RAM 107, and the bridge LSI 109 may be connected to the relay board. In this case, the input / output driver circuit 122 becomes unnecessary in the bridge LSI 109.

When the image data is transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108, the display CPU 102 or VDP 105 issues a data transfer instruction to the bridge LSI 109, and the bridge LSI 109 reads the image data from the bridge side RAM 107 and displays the data. The read image data may be transmitted to the VDP 105, and the VDP 105 may be configured to write the transmitted image data to the VDP side RAM 108. In this case, since the VDP 105 does not need to directly access the bridge side RAM 107, the input / output driver circuit 122 becomes unnecessary.

Further, the bridge LSI 109 may not be provided with the write control unit 121, and the function of the write control unit 121 may be mounted on the bridge LSI 109 as a hard circuit. That is, the bridge LSI 109 may be configured such that data transfer is performed based on the circuit configuration instead of data transfer based on the programmed control process.

(3) The function of the display CPU 102, the function of the program ROM 103, the function of the work RAM 104, the function of the VDP 105, the function of the character ROM 106, the function of the bridge side RAM 107, the function of the VDP side RAM 108, and the function of the bridge LSI 109 are 1 in a predetermined combination. It may be chipped, or all may be chipped.

(4) The configuration for adjusting the access timing of the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 to the bridge side RAM 107 is not limited to the configuration in the first embodiment, and the VDP 105 and the write control unit 121 are simultaneously used. It is optional as long as the bridge side RAM 107 is not accessed. For example, the VDP 105 may output an access signal during the period of accessing the bridge side RAM 107, and the write control unit 121 may access the bridge side RAM 107 in a situation where the access signal is not input from the VDP 105. In this case, the chance that the write control unit 121 can access the bridge side RAM 107 is increased as compared with the first embodiment.

Further, the VDP 105 may output a non-access signal or an access signal to the display CPU 102, and adjust the period in which the write control unit 121 accesses the bridge side RAM 107 in the display CPU 102. Further, the display CPU 102 may be configured so that the status in which the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107 can be grasped without receiving a signal from the VDP 105.

(5) When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it becomes necessary to use the regular data group in a situation where the transfer of the regular data group to the bridge side RAM 107 is completed but the transfer to the VDP side RAM 108 is not completed. In this case, the regular data group may be read from the bridge side RAM 107 without waiting for the transfer to the VDP side RAM 108 to be completed. In this case, the timing at which the control using the regular data group can be started can be accelerated.

(6) In the VDP side RAM 108, a data group other than the regular data group may be appropriately transferred and stored in an area other than the regular area 137. In this case, the change data group such as the normal reach data group and the super reach data group is transferred to the VDP side RAM 108. In this configuration, when transferring the change data group, it is necessary that the display CPU 102 gives a transfer instruction not only to the write control unit 121 but also to the VDP 105.

(7) The regular area 137 is set as an area of a predetermined address in the reading RAM, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area that functions as the regular area 137 may be appropriately changed. Good. In this case, it is necessary for the display CPU 102 or the VDP 105 to grasp the address information of the area currently set as the regular area 137. According to this configuration, for example, in a configuration in which an area other than the regular area 137 in the VDP side RAM 108 functions as a change area, the degree of freedom in allocating an area for simultaneously storing and retaining a plurality of types of data groups is increased. ..

(8) In addition to the character ROM 106, a non-volatile storage means for storing a data group in advance may be provided. Specifically, regarding the configuration, a NOR type flash memory is provided as another non-volatile storage means, and the NOR type flash memory stores a regular data group. Then, by connecting the NOR type flash memory to a drawing means such as VDP105, when displaying an image corresponding to the regular data group, the regular data group may be read from the NOR type flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of non-volatile storage means, but the display of images corresponding to the regular data group is good even if the regular data group is not transferred when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. You will be able to do it. Further, even in this configuration, only the regular data group is stored in the NOR flash memory, and the character ROM 106 is configured to store the change data group whose data capacity tends to increase due to the diversification of the production. As a result, since it is sufficient to use a NOR type flash memory having a small storage capacity, the above effects can be achieved while reducing the cost.

(9) In the first embodiment, when the backup power is not supplied to the read RAM and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data group stored in the read RAM until then. May be configured to supply backup power for reading instead of the configuration to be destroyed or erased. In this configuration, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the read RAM at the time of power failure is destroyed, and if it is not destroyed, the initial setting of the regular data group is set. It may be configured to perform the initial setting of the regular data group when it is destroyed without performing it. As a result, the frequency with which the initial setting of the regular data group is performed at the time of starting up the power supply is reduced.

As a means for supplying the backup power, the power supply and the power generation control device 80 may also use the power supply unit during power failure to supply the backup power to the RAM 64 or the like of the main control device 60, and another power supply unit may be used. A medium power supply unit may be provided.

(10) The cache buffer 123 is not limited to a configuration in which only one unit data is temporarily stored, and may be a configuration in which a plurality of unit data are temporarily stored at the same time. In this case, when the data read from the character ROM 106 is transferred to the bridge-side RAM 107, the degree of freedom in adjusting the transfer timing is increased.

(11) The storage means for reading is not limited to RAM, which is a volatile storage means, as long as the speed required for reading data is faster than that of the character ROM 106 and the data can be overwritten by the write control unit 121.

(12) It is not essential that both the inspection image and the initial display image are displayed when the power supply is turned on, and only one of them may be displayed or both may not be displayed. However, in order to prevent a situation in which nothing is displayed on the symbol display device 31 until the standby image can be displayed, it is preferable to display at least one of the inspection image and the initial display image.

(13) The transfer order of the plurality of types of data groups at the time of starting up the power supply is not limited to that in the first embodiment. For example, the abnormality notification data group may be transferred with the highest priority. In this case, the state is quickly shifted to a state in which abnormality notification can be performed. Further, the data group for abnormality notification may be transferred next to the data group for inspection. Further, the normal symbol data group may be transferred after the transfer of each background data group is completed.

(14) The data group included in the regular data group is not limited to those exemplified in each of the above embodiments. For example, in a configuration in which a demo image is displayed when the standby image continues for a predetermined period, the demo image may be included in the regular data group. Further, in the configuration of switching to the state of displaying the image of the model description or the like according to the operation of the effect operation device 58, the data group for displaying the image of the switching destination is set as the regular data group. May be good.

Further, the abnormality notification data group may not be included in the regular data group, and the normal symbol data group and each background data group may not be included in the regular data group. In the configuration in which the abnormality notification data group is not included in the regular data group, when an abnormality occurs, the voice lamp control device 90 is configured to perform abnormality notification on the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55. Is preferable. In this case, even if the symbol display device 31 delays the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the abnormality, the abnormality notification is performed by a notification means different from that of the symbol display device 31, so that the abnormality occurs in the entire pachinko machine 10. It is possible to start the abnormality notification at an early stage.

Further, when focusing on the configuration other than the regular data group, the configuration may be such that the regular data group does not exist. However, it is preferable that a regular data group is set in order to display an image corresponding to a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing at an early stage.

(15) In a situation where the main control device 60 is executing the initial setting process at the time of power-up, that is, by the time the main control device 60 starts executing the process of advancing the game, at least one of the regular data groups. The transfer of the data group of the unit may be completed. For example, the transfer of the initial display data group may be completed in a situation where the initial setting process is being executed in the main control device 60.

Further, the transfer of the abnormality notification data group may be completed in the situation where the initial setting process is being executed in the main control device 60. In this case, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified in the main control device 60, early abnormality notification can always be executed.

Further, the transfer of the simple symbol data group may be completed in the situation where the initial setting process is being executed in the main control device 60. In this case, when the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the symbol display device 31 is sure to immediately perform the variable display of the symbol by either the simple symbol or the normal symbol.

In addition, when focusing on configurations other than the variable display of symbols using simple symbols, the following configurations are also conceivable. That is, the transfer of the initial variation display data group such as the normal symbol data group and the background data group may be completed in the situation where the initial setting process is executed in the main control device 60. In this case, when the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the symbol display device 31 reliably immediately displays the variation of the symbol by the normal symbol.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball can be launched even if the transfer of the simple symbol data group is not completed, and the start condition of the game round can be satisfied. The game ball may not be launched until the transfer of the simple symbol data group is completed. In this case, when the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the symbol display device 31 is sure to immediately perform the variable display of the symbol by either the simple symbol or the normal symbol.

In addition, when focusing on configurations other than the variable display of symbols using simple symbols, the following configurations are also conceivable. That is, the game ball may not be launched until the transfer of the initial variation display data group such as the normal symbol data group and the background data group is completed. In this case, when the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the symbol display device 31 reliably immediately displays the variation of the symbol by the normal symbol. Further, when the simple symbol data group is not set in the character ROM 106 and the reading of the normal symbol data group and the background data group is not completed and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the symbol is displayed. The device 31 may be configured such that the display of the image up to that point is maintained and the image corresponding to the game times is not displayed.

(17) When focusing on a configuration other than the configuration in which the change data group may be overwritten in the area including at least a part of the area in which the regular data group is stored, the operation to the RAM for reading is performed. The area in which the regular data group is stored may not be overwritten when the system data group or the all-round production data group is transferred. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the reading RAM as compared with each of the above embodiments, or to reduce the data capacity of the operation system data group and the all-round effect data group as compared with each of the above embodiments. , The processing load is reduced because there is no need to perform processing related to overwriting or restoring the regular data group. In this case, the regular data group is stored and retained at least during power-on.

(18) When overwriting the change data group such as the operation system data group or the all-round production data group on the area where the regular data group is stored, the bridge of the first half data group in the change data group When the transfer to the side RAM 107 is completed, the write control unit 121 outputs the first half completion signal to the VDP 105 or the display CPU 102, and based on this, the data group of the first half is transferred from the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105. May be.

(19) When overwriting a change data group such as an operation system data group or an all-round production data group on an area in which a regular data group is stored, the first half of the bridge side RAM 107 to the VDP side RAM 108 When the transfer of the data group is completed, the VDP 105 outputs an overwrite completion signal to the write control unit 121 or the display CPU 102, and based on this, the write control unit 121 starts transferring the latter half of the data group to the bridge side RAM 107. May be.

(20) Among the operation system data groups, a data group different from the data group corresponding to each effect range selected as the branch destination may be overwritten on the regular area 137.

(21) In the super reach B display, the effect range of the progress destination is changed depending on the number of times the effect operation device 58 is operated. Instead, when the effect operation device 58 is pressed and held for a long time. Or, when a continuous pressing operation is performed, the effect range of the progress destination may be changed according to the operation. Even in this case, it is preferable to transfer the data group corresponding to the effect range of each progress destination to the reading RAM in advance. Further, when the effect operation device 58 is operated or when the effect operation device 58 is operated in a predetermined manner, the effect of the effect range of the progress destination may be started immediately.

Further, the effect range of the progress destination may be changed depending on conditions other than the operation of the effect operation device 58. For example, the production range of the progress destination may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined period during the reach display, and the game to the predetermined ball entry portion may be changed. The effect range of the destination may be changed according to the number of balls entered. Even in this case, it is preferable to transfer the data group corresponding to the effect range of each progress destination to the reading RAM in advance.

(22) In a configuration in which the effect range of the progress destination is changed according to a predetermined condition such as the number of operations of the effect operation device 58, the effect range of the progress destination is not limited to two types, and three or more types are set. It may have been done. For example, a plurality of reference times are set as the number of operations of the effect operation device 58, and one of three or more types of branch effect ranges is the effect of the progress destination, depending on which of the plurality of reference times is applicable. The configuration selected as the range is conceivable. Even in this case, it is preferable to transfer the data group corresponding to the effect range of each progress destination to the reading RAM in advance. Further, in this configuration, the data capacity of the data group read in advance is larger than that of each of the above embodiments. Therefore, a configuration in which the change data group is overwritten on the area including at least a part of the area in which the regular data group is stored becomes more effective.

(23) When switching the display mode, not only the background image but also the type of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner may be switched. Further, in addition to the type of the background image and the pattern, the type of reach display that can be selected or the type of reach display that is easy to select may be changed. Further, the display mode is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Further, the display mode may not be switched.

(24) A configuration in which the effect range of the progress destination is changed according to a predetermined condition such as the number of operations of the effect operation device 58 may be set not as a reach display but as an effect for a big hit. Further, the effect range of the progress destination may be selected by the player based on the operation of the effect operation device 58. Even in these cases, it is preferable to transfer the data group corresponding to the effect range of each progress destination to the reading RAM in advance.

(25) When the variation display by the simple symbol is performed, the variation display time may be shorter or longer than the variation display time determined by the main control device 60. However, in order to match the variation display time of each game between the main control device 60 and the display control device 100, the variation display time is the main control device even when the variation display is performed by a simple symbol. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the variable display time is determined in 60.

(26) When the transfer of the data group capable of the variable display by the normal symbol such as the normal symbol data group and the background data group to the reading RAM is completed while the variable display by the simple symbol is being performed. At that time, it may be configured to switch to the variable display based on the normal symbol. In this case, it is necessary to create a display table for the fluctuation display by the normal symbol at the start of the game round even in the game round in which the variation display by the simple symbol is performed. According to this configuration, although the processing load is increased, it is possible to accelerate the timing at which the fluctuation display by the normal symbol becomes possible.

(27) It is possible to make the player recognize that the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 has not been invalidated by performing special notification such as the variation display by the simple symbol in the situation where the variation display by the normal symbol cannot be performed. When paying attention to the remarkable effect, the configuration related to the special notification may be applied to the configuration not provided with the RAM for reading.

In this configuration, for example, a notification means different from the symbol display device 31 is connected to the display control device 100. Then, the display CPU 102 determines whether or not the symbol display device 31 is normal and whether or not the signal path to and from the symbol display device 31 is normal, and if any of the abnormalities is identified, the above notification Special notifications such as variable display by simple symbols will be given by means. In this case, even if any of the above abnormalities occur, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is not invalidated.

Further, for example, in the voice lamp control device 90, whether or not the display control device 100 is functioning normally, whether or not the signal path between the display control device 100 and the symbol display device 31 is normal, and whether or not the symbol display device 31 is used. Is functioning normally, and if any of the abnormalities is identified, a voice or the like indicating that the winning is not invalidated is output from the speaker unit 55. In this case, even if any of the above abnormalities occur, it is possible to make the player recognize that the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is not invalidated.

(28) In the production for big hits, instead of the configuration in which the data groups corresponding to the production range for all rounds are collectively transferred to the reading RAM as the data group for all-round production, the production range for a plurality of rounds. A plurality of data groups including the above may be set, and the data groups may be sequentially transferred when the reference round is started or ended. In this case, when transferring the data group corresponding to the round effect range to the reading RAM, it is not necessary to overwrite the area in which the regular data group is stored.

(29) In the read RAM, the area to which the data group corresponding to each effect range is transferred may be uniquely defined in advance.

(30) Instead of creating a display table by combining a plurality of variable display tables, a display table is prepared in advance with a one-to-one correspondence for each of a series of effects from the start to the end. It may be configured. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the table information in the program ROM 103 is larger than that of each of the above embodiments, but it is not necessary to create the display table at the start of the game round, and the display table is prepared in advance. Since it is only necessary to select one display table from the displayed display tables, it is possible to simplify the process executed at the start of the game round.

(31) In the variable display table or the jackpot effect table, not only the transfer start timing of the corresponding data group but also the information of the transfer destination area may be preset. Further, after the display CPU 102 creates the display table, the information related to the transfer destination area of each data group may be written in the created display table. In this case, it is possible to simplify the process of specifying the transfer destination of the data group during the game times or the production for the jackpot.

(32) In each of the above embodiments, the notice display is surely generated when the reach display occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice display is provided even when the reach display occurs. May not occur. In this case, since the combination pattern of the type and presence / absence of the notice display and the type / presence / absence of the reach display is larger than that in each of the above embodiments, the storage capacity for the table is larger in the configuration in which the display table is prepared in advance. turn into. Therefore, a table is set individually for each effect range, such as a variable display table and a jackpot effect table, and the display table is created by acquiring these tables as needed. Is preferable.

(33) The image of the normal reach display may be configured to be displayable by processing the normal symbol data group and the background data group. Further, the measurement counter may be either an addition type or a subtraction type. Further, the types of the notice display and the super reach display are not limited to those of each of the above embodiments and are arbitrary. Further, instead of the effect operation device 58, an infrared ray or radio wave receiving unit may be provided, and the display mode may be switched or the operation system effect may be executed based on the reception result of the receiving unit.

(34) Judgment as to whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, the judgment of the type, etc. are held. Pachinko that is performed at a timing before the game round related to the information is started, and a hold notice (or hold notification) that reflects the determination result is performed at a timing before the game round related to the above-mentioned hold information is started. A configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 or a configuration in which the data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM is processed to display an image may be applied to the machine.

(34-1) As an aspect of the hold notice, for example, a series of game times from a game time before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice to a game time related to the hold information that triggered the execution. It is conceivable that the effect of the above is displayed on the symbol display device 31. In other words, if it is decided to give a hold notice for the predetermined hold information and the predetermined hold information is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice, the first game after the execution of the process related to the setting is executed. It is conceivable that a series of effects including the times to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution are displayed on the symbol display device 31.

Specifically, regarding the above aspect, a series of movies in which the story progresses with the passage of time straddles a plurality of game times and up to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice (corresponding to the said). A configuration that is executed (including the game times) is conceivable. In this case, each pattern of a plurality of game times assumed within the range of the upper limit number of memorable hold information (for example, if the upper limit number is "4", each of 4 game times, 3 game times, and 2 game times A series of movies are prepared in advance for each of the patterns), and a series of movies corresponding to the number of pending information stored in the hold when it is decided to give a hold notice for the predetermined hold information. It is preferable to have a configuration that starts.

By the way, the first operating port and the second operating port are provided, and the holding information is individually acquired for each of the first and second operating ports and the holding information that can be stored for each of the first and second operating ports. In the configuration in which the upper limit of the number of games is set, a series of movies may be individually prepared for each pattern of the plurality of game times assumed within the range of the sum of the upper limit numbers of both operating ports. A series of movies may be individually prepared for each pattern of a plurality of game times assumed within the range of the upper limit number of any one of the operating ports.

Further, a configuration in which the hold information of one of the first operation port and the second operation port is preferentially digested, specifically, if the hold information relating to the priority side operation port is stored, the storage is stored. Even if the hold information related to the non-priority operating port acquired earlier than the held information is stored, the hold information related to the priority operating port is the target for starting the game. , The hold notice by a series of movies as described above may be executed only on either the priority side or the non-priority side. For example, in a situation where a plurality of hold information related to the priority side is stored, when the hold information newly acquired on the priority side is set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, the hold notice by a series of movies as described above is issued. It may be configured to be executed, and as described above when a plurality of hold information related to the non-priority side is stored and the hold information newly acquired on the non-priority side is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice. It may be configured to execute a hold notice by a series of movies. In this case, in the latter configuration, if new hold information is acquired on the priority side while the hold notice by a series of movies is being executed, the hold information will be preferentially digested. Therefore, the hold notice by a series of movies may be interrupted.

By executing a series of effects related to the hold notice so as to straddle a plurality of game times as described above, a continuous effect is performed over a long period of time that is not set in the individual effects of each game time. Will be possible, and the production will be diversified. Further, even if a continuous production is executed over such a long time, since it straddles a plurality of game times, there is an inconvenience that the time required to digest each game time becomes long. Does not occur.

Further, a configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 or a configuration in which the data transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM is processed to display an image is applied to the game machine that gives the above-mentioned hold notice. In this case, among the game times included in the series of effects, the data group processed at the start of the game times to be executed in the game times before the game times to be executed is read in advance. It is good to transfer it to RAM. As a result, there is no waiting time for data transfer at the boundary between the game times included in the series of effects, so that the series of effects can proceed smoothly.

In addition, by executing a series of effects related to the hold notice so as to straddle a plurality of game times, it is possible to perform continuous effects over a long period of time that are not set in the individual effects of each game time. Therefore, when paying attention to the remarkable effect of diversifying the effects, the NOR flash memory uses a configuration in which a series of effects related to the hold notice is executed so as to straddle a plurality of game times as the character ROM 106. It may be applied to a game machine that does not have such a configuration or a configuration in which data is pre-transferred from the character ROM 106 to the reading RAM.

(34-2) As another aspect of the hold notice, the above-mentioned series of effects is not executed, but the execution is performed from the game times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice. In each of the game rounds up to the game round related to the hold information that triggered the above, it is conceivable that an effect different from the normal symbol variation display is started from the start of the game round. In this case, the same effect may be executed in each game time related to the hold notice, or a different effect may be executed for each game time related to the hold notice.

When applying a configuration in which a NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 or a configuration in which data transferred from the character ROM 106 to a reading RAM is processed to display an image is applied to the game machine that gives the hold notice. Is to transfer the data group processed at the start of the game times of the execution target to the RAM for reading in advance in the game times before the game times to be executed among the game times related to the hold notice. You need to keep it. As a result, since there is no waiting time for data transfer at the boundary portion of each game time related to the hold notice, it is possible to smoothly start the production of each game time related to the hold notice.

(35) The target of abnormality notification is not limited to magnetic detection, for example, the act of abnormally vibrating the pachinko machine 10, the opening of the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, and the opening of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame. Or, foreign matter may be inserted from the upper plate 56a or the lower plate 57a. Further, whether or not the ball trays such as the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a are in a full state and whether or not the tank is in a ball-free state may be detected. Regardless of the detection target, it is preferable that the abnormality notification is performed as in the case of magnetic detection. Further, the detection sensor for detecting an abnormality is not limited to the configuration connected to the main control device 60, and may be connected to the voice lamp control device 90 or the display control device 100.

(36) An image display on the symbol display device 31 of a configuration using a NAND flash memory as the non-volatile storage means, a configuration for pre-transferring data from the non-volatile storage means to a reading RAM, and a configuration related to these configurations. It may be applied to a control means that handles data different from the image data processed in the case of making the data. For example, the above configuration may be applied to the control data in the display CPU 102. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the voice data and the light emission data in the voice lamp control device 90. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the control data in the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, the power supply and emission control device 80, or the voice lamp control device 90. Further, in a configuration in which a movable object for performing a game rotation operation is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to the control data of the movable object.

(37) The voice lamp control device 90 determines the presence / absence and type of the notice display in each game round, and the presence / absence and type of reach display are determined, and the display control device 100 creates a display table according to the determination result. It may be configured to be used. Further, the display table may be created by the voice lamp control device 90, and the information of the created display table may be transmitted to the display control device 100.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the voice lamp control device 90 based on the command output from the main control device 60, the display control device is based on the command output from the main control device 60. The 100 may be configured to control the voice lamp control device 90. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 are separately provided, both control devices 90 and 100 may be provided as one control device, and both control devices 90, One of the functions of 100 may be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices 90 and 100 may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 60 to the voice lamp control device 90 is also arbitrary.

(38) In the first embodiment, the data transfer instruction to the bridge LSI 109 may not be directly given from the display CPU 102, but the VDP 105 may give an instruction to the bridge LSI 109 based on the instruction from the display CPU 102. .. In this case, since it is not necessary to directly electrically connect the display CPU 102 and the bridge LSI 109, the number of wirings can be reduced.

(39) When the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107 instead of instructing the bridge LSI 109 that the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107 by a predetermined signal output such as a non-access signal or an access signal. The flag may be stored on the circuit of the bridge LSI 109 so that the write control unit 121 cannot access the bridge side RAM 107. Further, when the VDP 105 is accessing the bridge side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 may try to access the bridge side RAM 107 on the circuit of the bridge LSI 109, but may not be able to access it. With these configurations, when the VDP 105 does not access the bridge-side RAM 107, the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107 at an arbitrary timing, and the write control unit 121 can access the bridge-side RAM 107 for a period of time. Can be secured longer than that of the first embodiment.

(40) In the first embodiment, the capacity of the drawing data for one frame stored in the drawing area 135 and the capacity of the area for storing the drawing data for one frame transmitted from the VDP 105 in the symbol display device 31. However, the capacity corresponding to the number of pixels of the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 may be exceeded. According to this configuration, the time required to complete the output of the drawing signal corresponding to the image for one frame becomes long, and the period during which the write control unit 121 can access the bridge side RAM 107 becomes long accordingly. .. It should be noted that the drawing data that exceeds the capacity corresponding to the number of pixels of the display screen G is not used for displaying the image on the display screen G.

(41) In the display CPU 102, the transfer instruction timing of the image data is not set as a flag in the display table, but the counter information of the elapsed time for specifying the transfer instruction timing is set according to each data group. The transfer instruction may be given based on the counter information.

(42) In the first embodiment, when the regular design data group is temporarily deleted from the regular area 137, the normal symbol data group is also erased. Instead, the normal symbol data group is deleted. The configuration may not be erased. Further, the background data group corresponding to the current display mode is not deleted, but the background data group not corresponding to the current display mode may be deleted. Further, in the configuration in which the normal symbol data group is individually set corresponding to the display mode, the normal symbol data group corresponding to the current display mode is not deleted, but the normal symbol data group corresponding to the current display mode is not deleted. The data group may be deleted.

(43) In the first embodiment, the VDP-side RAM 108 may be built in the VDP 105. Further, a VDP side RAM 108 electrically connected to the VDP 105 may be provided, and a video RAM may be separately built in the VDP 105. Further, in these configurations, the bridge side RAM 107 and the bridge LSI 109 may not be provided.

(44) In the first embodiment, the VDP 105 may be configured to be able to access the character ROM 106. In this case, the VDP 105 and the character ROM 106 may be electrically connected, or the VDP 105 may be connected to the character ROM 106 via the bridge LSI 109, and the VDP 105 may access the character ROM 106 via the bridge LSI 109. ..

(45) The display mode of the image in the case of performing the abnormality notification may be a mode different from that of the first embodiment. For example, a configuration may be configured in which characters for anomaly notification are displayed on top of an image of an effect, and when an image for anomaly notification is displayed, unlike a normal game time effect, a background image or the like is not displayed. A configuration may be configured in which only the variable display of the symbol is displayed on a part of the display screen G. That is, when the abnormality notification is performed in the middle of the production, the abnormality notification may be performed while the execution of the production is continued with the mode changed. However, even in this case, by continuing the advance transfer of the data group corresponding to the production of the normal game times without interruption, it is possible to satisfactorily return to the normal production after the abnormality notification is canceled. Can be done.

(46) In the first embodiment, the display CPU 102 or the VDP 105 may switch the input / output driver circuit 122.

Further, the character ROM 106 is not limited to a configuration in which the controller 141 is a memory device integrated with the NAND flash memory, the character ROM 106 is only the NAND flash memory, and the functions of the controller 141 are the display CPU 102 and the VDP 105. Alternatively, the configuration may be achieved by the write control unit 121.

(47) The drawing data for one frame is not limited to the configuration in which the drawing data for one frame is created by using only the image data read in either the bridge side RAM 107 or the VDP side RAM 108, and is read by the bridge side RAM 107. The drawing data for one frame may be created by using both the output image data and the image data read into the VDP side RAM 108.

(48) The hold information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the holding information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 24 are stored separately, and the holding information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 24 has priority. A configuration that is digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the pending information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are left and right. The configuration may be arranged side by side, or both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side at an angle. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 51, both operating ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port or the winning of the second operating port can be aimed at.

Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 has a first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information has been acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23, and the acquisition based on the winning of the lower operating port 24. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the hit / fail determination of the held information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern in the first display area is based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 is subject to the hit / fail judgment or based on the hit / miss judgment. Is started, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated. In addition, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area prior to the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 24 or based on the fact that the winning / failing judgment is made. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated.

(49) The player depends on the case where the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is the target of the winning / failing judgment and the case where the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is the target of the winning / failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. For example, in the configuration in which the hold information related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is preferentially digested as in (38) above, the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is the target of the winning / failing judgment. In this case, the configuration may be more advantageous to the player than the case where the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 23, in which the execution of the winning / failing determination is not prioritized, is the target of the winning / failing determination.

In setting such an advantageous state, for example, the jackpot winning probability when the hold information related to the prize in the lower operating port 24 is the target of the winning / failing determination is set to the hold related to the winning in the upper operating port 23. The configuration may be set higher than the jackpot winning probability when the information is the target of the winning / failing judgment. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result when the hold information related to the winning to the lower operating port 24 is a big hit is the jackpot result when the holding information related to the winning to the upper operating port 23 is a jackpot winning. The configuration may be set so as to be more advantageous than the distribution destination of.

More specifically, a jackpot result that is not set as a distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is set as a distribution destination of the jackpot result of winning the prize of the upper operating port 23. The former may be more advantageous than the latter because the jackpot result is set, and the lower activation is performed at the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning of the upper operating port 23. A jackpot result that has not been set is set as the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning of the mouth 24, and the latter is more advantageous than the former because the jackpot result is set. May be. Further, the type of the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the type of the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 are set to be the same. At the same time, in the winning of the lower operating port 24, the probability of distribution to the advantageous jackpot result may be set higher than that of the winning of the upper operating port 23.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of generating a prize in the lower operating port 24 is enhanced as compared with the winning in the upper operating port 23. Then, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired by winning the lower operating port 24 is prioritized and the result is determined, when the lower operating port 24 is won, the advantage set for the lower operating port 24 is set. Gender will be given priority to the player. As a result, a clear difference is provided in the functions of the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, and the player expects the lower operating port 24 to win the prize rather than the upper operating port 23. The game will be diversified.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in each of the above embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(50) The winning / failing lottery mode may not be set in a plurality of stages, but only a single winning / failing lottery mode may be set, and a plurality of types of jackpot numerical information may be set for the winning / failing lottery mode. ..

(51) In each of the above embodiments, one game rotation in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is started based on the result of the hit / fail determination in the main control device 60, but the present invention is limited to this. When the condition for the hit / fail judgment is satisfied in the main control device 60, the game round is started at a timing before the timing at which the hit / miss judgment is actually performed, and then the hit / miss judgment is performed. The configuration may be such that the subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game round are determined based on the above. In this case, when the start timing of the game round is reached, the main control device 60 first transmits a variation command, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the variation display time, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that the type command is transmitted, or the transmission timing of these variable time commands and the type command may be different. However, the timing at which the fluctuation time command or the type command is transmitted needs to be the timing until the fluctuation display of the symbol is switched from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation on the symbol display device 31.

(52) When focusing on the remarkable effect that the capacity of the non-volatile storage means can be satisfactorily increased by using the NAND flash memory as the non-volatile storage means such as the character ROM 106 and providing the RAM for reading, the configuration is concerned. Is required, and other configurations are optional.

(53) When paying attention to the remarkable effect that the read timing from the read RAM and the transfer timing to the read RAM can be adjusted by providing the cache buffer 123, the configuration is indispensable. Any other configuration is optional.

(54) When focusing on the remarkable effect and effect that the occurrence of a specific event can be satisfactorily dealt with by storing and holding the regular data group in the RAM for reading during the period when a specific event can occur, the configuration is concerned. Is required, and other configurations are optional.

(55) When paying attention to the remarkable effect that a predetermined control can be prioritized by transmitting a plurality of data groups according to a predetermined priority when the power is turned on, the configuration may be essential. Other configurations are optional.

(56) By performing a special notification such as a simple display when the fluctuation display by the normal symbol cannot be performed, the player can confirm that the establishment of the start condition of the game round is not invalidated in the situation where the fluctuation display by the normal symbol cannot be performed. Recognizes this and pays attention to the remarkable effect of suppressing the confusion of the game, the configuration may be essential and other configurations are optional.

(57) By setting a plurality of data groups corresponding to a plurality of effect ranges and transferring a data group corresponding to the rear effect range in a situation where the effect of a predetermined effect range is executed. When paying attention to the remarkable effect that the transition from the predetermined effect range to the rear effect range is smoothly performed, the configuration may be essential and other configurations are optional.

(58) In the configuration provided with the effect operation device 58, the data group processed when displaying the image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 58 is read in advance into the read RAM. When paying attention to the remarkable action and effect that the image can be displayed at an early stage for the operation of the effect operation device 58, the configuration may be essential and other configurations are arbitrary.

When focusing on a configuration other than the configuration in which the NAND flash memory is used as the character ROM 106 as in (53) to (58) above, the type of memory used as the character ROM 106 is arbitrary. For example, EPROM, EEPROM, or the like may be used.

(59) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels as a plurality of orbiters with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, and the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and stopped. A slot that gives the player benefits such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch. The present invention can also be applied to machines. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reel, the present invention is applied to control related to image display in the display control device. Can be applied.

In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that are equipped with a take-in device and start rotating the reel by operating the start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the above are fused.

Here, in a gaming machine in which the lap start and lap stop of a plurality of orbiting bodies are positively operated by the player as described above, even if the result of the internal lottery is a big hit winning result, a big hit is made on the effective line. If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning is not established, the jackpot state will not be established, and the winning result of the jackpot will be carried over to a plurality of game times until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning is established. The cases in which the game is carried over over a plurality of game times are cases in which the player is unable to establish a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot winning, and cases in which the combination of symbols is more than a combination of jackpot symbols. It is conceivable that this will inevitably occur if the program is set so that the winning probability of the lottery winning combination, which will be established with priority, will be high when the winning result is a big hit.

In the above configuration, in a game machine equipped with a display device in addition to the orbiting device, when a big hit result is obtained, a series of effects are executed so as to straddle a plurality of game times on the display screen of the display device. In the case of a jackpot winning result, the attention to the game is increased by the configuration in which the appearance frequency is low in each game until the combination of the jackpot symbols is established.

Further, when applying a configuration using a NAND flash memory as the character ROM or a configuration in which the data transferred from the character ROM to the reading RAM is processed to display an image, the configuration is applied. The configuration is as follows. In other words, when a jackpot winning result is obtained, advance transfer indicating that the jackpot winning result has been obtained from the main control device that performs the internal lottery process and the orbital control of the orbiting body to the display control device that displays and controls the display device The configuration may be such that a command (command information) for a trigger is transmitted. In this case, since the display control device can read in advance the data group for displaying the continuous effect of each game time corresponding to the jackpot winning result from the character ROM to the reading RAM, the data group for each game time can be read in advance. The continuous production can be displayed smoothly.

The command for the advance transfer trigger may be transmitted as information (signal) dedicated to the data advance transfer, and also functions as information for the display control device to recognize that the jackpot winning result has been obtained. It may be transmitted as information (signal) of. Further, in a configuration in which a continuous effect is executed over a plurality of game times at a predetermined timing other than the case where the jackpot winning result is obtained, the data transfer for executing the continuous effect is used for the above-mentioned advance transfer trigger. The configuration related to the command may be applied.

(60) The characteristic configurations of the first to tenth embodiments and the configurations of the other embodiments may be combined with each other in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
The first storage means is a NAND type storage means.
Further, the second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and the speed required for reading the information is faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer means (transfer means) that reads specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. A function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 of the VDP 105, a write control unit 121), and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature A1, since the NAND type storage means is used as the first storage means, it is easy to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR type storage means is used. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means is stored. The configuration is such that specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a NAND type storage means having a relatively slow read speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage means.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature A2. When the first storage means executes the first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and the second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. The second specific information used by the control means is stored in the above.
When the second specific control is executed after the first specific control, the transfer means uses the first specific information stored in the second storage means to perform the first specific control. Described in feature A1, characterized in that, after execution, the second specific information is overwritten in an area including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored in the second storage means. Game machine.

According to the feature A2, since it is not necessary to store the first specific information and the second specific information at the same time in the second storage means, the first specific information and the second specific information are stored at the same time as compared with the first storage means. The storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage means while reducing the cost of the second storage means.

Feature A3. When the first storage means executes the first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and the second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. The second specific information used by the control means and the third specific information used by the control means when executing the third specific control that can be executed after the second specific control are stored in the storage. And
The transfer means uses the first specific information stored in the second storage means to execute or execute the first specific control in the control means, and the first storage means. The second specific information read from the means is stored in an area different from the area in which the first specific information is stored in the second storage means, and is subsequently stored in the second storage means. In a situation where the second specific control is executed or executed by the control means using the specific information, the third specific information read from the first storage means is used in the second storage means. Described in feature A1, which is an area different from the area in which the second specific information is stored and overwrites an area including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored. Game machine.

According to the feature A3, since it is not necessary to store all of the first specific information, the second specific information and the third specific information at the same time in the second storage means, these first specific information, the second specific information and the third specific information are specified. The storage capacity of the second storage means can be made smaller than that of the first storage means that stores information at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage means while reducing the cost of the second storage means.

Further, in the above configuration, when the second specific control is executed after the first specific control and the third specific control is executed after the second specific control, the first specific control is executed. The second specific information is transferred so as not to erase the first specific information in the situation where the second specific information is executed, and the first specific information is stored so as not to erase the second specific information in the situation where the second specific control is executed. The third specific information is transferred so as to overwrite the existing area. As a result, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be suppressed while enabling the advance transfer of each specific information and the execution of each specific control.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the storage capacity of the second storage means is smaller than the storage capacity of the first storage means.

According to the feature A4, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage means while reducing the cost of the second storage means.

Feature A5. The control means can access all the areas of the second storage means at the read timing, and the transfer means can access all the areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing.
The features A1 to A4 characterized in that the read timing and the transfer timing are adjusted so as not to overlap each other (a function of executing a data transfer process in the cache buffer 123 and the write control unit 121). The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A5, the control means can access all the areas of the second storage means at the read timing, and the transfer means can access all the areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing. The degree of freedom increases in the capacity of a group of information that can be stored in the second storage means at one time. Further, when a plurality of types of information are simultaneously stored in the second storage means as in the configuration of the above feature A3, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of the information to be stored at the same time is increased.

Further, in the above configuration, the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap. Therefore, for example, the transfer means overwrites the predetermined information on the area being read by the control means. The occurrence of inconveniences such as forwarding is suppressed.

Instead of the configuration of the feature A5, "adjustment is made so that the timing of reading information from the second storage means by the control means and the timing of transferring information to the second storage means by the transfer means do not overlap. You may apply the configuration of "providing adjustment means to perform". In this case, since the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap, for example, the transfer means overwrites the predetermined information on the area being read by the control means. The occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed.

Feature A6. The adjusting means
The speed required for reading information is faster than the case of reading from the first storage means, and when the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least one of the specific information is used. An intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing the unit before writing to the second storage means, and
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, the storage execution means for storing the specific information in the second storage means (executes the data transfer process in the write control unit 121). Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A5, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A6, when the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the specific information is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then the temporarily stored information is stored in the second. The configuration is such that specific information can be stored in the second storage means based on the transfer to the storage means. According to the configuration, the intermediate storage means can be used in a situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, such as when the control means is accessing the second storage means. At least a part of the specific information can be read out. Then, when the situation is such that the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means, so that the second storage means stores the specific information. be able to. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the transfer of the specific information is completed. The time required can be shortened.

Feature A7. A relay unit (bridge LSI 109) connected to the second storage means via a relay path is provided.
The transfer of the specific information to the second storage means by the transfer means and the reading of the specific information from the second storage means by the control means are performed via the same relay path.
Further, the adjusting means (cache buffer 123, writing) that adjusts so that the timing of reading information from the second storage means by the control means and the timing of transferring information to the second storage means by the transfer means do not overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, which comprises a function of executing data transfer processing in the control unit 121).

According to the feature A7, the number of routes following from the second storage means can be suppressed. Further, even in this case, since the read timing from the second storage means by the control means and the transfer timing from the transfer means to the second storage means are adjusted so as not to overlap, the information of the relay route can be transferred. Well done.

Feature A8. The adjusting means
The speed required for reading information is faster than the case of reading from the first storage means, and when the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least one of the specific information is used. An intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing the unit before writing to the second storage means, and
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, the storage execution means for storing the specific information in the second storage means (executes the data transfer process in the write control unit 121). Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A7, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A8, when the specific information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the specific information is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then the temporarily stored information is stored in the second. The configuration is such that specific information can be stored in the second storage means based on the transfer to the storage means. According to the configuration, the intermediate storage means can be used in a situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, such as when the control means is accessing the second storage means. At least a part of the specific information can be read out. Then, when the situation is such that the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means, so that the second storage means stores the specific information. be able to. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the transfer of the specific information is completed. The time required can be shortened.

Feature A9. The transfer means is mounted on the relay unit, and the control means, the first storage means, and the second storage means are connected to the relay unit via each signal path. Features The gaming machine according to A7 or A8.

According to the feature A9, in a configuration in which both the transfer means and the control means need to access the second storage means, the control means, the first, is provided to the relay unit on which the transfer means is mounted via the respective signal paths. By connecting the storage means and the second storage means, the hardware configuration can be made compact.

Feature A10. It is equipped with a display means (design display device 31) having a display screen.
The control means
A drawing information creating means (a function of executing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105) that creates drawing information using the specific information stored in the second storage means, and
A drawing signal output means (executes drawing signal output processing in the VDP 105) for displaying a specific image on the display screen by outputting a drawing signal to the display means based on the drawing information created by the drawing information creating means. Function to do) and
With
The adjusting means prevents the transfer means from transferring information to the second storage means in a situation where the drawing information is being created by the drawing information creating means, while the drawing signal output. In a situation where the drawing signal is output by the means, a means for permitting the transfer of information to the second storage means by the transfer means (a function of executing the process of step S1005 in the write control unit 121) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A10, the information can be transferred to the second storage means without interfering with the control for creating the drawing information in the control means, and the period during which the control means controls to output the drawing signal. Can be effectively used to transfer information to the second storage means.

Feature A11. The second storage means includes a first information storage means (first bridge side RAM 171) and a second information storage means (second bridge side RAM 172).
In a situation where control by the control means is performed using the information read from one of the first information storage means and the second information storage means, the information by the transfer means to the other storage means Any of the features A1 to A4, which is characterized in that it is provided with a switching means (input / output driver circuit 173) that allows transfer and alternately switches between the storage means to be read and the storage means to be transferred. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A11, the storage means for reading information by the control means and the storage means for transferring information by the transfer means are alternately switched between the first information storage means and the second information storage means. Since the configuration is such that the information can be read out by the control means and the information can be transferred by the transfer means in parallel. Therefore, it is not necessary to wait for the transfer of information by the transfer means after the information is read by the control means, and the progress speed of the control can be increased.

Feature A12. The second storage means (VDP side RAM 108) is used to store the information read from the first storage means and transferred, and the speed required for reading the information is faster than that when reading from the first storage means. It is provided separately from the storage means, and the control means executes a predetermined control using the information stored in the separate storage means.
The transfer means transfers the information read from the first storage means to the second storage means in a situation where the control means is executing the predetermined control using the information stored in the separate storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, which comprises means for performing (a function of executing initial transfer processing, overwriting processing, and restoration processing in VDP105).

According to the feature A12, in a situation where the control means is executing a predetermined control using the information stored in another storage means, the information can be transferred to the second storage means in parallel. Therefore, it is difficult for the situation of waiting for the transfer of information by the transfer means to occur after the information is read by the control means, and the progress speed of the control can be increased.

Feature A13. When the information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the separate storage means, the information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means is transferred to the separate storage means. Features The gaming machine according to A12.

According to the feature A13, in the configuration in which the second storage means and the separate storage means are provided as the transfer destinations of the information stored in the first storage means, it is possible to suppress the number of transfer paths continuing from the first storage means. It becomes.

Feature A14. The first storage means stores arbitrary information (common data group) used by the control means in order to execute arbitrary response control when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
The separate storage means stores the optional information read and transferred from the first storage means, and stores the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or A13, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature A14, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means can be shortened by executing the arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to another storage means. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute arbitrary response control for the occurrence of a specific event. In particular, the arbitrary information transferred to another storage means is stored in the memory when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. Therefore, in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, each specific event Arbitrary response control for occurrence can be performed smoothly.

Further, assuming a configuration in which the optional information is stored in the second storage means, a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, so that the transfer means can respond flexibly to the arbitrary timing. 2 It becomes necessary to transfer specific information to the storage means. On the other hand, since the arbitrary information is stored in another storage means as described above, it is possible to simplify the configuration for transferring the information in the transfer means.

Feature A15. The effect mode determining means (function of executing the variation start process in the main control device 60, the variation start process by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102) for determining a series of modes for the effect to be executed in the notification means (symbol display device 31). Function) and
Anomaly determination means (a function to execute read processing for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred, and
With
The first storage means is the effect information (normal symbol) used by the control means when the notification means executes an effect corresponding to a series of modes determined by the effect mode determining means as the specific information. Data group, each background data group, each notice data group, each reach data group), and the abnormality notification means based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. At least stores the abnormality information (abnormality notification data group) used by the control means when executing the above.
The effect information includes division information (initial division data group, intermediate division data group, final division data group, etc.) corresponding to each of a plurality of continuous production ranges in the series of modes.
The control means
As the specific control, based on the information determined by the effect mode determining means, the effect of the effect range corresponding to each division information is transmitted to the notification means by using each division information previously transferred to the second storage means. Control means for producing (a function of executing game time control processing and jackpot control processing in the display CPU 102) and
As the specific control, the abnormality control means (abnormality notification control processing in the display CPU 102) that controls the notification means to execute the abnormality notification based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. Function to execute) and
When it is determined by the abnormality determining means that an abnormality has occurred in a situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means under the control of the effect control means, the execution of the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality is used. Anomaly notification priority means for executing abnormality notification under the control of the control means (a function of executing processing based on the abnormality notification state being set in step S3103 in the display CPU 102) and
With
The effect control means is a series of cases determined by the effect mode determining means when the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is executed, and after the abnormality notification is completed. Among the embodiments, the effect is restarted from the timing at which the abnormality notification continues for the time elapsed with respect to the interrupted or changed timing.
Even in a situation where the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is executed, the transfer means transfers the divided information according to a series of modes determined by the effect mode determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A14, which is characterized in that the above is performed.

According to the feature A15, when an abnormality occurs in a situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means, the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, the abnormality notification is prioritized over the execution of the effect. be able to. As a result, the manager of the game hall and the like can satisfactorily deal with the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, after the end of the abnormality notification, the production is restarted from the timing when the time that the abnormality notification continues for the interrupted or changed timing, so that the initially set production is executed in conjunction with the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the time from fluctuating. Furthermore, even in a situation where the abnormality notification is executed and the effect is interrupted or changed, the divided information is transferred, so that the effect is satisfactorily resumed after the abnormality notification ends.

Feature A16. The features A1 to A15 are characterized in that the transfer means is provided with a command means (display CPU 102) that gives a transfer instruction of the specific information to the control means and also gives an execution instruction of the specific control to the control means. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A16, the transfer means and the control means are integrated by the command means, so that the transfer timing of the information to the second storage means by the transfer means and the read timing of the information from the second storage means by the control means Can be adjusted well.

Feature A17. The transfer means reads specific information for a control period over a predetermined period from the first storage means, transfers the read specific information to the second storage means, and stores the specific information.
Any of the features A1 to A16, wherein the control means executes the specific control for a control period over a predetermined period by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. The game machine according to 1.

By having the configuration of the above feature A1, it is possible to satisfactorily execute the specific control for the control period over a predetermined period.

Feature A18. Execution of the effect in the effect executing means based on the effect executing means (symbol display device 31), the first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance, and the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (a function of executing a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102, a function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
The first storage means is a NAND type storage means.
Further, the second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and the speed required for reading the information is faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
At a timing before the control for executing the specific effect by the effect executing means is started by the control means, the specific information used for the control is read from the first storage means and used by the second storage means. A transfer means for storing (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121), and
With
The game machine is characterized in that the control means is for causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect by using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature A18, since the NAND type storage means is used as the first storage means, it is easy to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR type storage means is used. Further, at a timing before the control means starts the control to cause the effect executing means to execute a specific effect on the second storage means, which is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage means. Specific information is stored, and the control means causes the effect executing means to execute a specific effect using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the NAND type storage means having a relatively slow read speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific effect can be smoothly executed. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage means.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Further, the configuration limited to any one of the above features A2 to A17 may be applied to the present feature A18. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature A19. The display screen is obtained by using a display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen, a first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance, and information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means for displaying an image (a function of executing a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102, a function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
The first storage means is a NAND type storage means.
Further, the second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and the speed required for reading the information is faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
At a timing before the control for displaying the specific image on the display screen is started by the control means, the specific information used when displaying the specific image is read from the first storage means. A transfer means to be stored in the second storage means (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means is for displaying the specific image on the display screen by using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature A19, since the NAND type storage means is used as the first storage means, it is easy to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR type storage means is used. Further, the speed required for reading the information is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage means. The control for displaying a specific image on the display screen on the second storage means is specified at a timing before the control means starts. The information is stored, and the control means displays a specific image on the display screen using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the NAND type storage means having a relatively slow read speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific image can be displayed smoothly. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the capacity of the first storage means.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Further, the configuration limited to any one of the above features A2 to A17 may be applied to the present feature A19. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Each invention of the feature A group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

As described above, in order to increase the degree of attention to the image, more image data than before is required. Then, as a memory for storing and holding the image data in advance, it becomes necessary to use a memory having a larger capacity than the conventional one. A method using a NAND type memory can be considered as a method for coping with such a large capacity while reducing the cost.

However, the NAND type memory generally has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR type memory and the like. If the data transfer speed becomes slow, it leads to a decrease in the processing speed of image processing, and the image cannot be displayed satisfactorily.

It should be noted that the above problem is also a problem that occurs in order to increase the capacity of the memory that stores data different from the image data.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features A1 to A19, the following features B1 to B11, the following features C1 to C26, the following features D1 to D19, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1 A configuration limited to any one of ~ G19, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
A second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer means (transfer means) that reads specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. A function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 of the VDP 105, a write control unit 121, a cache buffer 123), and
With
The control means executes the specific control by using the specific information stored in the second storage means.
The transfer means
The speed required for reading information is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage means, and when the specific information is stored in the second storage means from the first storage means, at least one of the specific information is stored. An intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) for storing the unit before writing to the second storage means, and
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, the storage execution means for storing the specific information in the second storage means (executes the data transfer process in the write control unit 121). Function to do) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. The control means is configured to execute specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed.

Further, when transferring the specific information from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the specific information is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then the temporarily stored information is stored in the second storage means. The configuration is such that specific information can be stored in the second storage means based on the transfer. According to the configuration, the intermediate storage means cannot transfer information from the first storage means to the second storage means, for example, the control means is in the process of accessing the second storage means. At least a part of the specific information can be read out. Then, when the situation is such that the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means, so that the second storage means stores the specific information. be able to. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the transfer of the specific information is completed. The time required can be shortened.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature B2. The information stored in the intermediate storage means is a part of the specific information.
The transfer means repeatedly transfers information from the first storage means to the intermediate storage means and transfers information transferred to the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, thereby performing the second storage. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the means stores the specific information.

According to the feature B2, the intermediate storage means does not need to store all the specific information at the same time, and may have a storage capacity for sequentially storing a part of the specific information. Therefore, the storage capacity of the intermediate storage means can be reduced as compared with the second storage means. Therefore, the time required to complete the transfer of the specific information can be shortened while reducing the cost of the intermediate storage means.

Further, as compared with the configuration in which all the specific information is transferred to the intermediate storage means and all the transferred specific information is transferred from the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, the information from the second storage means by the control means is transferred. It becomes easy to adjust the read timing and the transfer timing of the information to the second storage means by the transfer means.

Feature B3. The specific information is composed of a plurality of unit information, and the first storage means individually stores the plurality of unit information.
The transfer means reads one unit information out of the plurality of unit information from the first storage means and stores it in the intermediate storage means, and completes the transfer of the one unit information to the second storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the next unit information is read out and stored in the intermediate storage means.

According to the feature B3, since the information is transferred from the intermediate storage means to the second storage means for each unit information, the time required for the transfer is shortened. As a result, the information can be transferred to the second storage means aiming at a slight gap where the control means does not access the second storage means, and the degree of freedom in setting the timing of transferring the information to the second storage means is increased. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the transfer target is each unit information individually stored in the first storage means, it is not necessary to adjust the capacity of the information when transferring the information from the first storage means to the intermediate storage means. .. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration for transferring information to the intermediate storage means.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the storage capacity of the intermediate storage means is smaller than the storage capacity of the second storage means.

According to the feature B4, the time required to complete the transfer of the specific information can be shortened while reducing the cost of the intermediate storage means.

Feature B5. In a situation where the control means reads information from the second storage means, the storage execution means transfers the information stored in the first storage means to the intermediate storage means and controls the control. A feature B1 to B4, characterized in that the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means in a situation where the means does not read the information from the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature B5, the information is transferred to the intermediate storage means by utilizing the situation where the control means reads the information from the second storage means, and the information transferred to the intermediate storage means is the control means. Is transferred to the second storage means by utilizing the situation where the information is not read from the second storage means. As a result, the transfer of information to the second storage means is performed even if the waiting time for waiting for the transfer of information from the first storage means to the second storage means is not set in the control of the control means. It can be performed.

Feature B6. It is equipped with a display means (design display device 31) having a display screen.
The control means
A drawing information creating means (a function of executing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105) that creates drawing information using the specific information stored in the second storage means, and
A drawing signal output means (executes drawing signal output processing in the VDP 105) for displaying a specific image on the display screen by outputting a drawing signal to the display means based on the drawing information created by the drawing information creating means. Function to do) and
With
In a situation where the drawing information is created by the drawing information creating means, the storage executing means transfers the information stored in the first storage means to the intermediate storage means and outputs the drawing signal. Any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means in a situation where the drawing signal is output by the means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature B6, the information can be transferred to the second storage means without interfering with the control for creating the drawing information in the control means, and the period during which the control means controls to output the drawing signal. Can be effectively used to transfer information to the second storage means.

Feature B7. Separately from the second storage means, the information read from the first storage means is stored, and the speed required for reading the information is faster than that when reading from the first storage means (VDP side). RAM108) is provided, and the control means executes a predetermined control using the information stored in the separate storage means.
In a situation where the control means reads information from the second storage means, the storage execution means transfers the information stored in the first storage means to the intermediate storage means and controls the control. Any of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means in a situation where the means reads information from the other storage means. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature B7, the information is transferred to the intermediate storage means by utilizing the situation where the control means reads the information from the second storage means, and the information transferred to the intermediate storage means is the control means. Is transferred to the second storage means by utilizing the situation where the information is read from another storage means. As a result, the transfer of information to the second storage means is performed even if the waiting time for waiting for the transfer of information from the first storage means to the second storage means is not set in the control of the control means. It can be performed.

Feature B8. When the information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the separate storage means, the information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means is transferred to the separate storage means. Features The gaming machine according to B7.

According to the feature B8, in the configuration in which the second storage means and the separate storage means are provided as the transfer destinations of the information stored in the first storage means, it is possible to suppress the number of transfer paths continuing from the first storage means. It becomes.

Feature B9. The first storage means stores arbitrary information (common data group) used by the control means in order to execute arbitrary response control when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
The separate storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and stores the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. The gaming machine according to feature B7 or B8, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature B9, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means can be shortened by executing the arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to another storage means. , Arbitrary response control for the occurrence of a specific event can be smoothly executed. In particular, the arbitrary information transferred to another storage means is stored in the memory when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. Therefore, in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, each specific event Arbitrary response control for occurrence can be performed smoothly.

Further, assuming a configuration in which the optional information is stored in the second storage means, a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, so that the transfer means can respond flexibly to the arbitrary timing. 2 It becomes necessary to transfer specific information to the storage means. On the other hand, since the arbitrary information is stored in another storage means as described above, it is possible to simplify the configuration for transferring the information in the transfer means.

Feature B10. The control means is accessible to all areas of the second storage means at the read timing, and the transfer means is accessible to all areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the feature B10, the control means can access all the areas of the second storage means at the read timing, and the transfer means can access all the areas of the second storage means at the transfer timing. The degree of freedom increases in the capacity of a group of information that can be stored in the second storage means at one time. Further, for example, when a plurality of types of mutually partitioned information are simultaneously stored in the second storage means, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of the information to be stored at the same time is increased.

Further, since the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided, by using the intermediate storage means, the read timing by the control means is suppressed while suppressing the time for the control means to wait for the control until the transfer of the information to the second storage means is completed. And the transfer timing by the transfer means can be adjusted so as not to overlap.

Feature B11. A relay unit (bridge LSI 109) connected to the second storage means via a relay path is provided.
It is characterized in that the transfer of the specific information to the second storage means by the transfer means and the reading of the specific information from the second storage means by the control means are performed via the same relay path. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

According to the feature B11, the number of routes following from the second storage means can be suppressed. Further, even in this case, since the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided, by using the intermediate storage means, the time for the control means to wait for control until the transfer of information to the second storage means is completed can be suppressed. However, it is possible to adjust so that the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means do not overlap.

Each invention of the feature B group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in memory selection is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the higher the processing speed, the higher the cost.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features B1 to B11, the above features A1 to A19, the following features C1 to C26, the following features D1 to D19, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1 A configuration limited to any one of ~ G19, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
The first storage means stores arbitrary information (common data group) used for executing arbitrary response control in the control means when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
A transfer means (in VDP 105) for storing arbitrary information read from the first storage means in a second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) whose speed required for reading information is faster than when reading from the first storage means. It has a function to transfer a data group to the VDP side RAM 108, a write control unit 121, and a cache buffer 123).
The second storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and stores the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. And
The game machine is characterized in that, when the specific event occurs, the control means executes the arbitrary response control using the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature C1, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means can be shortened by executing the arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute arbitrary response control for the occurrence of a specific event. In particular, the arbitrary information transferred to the second storage means is stored in memory when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues, so that each specific event occurs in a configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to shorten the time until the arbitrary response control for the occurrence of is started.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature C2. The transfer means according to the feature C1, wherein the transfer means reads out the optional information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means before the specific event can occur. Game machine.

According to the feature C2, since the arbitrary information is transferred and stored in the second storage means in the situation where the specific event can occur, even if the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, the occurrence of each specific event is dealt with. It is possible to shorten the time until the arbitrary response control is executed.

Feature C3. The configuration is such that the specific event can occur after the start period has elapsed since the power supply was started.
The transfer means is characterized in that the optional information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means from the start of the power supply to the elapse of the start time period. The gaming machine according to the feature C2.

According to the feature C3, since the arbitrary information is transferred to the second storage means from the start of the power supply to the elapse of the start time period, the optional information is stored in the second storage in a situation where a specific event can occur. It will be remembered in the means.

In "power supply start", in a configuration provided with a supply unit that receives operating power from a commercial power source and supplies operating power to the electrical equipment of the game machine, the supply of operating power from the supply unit is started. Includes the configuration. This also applies to the following.

Feature C4. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen is provided, and the control means displays the display screen by using arbitrary information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Arbitrary correspondence control for displaying an arbitrary correspondence image is performed.
Further, it is characterized by being provided with a start-corresponding control means (a function of executing main processing in the display CPU 102) for displaying a start-corresponding image on a display screen until at least the start time period elapses after the power supply is started. The gaming machine according to the feature C3.

According to the feature C4, in the situation where the transfer of the optional information to the second storage means is not completed and the optional corresponding image by using the optional information cannot be displayed on the display screen, the display screen is displayed. The initial corresponding image will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that it is not possible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal after the start of power supply until the arbitrary corresponding image is displayed.

Feature C5. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen and display control by the control means is provided.
The first storage means further stores the start correspondence information which is necessary when the display means displays the start correspondence image and the capacity of the information is smaller than the arbitrary information.
When the power supply is started, the transfer means reads the initial correspondence information from the first storage means, stores it in the second storage means, and then reads the optional information from the first storage means. The information used when the second storage means is stored and another image is displayed after the initial corresponding image is displayed is an area different from the area in which the optional information is stored. It is stored in an area including at least a part of the area where the initial correspondence information is stored.
The control means
Arbitrary correspondence control means (in the display CPU 102) that performs arbitrary correspondence control for displaying an arbitrary correspondence image on the display screen by using the arbitrary correspondence information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Function to execute fluctuation start processing by normal symbol, etc.) and
By using the start correspondence information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the display screen can be started until at least the start time period elapses after the power supply is started. Start-corresponding control means for displaying an image (a function for executing main processing in the display CPU 102) and
The gaming machine according to the feature C3, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature C5, in the situation where the transfer of the optional information to the second storage means is not completed and the optional corresponding image by using the optional information cannot be displayed on the display screen, the display screen is displayed. The initial corresponding image will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that it is not possible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal after the start of power supply until the arbitrary corresponding image is displayed.

In addition, since the initial correspondence information for displaying the initial correspondence image has a smaller amount of information than the optional information, the transfer of the optional information is completed even if the initial correspondence information is transferred prior to the transfer of the optional information. The time to do it will not be extremely slow. Furthermore, since the initial correspondence information is stored in the change storage means in the arbitrary storage means, the above effect can be obtained while suppressing the storage capacity of the arbitrary storage means.

Feature C6. The first storage means includes first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control, and second specific information used by the control means when executing the second specific control. , I remember more,
When the control means executes any of the first to second specific controls, the control means corresponds to the first to second specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The specific control is executed using the information provided.
When the second specific control is executed after the first specific control is executed, the transfer means transfers the first specific information read from the first storage means to the arbitrary in the second storage means. The second specific information is stored in an area different from the area in which the information is stored, and after the first specific control is executed, the arbitrary information in the second storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is a region different from the region and overwrites an region including at least a part of the region in which the first specific information is stored. ..

According to the feature C6, since it is prevented that the arbitrary information is erased when the first specific control or the second specific control is executed, the first specific control or the second specific control is executed. Even if a specific event occurs in a certain situation, it is possible to execute arbitrary response control for it. On the other hand, since it is not necessary to store the first specific information and the second specific information at the same time in the second storage means, the storage of the second storage means is compared with the configuration in which the first specific information and the second specific information are stored at the same time. The capacity can be reduced.

Feature C7. When the first storage means executes the first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and the second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. The second specific information used by the control means and the third specific information used by the control means when executing the third specific control that can be executed after the second specific control are stored in the storage. And
When the control means executes any of the first to third specific controls, the control means corresponds to the first to third specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The specific control is executed using the information provided.
When the first to third specific controls are sequentially executed, the transfer means stores the first specific information read from the first storage means and the optional information in the second storage means. In a situation where the first specific control is executed or is being executed by the control means by storing in an area different from the area and further using the first specific information stored in the second storage means. The second specific information is stored in an area different from the area in which the optional information and the first specific information are stored in the second storage means, and is subsequently stored in the second storage means. In a situation where the second specific control is executed or executed by the control means using the second specific information, the third specific information is stored in the optional information in the second storage means. 1. The area according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is different from the area in which the first specific information is stored and overwrites an area including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored. Game machine.

According to the feature C7, since it is prevented that the arbitrary information is deleted when the first to third specific controls are executed, the specific event occurs in the situation where the first to third specific controls are executed. Even if it occurs, it is possible to execute arbitrary response control for it. On the other hand, since it is not necessary to simultaneously store the first specific information, the second specific information, and the third specific information in the second storage means, the first specific information, the second specific information, and the third specific information are simultaneously stored. The storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced as compared with the configuration.

Feature C8. It is provided with a notification means (symbol display device 31) and an abnormality determination means (a function of executing a reading process for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality that is the specific event has occurred. ,
The optional information includes the abnormality information used by the control means when the notification means executes the abnormality notification based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

According to the feature C8, the time required for reading the abnormality information in the control means is shortened by executing the control for abnormality notification using the abnormality information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. It is possible to smoothly execute the abnormality notification. In particular, the abnormality information transferred to the second storage means is stored and retained when the situation in which the abnormality can occur continues. Therefore, in a configuration in which the abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, the occurrence of each abnormality is dealt with. It is possible to shorten the time until the abnormality notification is started.

Feature C9. The first abnormality and the second abnormality are set as the above-mentioned abnormality.
The abnormality determination means determines whether or not the first abnormality has occurred, and also determines whether or not the second abnormality has occurred.
The first storage means uses common notification information (initially) used by the control means when the notification means executes common notification common to both the first abnormality and the second abnormality as the abnormality information. (Data group for notification) is stored, and the control is performed when the notification means executes type correspondence notification corresponding to each of the first abnormality and the second abnormality separately from the optional information. The first type correspondence information (abnormal type data group) and the second type correspondence information (abnormal type data group) used by the means are stored.
The control means
Regardless of whether the first abnormality determining means determines that the first abnormality has occurred or the second abnormality determining means has determined that the second abnormality has occurred. A function of executing the process of step S3404 in the display CPU 102, which causes the notification means to perform the common notification using the common notification information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. )When,
When it is determined by the first abnormality determining means that the first abnormality has occurred, and after the common notification is started, it is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. While the notification means is made to perform the type correspondence notification by using the first type correspondence information, the common notification is performed when the second abnormality determination means determines that the second abnormality has occurred. After being started, the type abnormality notification control means (display CPU 102) that causes the notification means to perform the type correspondence notification using the second type correspondence information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. (Function to execute the process of step S3412 in) and
Is equipped with
Further, the transfer means reads the type correspondence information corresponding to the abnormality determined to occur this time from the first storage means in the situation where the common notification is executed by the notification means, and causes the second storage means. The gaming machine according to feature C8, which comprises a type-corresponding transfer means (a function of executing the process of step S3406 in the display CPU 102) to be stored.

According to the feature C9, since the common notification information is stored in the second storage means as optional information, even if the first abnormality or the second abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, the common notification is immediately executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall and the like can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred. In addition, after the common notification is executed, the type correspondence notification is executed for the side related to the occurrence of the first abnormality and the second abnormality, so that the manager of the game hall recognizes the type of abnormality. Can be done.

In particular, since the type correspondence information corresponding to the type correspondence notification is configured to be transferred to the second storage means in the situation where the common notification is being executed, only the common notification information among the common notification information and the correspondence information for each type is optional. It may be stored in the second storage means as information for use. Therefore, the above effect can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity to be secured for the arbitrary information in the second storage means.

Feature C10. The notification means is provided with effect mode determining means (a function of executing the variation start process in the main control device 60, a function of executing the variation start process by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102) for determining a series of modes for the effect to be executed in the notification means.
In addition to the optional information, the first storage means is used by the control means when the notification means executes an effect corresponding to a series of modes determined by the effect mode determining means. (Normal symbol data group, each background data group, each notice data group, each reach data group) is stored.
The effect information includes division information (initial division data group, intermediate division data group, final division data group, etc.) corresponding to each of a plurality of continuous production ranges in the series of modes.
The control means
Based on the information determined by the effect mode determining means, the notification means controls to execute the effect of the effect range corresponding to each divided information by using each divided information previously transferred to the second storage means. Control means for effect (function of executing game time control process and jackpot control process in display CPU 102) and
Based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means, the notification means controls to execute the abnormality notification using the abnormality information previously transferred to the second storage means. Anomaly control means to be executed (a function to execute anomaly notification control processing in the display CPU 102) and
When it is determined by the abnormality determining means that an abnormality has occurred in a situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means under the control of the effect control means, the execution of the effect is interrupted or changed to perform the abnormality. Anomaly notification priority means (a function of executing processing based on the abnormality notification state being set in step S3103 in the display CPU 102) and
With
The effect control means is a series of cases determined by the effect mode determining means when the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is executed, and after the abnormality notification is completed. Among the embodiments, the effect is restarted from the timing at which the abnormality notification continues for the time elapsed with respect to the interrupted or changed timing.
Further, even in a situation where the effect is interrupted or changed by the abnormality notification priority means and the abnormality notification is executed, the transfer means can be divided according to a series of modes determined by the effect mode determining means. The gaming machine according to feature C8 or C9, which is characterized in that it performs transfer.

According to the feature C10, when an abnormality occurs in a situation where the effect is being executed by the notification means, the effect is interrupted or changed and the abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, the abnormality notification is prioritized over the execution of the effect. be able to. As a result, the manager of the game hall and the like can satisfactorily deal with the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, after the end of the abnormality notification, the interrupted or changed effect is restarted from the timing when the time for which the abnormality notification continues with respect to the interrupted or changed timing, so that the effect is initially linked to the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the time from the start to the end of the set effect to fluctuate. Furthermore, even in a situation where the abnormality notification is executed and the effect is interrupted or changed, the divided information about the effect is transferred according to the transfer timing, so that the effect can be restarted well after the abnormality notification ends. Can be done.

Feature C11. The effect executing means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means uses the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means based on the occurrence of the specific event. A specific series of effects are executed by the effect execution means.
The optional information is characterized in that it includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when starting the specific series of effects. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C10.

According to the feature C11, the time required for the control means to read the start effect information is shortened by starting a specific series of effects using the start effect information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. It is possible to smoothly start a specific series of effects for the occurrence of a specific event. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and retained when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. Therefore, in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, each specific event occurs. It is possible to smoothly start a specific series of effects for the occurrence of.

Feature C12. At least a first series of effects and a second series of effects are set as the specific series of effects that are started based on the occurrence of the specific event.
Regardless of whether the control means executes either the first series of effects or the second series of effects, the start effect that has already been transferred to and stored in the second storage means at the start of the first series of effects. The gaming machine according to feature C11, characterized in that the production is started using information.

According to the feature C12, regardless of whether the first series of effects or the second series of effects is executed, it is possible to shorten the time from the occurrence of a specific event to the start of the series of effects. it can.

Feature C13. As the specific series of effects, an additional effect mode in which the effect of the additional effect range is executed after the start effect range executed by using the start effect information is set.
The first storage means stores additional correspondence information (each advance notice data group, each reach data group) used by the control means when the effect of the additional effect range is executed by the effect execution means. Ori
When the effect of the additional effect mode is executed, the transfer means is in a situation where the start effect is being executed, and the additional response read from the first storage means by the time the start effect is completed. The gaming machine according to feature C11 or C12, wherein the information is stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature C13, even when the effect of the additional effect range is executed after the effect of the start effect range is executed, the additional effect is executed by using the additional correspondence information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the time required for reading the additional correspondence information in the control means can be shortened, and the effect of the additional effect range can be smoothly executed after the start effect. In particular, since the additional response information is configured to be transferred to the second storage means in the situation where the effect of the start effect range is being executed, only the start effect information among the start effect information and the additional response information is used as optional information. 2 It may be stored in the storage means. Therefore, the above effect can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity to be secured for the arbitrary information in the second storage means.

Feature C14. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
With
The control means starts the specific series of effects, assuming that the specific event occurs prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. The present invention is described in any one of features C11 to C13, characterized in that the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is used and the effect execution means is controlled so that the specific series of effects is terminated. Game machine.

With respect to the effect executed when the determination result of the grant determination means is notified, the effect according to any of the above features C11 to C13 can be exerted.

Feature C15. A display means having a display screen (design display device 31) and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
With
The control means usually displays a variation of the pattern on the assumption that the specific event has occurred prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means is used for the normal display control for starting and ending the variation display of the normal pattern as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. It is provided with a normal display control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol and the fluctuation processing by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102) performed on the display means by using the display means.
The optional information includes start variation display information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the normal display control means when starting the variation display of the normal pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10.

According to the feature C15, the variation display of the normal pattern is started by using the start variation display information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the variation of the normal pattern is changed from the establishment of the variation start condition. The time until the display is started can be shortened. In particular, the start variation display information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where the grant determination can be performed. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time until the variation display of the normal pattern is started for the occurrence of each grant determination in the configuration in which the grant determination occurs at an arbitrary timing.

Feature C16. At least a first display mode and a second display mode are set as a series of display modes from the start to the end in the variable display of the normal pattern.
The normal display control means is already transferred to and stored in the second storage means at the start of either of the first display mode and the second display mode. The gaming machine according to feature C15, wherein the variable display of a normal pattern is started by using the start variable display information.

According to the feature C16, regardless of which of the first display mode and the second display mode is executed, the time from the occurrence of the specific event to the start of the variable display of the normal pattern can be shortened. Can be planned.

Feature C17. As a display mode of the variation display of the normal pattern, an additional effect mode in which an additional effect is executed after the start variation display displayed by using the start variation display information is set.
The first storage means stores additional correspondence information (each advance notice data group, each reach data group) used by the normal display control means when the additional effect is displayed on the display screen. ,
The transfer means is the first storage means by the time the start variation display is completed in the situation where the start variation display is performed when the variation display of the normal pattern is performed in the additional effect mode. The additional correspondence information read from the above is stored in the second storage means.
The normal display control means uses the additional correspondence information stored in the second storage means after the start variation display is performed when the variation display of the normal pattern is performed in the additional effect mode. The gaming machine according to feature C15 or C16, wherein the additional effect is executed.

According to the feature C17, even when the additional effect is executed after the start variation display is executed, the additional effect is executed using the additional correspondence information stored in the second storage means, so that the additional effect is executed. The control time required for the progress of the above is shortened. In particular, since the additional response information is configured to be transferred to the second storage means in the situation where the start variation display is being executed, only the start variation display information among the start variation display information and the additional response information is used as optional information. 2 It may be stored in the storage means. Therefore, the above effect can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity to be secured for the arbitrary information in the second storage means.

Feature C18. The first storage means stores simple information (simple symbol data group) set to have a storage capacity smaller than that of the start variation display information.
When transferring the start variation display information, the transfer means reads the simple information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means (write control) before the start variation display information. It has a function to execute the initial setting process of the regular data group in the unit 121).
When the specific event occurs in a situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored, the control means stores the start variation display information in the second storage means. By using the simple information provided, a simple display control means for displaying a simple display on the display screen for the player to recognize that the execution of the grant determination is not invalidated (based on a simple symbol on the display CPU 102). The gaming machine according to any one of features C15 to C17, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing fluctuation start processing and processing during fluctuation by a simple symbol).

When a situation occurs in which the display means cannot normally display the variation of the pattern, such as the transfer of the start variation display information is not in time for the occurrence of the grant determination, the determination condition is satisfied even though the determination condition is satisfied. There is a concern that the player may be confused that the establishment of the above has been invalidated. On the other hand, according to the feature C18, since the simple display is performed, the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in the situation where the fluctuation display of the normal pattern cannot be performed even though the determination condition is satisfied. The player will recognize that. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the display means cannot normally perform variable display of the pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the judgment condition may have been invalidated. ..

In addition, since the simple information used for the simple display has a smaller storage capacity than the start fluctuation display information, it is possible to shorten the time until the transfer of the simple display is completed, and the start fluctuation display can be shortened. Even if the simple information is transferred before the information, it is possible to prevent the transfer of the start variation display information from being completed extremely late.

Feature C19. In the simple display control means, the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means in a situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored. The variation display of the simple pattern is started prior to or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the variation display of the simple pattern ends as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to feature C18, wherein the simple display to be displayed is displayed on the display screen by using the simple information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature C19, since the simple pattern variation display is performed as a simple display, the variation display corresponding to the grant determination is displayed on the display screen even in a situation where the player cannot normally perform the variation display of the pattern. It becomes easier to recognize that it is being performed, and it becomes possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature C20. It is provided with a display time determining means (a function of executing the variation start processing in the main control device 60) for determining the variation display time of the variation display of the normal pattern.
The gaming machine according to feature C18 or C19, wherein the simple display control means continues the simple display until the variable display time determined by the display time determining means elapses.

According to the feature C20, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of each game based on the grant determination from fluctuating according to the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed. Further, for example, even if a plurality of control entities are provided, one control entity is provided with display time determination means, and the other control entity is provided with control means, the variable display time determined by one control entity is also provided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the time of the production for the game round executed by the other control subject does not match.

Feature C21. When the transfer of the start variation display information is completed in the situation where the simple display is performed, the simple display is completed after the simple display is completed without switching to the variation display by the normal pattern during the simple display. The game according to any one of features C18 to C20, which comprises a switching means (a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the display CPU 102) for switching to a state capable of performing variable display by a normal pattern. Machine.

According to the feature C21, even if the transfer of the start variation display information is completed in the situation where the simple display is performed, it is not necessary to switch to the variation display by the normal pattern, so that the processing becomes complicated.

Feature C22. The reception means (production operation device 58) for receiving the specific operation is provided, and the specific event is that the specific operation is received by the reception means.
The optional information includes operation correspondence information (each background data group, operation system data group) used by the control means to execute operation correspondence control when the specific operation is received by the reception means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C21, characterized in that

According to the feature C22, the operation correspondence control corresponding to the specific operation is executed by using the operation correspondence information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the operation correspondence information in the control means can be read out. The time required can be shortened, and operation response control can be smoothly executed. In particular, the operation correspondence information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where the specific operation can occur even after the operation correspondence control is once executed, so that the specific operation can be performed. In a configuration that occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to shorten the time until the operation response control for the occurrence of each specific operation is started.

Feature C23. The optional information includes the first optional information used by the control means for executing the first arbitrary response control based on the occurrence of the first specific event, and the first specific event may occur. The second voluntary information used by the control means to execute the second voluntary response control based on the occurrence of the second specific event that may occur in the situation is included.
The transfer means transfers the first voluntary information and the second voluntary information to the second storage means according to a predetermined priority order when the transfer conditions of the predetermined arbitrary information are satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C22.

According to the feature C23, since the first voluntary information and the second voluntary information are transferred in advance according to the priority, the transfer of the high priority voluntary information can be completed at an early stage.

Feature C24. It is provided with a notification means (symbol display device 31) and an abnormality determination means (a function of executing a reading process for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred.
In the optional information, it is determined by the abnormality determining means that an abnormality has occurred as the information in which the transfer priority is set first among the first optional information and the second optional information. The gaming machine according to feature C23, which includes abnormality information (abnormality notification data group) used by the control means when the notification means executes abnormality notification based on the above.

According to the feature C24, since the priority of the abnormality information is set high, it is possible to make an early transition to a state in which the abnormality notification can be performed.

Feature C25. The second storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and even after the arbitrary correspondence control is executed by the control means using the optional information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C24, which stores and retains the optional information in a situation where the specific event can occur.

According to the feature C25, since it is not necessary to read the arbitrary information every time a specific event that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs, the time until the arbitrary response control is started for the occurrence of the specific event is shortened. Can be achieved.

Feature C26. When the optional information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, even in a situation where a specific event corresponding to the optional information does not occur, the other predetermined information is the first. 2. Any of the features C1 to C25, which is not erased at the time of transfer to the storage means, and is stored in the second storage means until a predetermined erasure condition is satisfied. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature C26, even if a specific event does not occur, the arbitrary information is stored in the second storage means without being erased, so that the frequency of repeating the deletion and retransfer of the arbitrary information is high. It will be reduced.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in memory selection is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the higher the processing speed, the higher the cost.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features C1 to C26, the above features A1 to A19, the above features B1 to B11, the following features D1 to D19, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1 A configuration limited to any one of ~ G19, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
The first storage means stores arbitrary information (common data group) used for executing arbitrary response control in the control means when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
A transfer means (in VDP 105) for storing arbitrary information read from the first storage means in a second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) whose speed required for reading information is faster than when reading from the first storage means. It has a function to transfer a data group to the VDP side RAM 108, a write control unit 121, and a cache buffer 123).
The second storage means stores and retains the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues after the optional information is transferred.
When the specific event occurs, the control means executes the arbitrary response control using the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means.
Further, the specific information used when the control means executes a specific control different from the arbitrary correspondence control is read from the first storage means, and the optional information of the second storage means is stored. A gaming machine characterized by having an overwriting means (a function of executing an overwriting process in the VDP 105) for overwriting an area including at least a part of the area.

According to the feature D1, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means can be shortened by executing the specific control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. , Arbitrary response control can be smoothly executed for the occurrence of a specific event. In particular, the arbitrary information transferred to the second storage means is stored in memory when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. Therefore, in the configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, each specific event occurs. It is not necessary to transfer the specific information to the second storage means every time the occurrence of the occurrence of the occurrence of the occurrence of the occurrence of the specific event, and the time until the arbitrary response control is started for the occurrence of each specific event can be shortened.

Further, the specific information used when executing the specific control different from the arbitrary correspondence control is read from the first storage means and overwritten on the area in which the arbitrary information is stored in the second storage means. Sometimes. As a result, specific information is stored instead of optional information as needed. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the arbitrary information is always stored in the second storage means, the area of the second storage means can be effectively utilized, and the storage capacity required for the second storage means can be suppressed as described above. It can produce excellent effects.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature D2. The overwriting means overwrites the specific information on an area including at least a part of an area in which the arbitrary information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the second storage means in a situation where the specific event does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature D2, since the arbitrary information corresponding to the specific event is to be deleted in the situation where the specific event does not occur, the action and effect of the feature D1 can be exhibited without disturbing the arbitrary response control. ..

Feature D3. Equipped with an abnormality determining means (a function of executing a reading process for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred.
The optional information includes abnormality information (for abnormality notification) used by the control means when the notification means executes abnormality notification based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. Data group) and information different from the information for the abnormality are included.
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the abnormality information is excluded from the overwriting target by the overwriting means.

According to the feature D3, the time required for reading the abnormality information in the control means is shortened by executing the control for abnormality notification using the abnormality information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. It is possible to smoothly execute the abnormality notification.

In particular, the abnormality information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where an abnormality can occur even after the abnormality notification is once executed. Furthermore, the abnormal information is not erased even when the specific information is transferred to the second storage means. As a result, in a configuration in which an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to smoothly execute the abnormality notification for the occurrence of each abnormality.

Feature D4. Restoring means (execution of restoration processing in VDP105) for restoring the arbitrary information erased by overwriting of the overwriting means to the second storage means until a specific event corresponding to the arbitrary information can occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature D4, the arbitrary information to be erased when the specific information is stored is returned to the second storage means before the specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. , It is possible to exert the action and effect of the above-mentioned feature D1 without disturbing the arbitrary correspondence control.

Feature D5. The optional information to be overwritten by the overwriting means includes the first optional information and the second optional information.
When the first voluntary information and the second voluntary information erased by the overwriting of the overwriting means are returned to the second storage means, the returning means first voluntarily uses them according to a predetermined priority. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the information and the second voluntary information are restored.

According to the feature D5, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of optional information are deleted when the specific information is overwritten, the optional information having a higher priority is restored. As a result, the arbitrary information can be sequentially restored according to the frequency of occurrence of the corresponding specific event, the importance of executing the arbitrary response control, and the like.

Feature D6. The control means includes the effect executing means, and the control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means.
The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when a series of effects are started by the effect execution means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the overwriting target by the overwriting means includes the start effect information.

According to the feature D6, by starting a series of effects using the start effect information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the time required for reading the start effect information in the control means can be shortened. It is possible to smoothly start a series of productions. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a new series of effects can occur even after the series of effects has been started. As a result, even if the series of effects is started at an arbitrary timing, the series of effects can be smoothly started at each start timing.

Further, when the specific information is transferred to the second storage means, the start effect information is followed by the start effect information by overwriting the area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored. The area of the second storage means can be effectively utilized in a situation where the effect is not used.

As the effect executing means, a display means having a display screen is provided, and the control means displays an image on the display screen by using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The configuration related to overwriting of the feature D6 may be applied to the configuration for displaying.

Feature D7. The start effect information is information commonly used when starting in a series of a plurality of types of effects.
The specific information is the control means when the effect executing means executes an effect of an additional effect range that may be executed at a timing later than the start effect range executed by using the start effect information. The gaming machine according to feature D6, which is information corresponding to additional effects (data group for each notice, data group for each reach) used by the user.

According to the feature D7, in the configuration in which the start effect information is not used when the effect of the additional effect range is executed, the start effect information is stored when the additional effect corresponding information is stored in the second storage means in advance. By overwriting the additional effect corresponding information in the area including at least a part of the existing area, the area of the second storage means can be effectively utilized.

Feature D8. In a series of effects including the additional effect range, the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed after the effect of the start effect range is executed, and then the effect of the additional effect range is set to be performed.
The first storage means stores intermediate correspondence information used by the control means when the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed, and the control means uses the effect of the intermediate effect range as the effect execution means. When the information is executed, the intermediate correspondence information read from the first storage means and stored in advance in the second storage means is used.
The overwriting means is an area different from the area in which the intermediate correspondence information in the second storage means is stored in the situation where the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed or executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the additional effect corresponding information is overwritten in an area including at least a part of an area in which the start effect information is stored.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to effectively utilize the area of the second storage means while ensuring that the effect of the start effect range and the effect of the intermediate effect range are satisfactorily executed.

Feature D9. A return means (a function of executing an overwrite process in the VDP 105) for returning the start effect information erased by the overwrite means to the second storage means by the time a series of effects including the additional effect range is completed is provided. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature D9, the start effect information to be erased when the additional effect corresponding information is stored is returned to the second storage means by the end of the series of effects including the additional effect range, so that the next time. It is possible to effectively utilize the area of the second storage means without hindering the start of the production of.

Feature D10. In the additional effect range, a long effect range (super reach B display) and a short effect range (super reach A display) in which the time required from the start to the end are relatively long and short are set, and the long effect range is set. The long-corresponding information (data group for Super Reach B) corresponding to is larger in the amount of information than the short-corresponding information (data group for Super Reach A) corresponding to the short effect range.
The overwriting means targets the start effect information when a series of effects including the long effect range is executed, while the overwriting means starts the start when a series of effects including the short effect range is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D9, which is characterized in that the production information is not overwritten.

According to the feature D10, when the effect of the long effect range is executed, the second storage is performed by overwriting the long correspondence information for the area including at least a part of the area where the start effect information is stored. It is possible to perform an effect in a long effect range while suppressing the storage capacity required for the means. On the other hand, when the effect of the short effect range is executed, the start effect information is overwritten and restored for a relatively short time by not overwriting the short correspondence information in the area of the start effect information. It is possible to prevent the situation to occur.

Feature D11. An effect executing means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means causes the effect executing means to execute an effect using information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Yes,
The series of effects executed by the effect executing means includes a long effect range (super reach B display) and a short effect range (super reach A display) in which the time required from the start to the end is relatively long and short. Is set,
The overwriting means overwrites the area in which the optional information is stored when the effect of the long effect range is executed, while the overwriting means executes the effect of the short effect range. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that the area in which arbitrary information is stored is not overwritten.

According to the feature D11, when the effect of the long effect range is executed, the effect of the long effect range is executed while suppressing the storage capacity required in the second storage means by overwriting the arbitrary information. be able to. On the other hand, when the effect of the short effect range is executed, by preventing the optional information from being overwritten, a situation occurs in which the optional information is overwritten or restored in a relatively short time. Can be avoided.

Feature D12. A display means having a display screen (design display device 31) and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
With
The control means starts the variation display of the pattern prior to the grant determination by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and determines the grant determination means. By using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the game rotation effect that sets the stop result corresponding to the result and causes the variable display of the pattern to end is used. It is to be displayed on the display means,
The specific information is information used by the control means when displaying a specific reach display that can be executed in the middle of the variable display of the pattern on the display screen.
The overwriting means reads the specific information from the first storage means and displays the optional information of the second storage means when the variable display of the pattern in which the specific reach display is executed is performed on the way. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, wherein the area including at least a part of the stored area is overwritten.

According to the feature D12, when the information for executing the specific reach display is transferred to the second storage means, the second storage means by effectively utilizing the area of the second storage means by targeting the arbitrary information as an erasure target. It is possible to perform reach display with a large amount of information while reducing the storage capacity required for the means.

Feature D13. An effect executing means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means causes the effect executing means to execute an effect using information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. Yes,
The series of effects executed by the effect executing means includes a branch mode in which the process progresses to one of a plurality of branch effect ranges according to the progress of the effect up to the middle.
The first storage means sets branch correspondence information (first operation system data group, second operation system data group) used by the control means when starting the production of each branch effect range. When the effect of each branch effect range is executed by the effect execution means, the control means is read from the first storage means and stored in advance in the second storage means. It is a configuration that uses each of the above-mentioned branch correspondence information.
When the effect of the branch mode is executed, the overwriting means reads the branch correspondence information from the first storage means and stores the second storage before branching to any one of the branch effect ranges. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, characterized in that the area including at least a part of the area in which the optional information in the means is stored is overwritten.

According to the feature D13, the production progresses to one of the plurality of branching production ranges according to the progress of the production halfway, so that the production can be diversified. In this case, since each branch correspondence information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance by the time the branch is performed to any of the branch effect ranges, the process proceeds to which branch effect range. Even so, it is possible to smoothly proceed from the branch timing to the subsequent production range.

Further, when each branch correspondence information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance, the second storage is configured so that the area including at least a part of the area in which the arbitrary information is stored is overwritten. The means does not have to have a storage capacity sufficient to store all of the optional information and each branch correspondence information at the same time. As a result, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while suppressing the storage capacity required for the second storage means.

Feature D14. The overwriting means is set in an area including at least a part of the area in which the branch correspondence information corresponding to the branch effect range not selected as the progress destination among the branch correspondence information stored in the second storage means is stored. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature D13, wherein the effect of the branch effect range selected as the progress destination is executed, and other information is overwritten.

According to the feature D14, the area in which the branch correspondence information corresponding to the branch effect range not selected as the progress destination is stored is the area in which the information used by the control means is stored when the effect generated after the branch is executed. Can be used as. As a result, it is possible to achieve the effects described for the configuration of the above-mentioned feature D13 while effectively utilizing the area of the second storage means.

Feature D15. Arbitrary information erased by overwriting of the overwriting means is executed in the second storage means after the branch timing of the branch correspondence information until a specific event corresponding to the arbitrary information can occur. Feature D13 or D14 characterized in that it is provided with a return means (a function of executing a return process in the VDP 105) for recovering by overwriting an area including at least a part of a region in which information that has not been stored is stored. The game machine described in.

According to the feature D15, the arbitrary information to be erased when each branch correspondence information is stored in advance is stored in the second storage means before a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. Since it is restored, the action and effect of the above feature D13 can be exhibited without disturbing the arbitrary response control. Further, the area in which the branch correspondence information corresponding to the branch effect range not selected as the progress destination can be stored can be used as the area for returning the deleted arbitrary information. As a result, the action and effect of the above feature D13 can be achieved while effectively utilizing the area of the second storage means.

Feature D16. The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when the series of effects are started by the effect execution means.
The series of effects corresponding to the branch mode are set so that the branch to any of the branch effect ranges is performed after the start effect range executed by using the start effect information.
The start effect information is information that is not used by the control means when the effect of the branch effect range is executed using the branch corresponding information, and is included in the overwrite target by the overwrite means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D13 to D15.

According to the feature D16, the control for the start effect in the series of effects is executed by using the start effect information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the start effect information can be read out by the control means. The time required can be shortened, and a series of productions can be started smoothly. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a new series of effects can occur even after the series of effects has been started. As a result, even if the series of effects is started at an arbitrary timing, the series of effects can be smoothly started at each start timing.

Further, in a configuration in which the start effect information is not used when the effect of the branch effect range is executed, the area in which the start effect information is stored when the start effect information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance. By overwriting the area including at least a part of the above, the area of the second storage means can be effectively utilized.

Feature D17. The series of effects corresponding to the branch mode is set so that the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed after the start effect range is executed, and then the branch to any of the branch effect ranges is performed. And
The first storage means stores intermediate correspondence information used by the control means when the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed, and the control means is read from the first storage means and said to be the second. Using the intermediate information stored in the storage means, the effect executing means is made to execute the effect of the intermediate effect range.
Further, the overwriting means is a region in which the intermediate correspondence information in the second storage means is stored in a situation where the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed or executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature D16, wherein each branch correspondence information is overwritten in a different area including at least a part of the area in which the start effect information is stored.

According to the feature D17, it is possible to effectively utilize the area of the second storage means while ensuring that the effect of the start effect range and the effect of the intermediate effect range are satisfactorily executed.

Feature D18. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
A transition means (execution of the game state transition process in the main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. Function) and
With
By using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the control means uses the special gaming state by the effect executing means in the situation where the gaming state is the special gaming state. It is intended to execute the production for
The specific information is information used by the control means when at least the effect for a predetermined special gaming state is executed by the effect executing means.
The overwriting means reads at least the specific information from the first storage means and at least an area in which the optional information of the second storage means is stored when the effect for the predetermined special gaming state is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D17, wherein the area including a part thereof is overwritten.

According to the feature D18, when the information for executing the effect for the special gaming state is transferred to the second storage means, the arbitrary use information is set as the erasure target and the area of the second storage means is effectively utilized. (2) While reducing the storage capacity required for the storage means, it is possible to perform an effect for a special gaming state in which the amount of information is large.

Feature D19. A variable ball entry means (variable) that is provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and can be switched between a first state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter. Winning device 22) and
In the special game state, after the variable ball entry means is set to the first state, the variable ball entry control for switching to the second state when the upper limit number of game balls enters the variable ball entry means is predetermined. A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 60) that is repeated a plurality of times, and
With
By using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the control means can produce an effect for the first state in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the first state. In addition to having the effect executing means execute the effect, the effect for the first state is set according to the first state of each number of times.
The specific information is information used by the control means when the effect for the first state is executed by the effect executing means, and includes all the information corresponding to each first state for the plurality of times. Ori
The overwriting means reads out the specific information from the first storage means and reads the specific information from the first storage means by the time when the effect for the first first state is started in the case where the effect for each first state is performed. The gaming machine according to feature D18, wherein the area including at least a part of the area in which the optional information is stored is overwritten.

According to the feature D19, in the special game state, each first state is terminated when the maximum number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, so that the duration is not constant and corresponds to each first state. The timing at which the produced production is started is also irregular. In this case, all of the information for the effect corresponding to each of the first state for a plurality of times is transferred to and stored in the second storage means by the time the effect for the first first state is started. Even if the effects for each first state are started at irregular timings, the control means can execute the effects for each first state using the information read from the second storage means.

Each invention of the feature D group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in memory selection is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the higher the processing speed, the higher the cost.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features D1 to D19, the above features A1 to A19, the above features B1 to B11, the above features C1 to C26, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1 A configuration limited to any one of ~ G19, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
The game rotation operation was started prior to the grant determination means performing the grant determination or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and corresponded to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn control means (in the display CPU 102) that controls a specific notification means so that the game turn operation is performed for each game turn, with the end of the game turn operation as the notification result as one game turn. Function to execute fluctuation start processing by normal symbol and processing during fluctuation by normal symbol),
By executing the special notification by the specific notification means or a notification means different from the specific notification means, the game rotation operation is performed by the specific notification means even though the condition for starting the game rotation operation is satisfied. Special notification control means for making the player recognize that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in a situation where the above-mentioned determination condition cannot be performed )When,
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the player who visually recognizes the game rotation operation by performing the game rotation operation grasps the result of the grant determination. In this case, if a situation occurs in which the game circulation operation cannot be performed, the player is confused that the judgment condition may have been invalidated even though the judgment condition has been satisfied. There is concern that it will end up. On the other hand, by performing the special notification, the player recognizes that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in the situation where the game rotation operation cannot be performed. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the game circulation operation cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition may have been invalidated.

Feature E2. It is provided with an operation mode determining means (a function of executing a fluctuation start process in the main control device 60) for determining a series of operation modes of the game rotation operation.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the special notification control means continues the special notification until an operation duration corresponding to the operation mode determined by the operation mode determining means elapses.

According to the feature E2, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of each game round based on the grant determination from fluctuating depending on the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the game round operation cannot be performed. Further, for example, even if a plurality of control subjects are provided, one control subject is provided with operation mode determining means, and the other control subject is provided with game rotation control means, the operation determined by one control subject is provided. The occurrence of inconvenience such that the duration and the execution time of the game rotation operation executed by the other control subject do not match can be suppressed.

Feature E3. It is provided with a duration determination means (a function of executing the fluctuation start process in the main control device 60) for determining the operation duration of the game rotation operation.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the special notification control means continues the special notification until the operation duration determined by the duration determination means elapses.

According to the feature E3, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of each game round based on the grant determination from fluctuating depending on the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the game round operation cannot be performed. Further, for example, even if a plurality of control subjects are provided, one control subject is provided with a duration determining means, and the other control subject is provided with a game rotation control means, the operation determined by one control subject is provided. The occurrence of inconvenience such that the duration and the execution time of the game rotation operation executed by the other control subject do not match can be suppressed.

Feature E4. When the game rotation operation can be performed in the situation where the special notification is being performed, the special notification is terminated without switching to the game rotation operation during the special notification. Described in any one of features E1 to E3, which comprises a switching means (a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the display CPU 102) for switching from a later game round so that the game round operation is performed. Game machine.

According to the feature E4, even if it becomes possible to perform the game rotation operation in the situation where the special notification is being performed, it is not necessary to switch to the game rotation operation while the special notification is being performed. , The complexity of processing is suppressed.

Feature E5. The specific notification means is a display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen, and the special notification is executed by another notification means (main display unit 212) provided separately from the display means. It is a configuration that
The special notification control means starts special notification prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the grant determination means of the special notification control means. The special notification of each game is performed by the separate notification means so that the notification result corresponding to the determination result is used and the special notification is terminated.
Further, in a situation where the game rotation operation cannot be performed by the display means even though the determination condition is satisfied, a display for recognizing that the special notification is being performed by the separate notification means is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the display means is provided with a suggestion control means (display control device 100).

According to the feature E5, since the display means and the separate notification means are provided as the means for notifying the result of the grant determination, the credibility in notifying the result of the grant determination is enhanced. In this case, in a situation where the game revolving operation cannot be performed, it is only necessary to make the display means display a display for recognizing that the special notification is being performed by another notification means. The control load is suppressed.

Feature E6. A display means having a display screen (design display device 31) and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
The variation display of the normal pattern is started prior to the grant determination means performing the grant determination or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and corresponds to the determination result of the grant determination means. A normal display control means for displaying and controlling the display means so that the variable display of the normal pattern is performed in each game time, with the end of the variable display of the normal pattern as the stop result. The function of executing the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol and the fluctuation processing by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102) and
By executing the special notification on the display screen or another notification means different from the display screen, the variation display of the normal pattern is displayed on the display screen even though the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern is satisfied. A special notification control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing by the simple symbol and the fluctuation processing by the simple symbol in the display CPU 102) for making the player recognize that the grant determination is not invalidated in the situation where the grant determination cannot be performed.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E6, the player who visually recognizes the variable display of the normal pattern by performing the variable display of the normal pattern grasps the result of the grant determination. In this case, if a situation occurs in which the normal pattern cannot be displayed in a variable manner, the player is confused that the judgment condition may have been invalidated even though the judgment condition has been satisfied. There is a concern that it will end up. On the other hand, by performing the special notification, the player recognizes that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in the situation where the variable display of the normal pattern cannot be performed. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the variable display of the normal pattern cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the determination condition may have been invalidated.

Feature E7. A first storage means (character ROM 106) for storing information used by the normal display control means when the variable display of the normal pattern is performed, and
A second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
Information is read from the first storage means and the read information is read so that the information used when the normal display control means causes the normal pattern to perform variable display is stored in the second storage means in advance. A transfer means (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121), and a transfer means for storing the data in the second storage means.
With
The normal display control means uses the information transferred to the second storage means when the variable display of the normal pattern is performed.
The special notification control means executes the special notification on the display screen or another notification means different from the display screen, so that the second storage is satisfied even though the condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. The feature E6 is characterized in that the player is made to recognize that the grant determination is not invalidated in a situation where the information used when starting the variable display of the normal pattern is not stored in the means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature E7, by using the information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the variation display of the normal pattern is executed, so that the information for causing the variation display of the normal pattern to be performed. The usage speed of the normal pattern is improved, and the variable display of the normal pattern can be performed smoothly. However, in this configuration, it is assumed that the transfer of information to the second storage means is not in time by the time the condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. On the other hand, in the above situation, the player is confused that the establishment of the judgment condition may have been invalidated by the special notification even if the variable display of the normal pattern is not performed. It can be suppressed.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature E8. The first storage means stores start variation display information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the normal display control means when starting the variation display of the normal pattern. ,
The second storage means stores and retains the start variation display information in a situation where the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern can be satisfied after the start variation display information is transferred.
The special notification control means executes the special notification on the display screen or another notification means different from the display screen, so that the second storage is satisfied even though the condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the player is made to recognize that the grant determination is not invalidated in a situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the means.

According to the feature E8, the variation display of the normal pattern is started by using the start variation display information previously transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the control means can start the variation display information. The time required for reading can be shortened, and the variable display of the normal pattern can be started smoothly. In particular, the start variation display information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where the condition for starting the variation display can be satisfied, so that the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern is normal. Even if is generated at an arbitrary timing, it is not necessary to transfer the start variation display information to the second storage means each time each of these conditions is satisfied, and the variation display of the normal pattern is usually started when each condition is satisfied. The time to complete is shortened.

However, in this configuration, it is assumed that the transfer of the start variation display information to the second storage means is not in time by the time the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern is satisfied. On the other hand, in the above situation, the player is confused that the establishment of the judgment condition may have been invalidated by the special notification even if the variable display of the normal pattern is not performed. It can be suppressed.

In the feature E8, the transfer means may be configured to read the start variation display information from the first storage means and store it in the second storage means after the power supply is started. In this case, the effect of "the time from the establishment of the condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern to the start of the variable display of the normal pattern can be shortened" can be achieved after the start of the power supply. it can.

Feature E9. The first storage means stores simple information (simple symbol data group) in which the amount of information is set to be smaller than the information used by the normal display control means when starting the variable display of the normal pattern. And
The transfer means reads the simple information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means.
The special notification control means is usually used in a situation where the information used by the normal display control means is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored in the second storage means. When the condition for starting the variable display of the pattern is satisfied, the player recognizes that the execution of the grant determination is not invalidated by using the simple information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to feature E7 or E8, wherein the simple display to be displayed is displayed on the display screen.

According to the feature E9, the player can see that the simple display does not invalidate the establishment of the determination condition in the situation where the variable display of the normal pattern cannot be performed even though the determination condition is satisfied. It will be recognized. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the display means cannot normally perform variable display of the pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the judgment condition may have been invalidated. .. In particular, the simple display is performed by the display means in which the variable display of the pattern is normally performed, so that the player can easily recognize that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated.

In addition, since the simple information used for simple display has a smaller amount of information than the information normally used for starting variable display of a pattern, the time required to complete the transfer of simple information is short. Even if the simple information is transferred before the information normally used when starting the variable display of the pattern, the timing of completing the transfer of the former information is extremely late. It is suppressed that it becomes.

Feature E10. The first storage means includes start variation display information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the normal display control means when starting variation display of the normal pattern, and the start variation. Simple information (data group for simple symbols), which is set to have a smaller amount of information than the displayed information, is stored.
The transfer means reads the start variation display information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means after the power supply is started, and when the start variation display information is transferred, the start variation display is displayed. It is provided with a destination transfer means (a function of executing an initial setting process of a regular data group in the write control unit 121) for reading the simple information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means before the information. ,
The second storage means should start the variation display of the normal pattern even after the display is controlled so that the start variation display is performed by using the start variation display information by the normal display control means. The start variation display information is stored and retained in a situation where the condition can be satisfied.
The special notification control means displays the variation of the normal pattern in a situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored in the second storage means. Described in feature E7 or E8, wherein when the condition to be started is satisfied, the simple display is displayed on the display screen by using the simple information stored in the second storage means. Game machine.

According to the feature E10, by using the start variation display information previously transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the variation display of the normal pattern is started, so that the control means of the start variation display information The time required for reading can be shortened, and the variable display of the normal pattern can be started smoothly. In particular, the start variation display information transferred to the second storage means is the first in a situation where the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern can be satisfied even after the display is controlled so that the start variation display is performed. 2 Memory is retained in the storage means. As a result, even if the condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is not necessary to transfer the start variable display information to the second storage means each time each of these conditions is satisfied, and the variable display of each condition It is possible to shorten the time until the variable display of the normal pattern is started for the establishment.

However, in this configuration, it is assumed that the transfer of the start variation display information to the second storage means is not in time by the time the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern is satisfied. On the other hand, in the above situation, the simple display is performed, so that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in the situation where the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed even though the determination condition is satisfied. The player will recognize it. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the display means cannot normally perform variable display of the pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the judgment condition may have been invalidated. .. In particular, the simple display is performed by the display means in which the variable display of the pattern is normally performed, so that the player can easily recognize that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated.

In addition, since the simple information used for simple display has a smaller amount of information than the start fluctuation display information, it is possible to shorten the time until the transfer of the simple information is completed and the start fluctuation. Even if the simple information is transferred before the display information, it is possible to prevent the transfer of the start variation display information from being completed extremely late.

Feature E11. The feature E10, wherein the destination transfer means reads the start variation display information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means in a situation where the simple display is performed. Game machine.

According to the feature E11, by transferring the start variation display information in the situation where the simple display is performed, it is possible to perform the variation display of the normal pattern at least from the subsequent game times.

Feature E12. In the special notification control means, the information used by the normal display control means is not stored in the second storage means when the variable display of the normal pattern is started, and the simple information is the second. When the condition for starting the variation display of the normal pattern is satisfied in the situation stored in the storage means, the variation display of the simple pattern is started and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is set as the stop result of the simple pattern. One of the features E9 to E11, wherein the simple display at which the variable display is terminated is displayed on the display screen by using the simple information stored in the second storage means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature E12, since the simple pattern variation display is performed as a simple display, the variation display corresponding to the grant determination is displayed on the display screen even in a situation where the player cannot normally perform the variation display of the pattern. It becomes easier to recognize that it is being performed, and it becomes possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature E13. It is provided with a display time determining means (a function of executing the variation start processing in the main control device 60) for determining the variation display time of the variation display of the normal pattern.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E6 to E12, wherein the special notification control means continues the special notification until the variation display time determined by the display time determination means elapses.

According to the feature E13, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of each game based on the grant determination from fluctuating according to the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed. Further, for example, even if a plurality of control entities are provided, one control entity is provided with display time determination means, and the other control entity is provided with control means, the variable display time determined by one control entity is also provided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the time of the production for the game round executed by the other control subject does not match.

Feature E14. The normal display control means switches to the variable display based on the normal pattern during the special notification when it becomes possible to perform the variable display of the normal pattern in the situation where the special notification is being performed. It is characterized in that it is provided with a switching means (a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the display CPU 102) for switching so that the variation display by the normal pattern is performed from the game round after the special notification is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E6 to E13.

According to the feature E14, even if it becomes possible to perform the variable display of the normal pattern in the situation where the special notification is being performed, it is necessary to switch to the variable display of the normal pattern while the special notification is being performed. Therefore, complicated processing can be suppressed.

Feature E15. The special notification is configured to be executed by another notification means (main display unit 212) provided separately from the display means.
The special notification control means starts special notification prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the grant determination means of the special notification control means. The special notification of each game is performed by the separate notification means so that the notification result corresponding to the determination result is used and the special notification is terminated.
Further, in a situation where the display means cannot perform the variable display of the normal pattern even though the determination condition is satisfied, the display for recognizing that the special notification is being performed by the separate notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E6 to E14, characterized in that the display means is provided with a suggestion control means (display control device 100).

According to the feature E15, since the display means and the separate notification means are provided as the means for notifying the result of the grant determination, the credibility in notifying the result of the grant determination is enhanced. In this case, in a situation where it is not possible to display a variable pattern of a normal pattern, it is only necessary to make the display means display that the special notification is being performed by another notification means. Therefore, the display means in the situation. Processing load is suppressed.

Each invention of the feature E group is effective for the following problems.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. Will be done. Further, in a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device provided in a game area, a variable display of a pattern is started based on the lottery, and the above-mentioned is performed when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. A display effect for one game is executed in which the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is a transition to the so-called jackpot game state, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed. The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device.

Here, since the display content of the display device has a function of clearly indicating to the player the lottery result of the lottery as to whether or not to give the privilege to the player, the display content is played by the player. This is the point to pay attention to above. Under such circumstances, if a situation occurs in which the lottery result is not properly displayed even though the game machine is in a state where it can play a game, the player will be confused. ..

For example, the lottery result is due to poor display control of the display device even though the game ball has entered the starting ball entry section in a situation where the game ball can be launched. If the display that clearly indicates is not performed, the player will be confused.

The above problem also occurs in a game machine in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by a notification device different from the display device having a display screen.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features E1 to E15, the above features A1 to A19, the above features B1 to B11, the above features C1 to C26, the above features D1 to D19, the following features F1 to F18, and the following features G1. A configuration limited to any one of ~ G19, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Operation correspondence based on the reception means (directing operation device 58) that accepts the specific operation and the operation correspondence information stored in the first storage means (character ROM 106) when the specific operation is received by the reception means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means for executing control (a function of executing a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102, a function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
A second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that stores the operation-corresponding information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer means (VDP side in VDP 105) that reads the operation correspondence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means before the control means performs the operation correspondence control for the specific operation. A function to transfer a data group to the RAM 108, a write control unit 121), and
With
The game machine is characterized in that the control means executes the operation correspondence control by using the operation correspondence information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature F1, the time required for reading the operation correspondence information in the control means can be shortened by executing the operation correspondence control using the operation correspondence information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. It is possible to smoothly perform operation correspondence control. Further, since the operation correspondence information is transferred in advance before the control means performs the operation correspondence control for the specific operation, it is the time from the specific operation to the execution of the operation correspondence control. It can be shortened.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature F2. It is possible to receive the specific operation by the reception means, and an operation response period in which the operation response control is executed according to the specific operation is set.
The transfer means reads the operation correspondence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means by the time the operation correspondence period is started.
When the operation correspondence information is stored, the second storage means stores and holds the operation correspondence information (each background data group, operation system data group) at least during the operation correspondence period. Feature The gaming machine described in F1.

According to the feature F2, even if the specific operation occurs at an arbitrary timing during the operation response period, the time from the reception of the specific operation to the execution of the operation response control can be shortened.

Feature F3. The control means executes one of a plurality of types of operation-corresponding controls based on the acceptance of the specific operation.
The first storage means stores the operation correspondence information necessary for starting each operation correspondence control in correspondence with each operation correspondence control.
The transfer means obtains each operation correspondence information necessary for initiating each operation correspondence control before the control means executes any operation correspondence control for the specific operation. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, which is read from a storage means and stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature F3, since each operation correspondence information necessary for starting each operation correspondence control is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance, any operation correspondence control is executed according to a specific operation. Even if the need arises, it is possible to shorten the time from the reception of the specific operation to the execution of the operation response control.

Feature F4. The effect executing means (symbol display device 31) is provided, and the control means executes the effect corresponding to the specific operation by using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the means is to be executed.

In the effect executed by the effect executing means, the action and effect related to the configuration of any one of the above features F1 to F3 can be exhibited.

As a more specific configuration of the feature F4, a display means having a display screen is provided as the effect executing means, and the control means is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. A configuration is conceivable in which an image is displayed on the display screen by using the information.

Feature F5. A plurality of types of effect modes in which the modes of the effect executed by the effect execution means are different from each other are set.
The control means executes mode-corresponding control corresponding to each effect mode as the operation-corresponding control, and switches the mode-corresponding control to be executed based on the acceptance of the specific operation.
The first storage means stores the mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control as the operation correspondence information in correspondence with each mode correspondence control.
The transfer means reads out each mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control from the first storage means before the situation where the effect mode is switched for the specific operation, and the second The gaming machine according to feature F4, which is characterized in that it is stored in a storage means.

According to the feature F5, the effects can be diversified by setting a plurality of types of effect modes. In this case, since the information corresponding to each mode required to start the control corresponding to each mode is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance, it is necessary to start any effect mode according to the specific operation. Even so, it is possible to shorten the time from receiving the specific operation to starting the selected effect mode.

It should be noted that the grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined determination conditions, and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means are the grant correspondence results. The control means includes a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the above, and the control means grants the privilege prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or by the grant determination means. The game rotation operation is started based on the determination, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is set, and the end of the game rotation operation is regarded as one of the game times. In the configuration in which the effect executing means is controlled so that the game rotation operation of each game time is performed using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the effect mode is , The mode may be a mode in which the operation modes of the game rotation operation are different from each other.

Feature F6. The effect executing means is a display means having a display screen and being displayed and controlled by the control means.
The display screen is configured to display a pattern on the background image, and as the plurality of effect modes, a plurality of types of display modes are set depending on the difference in the combination of the background image and the pattern.
The control means executes mode-corresponding control for displaying an image corresponding to each display mode on the display screen as the operation-corresponding control, and also performs mode-corresponding control for execution target based on the acceptance of the specific operation. It is a switch
The first storage means stores the mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control as the operation correspondence information in correspondence with each mode correspondence control.
The transfer means reads the information corresponding to each mode from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means before the display mode is switched for the specific operation. The gaming machine according to the feature F5.

According to the feature F6, the display can be diversified by setting a plurality of types of display modes. In this case, since each mode correspondence information necessary for starting each mode correspondence control is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance, it becomes necessary to start any display mode according to a specific operation. Even so, it is possible to shorten the time from receiving the specific operation until the selected display mode is started.

It should be noted that the grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined determination conditions, and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means are the grant correspondence results. The control means includes a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the above, and the control means grants the privilege prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or by the grant determination means. The variation display of the pattern is started based on the determination, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means and the end of the variation display of the pattern are set as one of the game times. In a configuration in which the display means is controlled so that the pattern is variablely displayed for each game using the information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means, the display modes are set to. The mode may be a mode in which the display modes of the variable display of the pattern are different from each other.

Feature F7. The first storage means stores the background information used by the control means when displaying the background image and the pattern information used by the control means when displaying the pattern.
The transfer means uses the background information and the pattern information that enable the display of an image in the reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes as information used by the control means when displaying another display mode. The gaming machine according to feature F6, which is characterized in that it is transferred to the second storage means with priority.

According to the feature F7, the background information and the pattern information that enable the display of the image in the reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes are transferred in preference to the information used when displaying the other display modes. Will be done. As a result, for example, an image in one of the display modes can be displayed as compared with a configuration in which one of the background information and the pattern information, which has a plurality of types set, is completely transferred and then the transfer is started. The time required to achieve this can be shortened.

Feature F8. In the series of effects executed by the effect executing means, a branch mode in which the process proceeds to one of a plurality of branch effect ranges according to the mode of the specific operation received by the reception means. (Production range of completed mode, production range of unfinished mode) is included.
The first storage means sets branch correspondence information (first operation system data group, second operation system data group) used by the control means when starting the production of each branch effect range. When the effect of each branch effect range is executed by the effect execution means, the control means is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means. It is a configuration that uses each of the branch correspondence information.
When the effect of the branch mode is executed, the transfer means reads the branch correspondence information from the first storage means and stores the second storage before branching to any one of the branch effect ranges. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F7, which is characterized in that it is stored in a means.

According to the feature F8, since the effect proceeds to any one of the plurality of branch effect ranges according to the mode of the specific operation, the effect can be diversified. In this case, since each branch correspondence information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance before branching to any of the branch effect ranges is performed, any branch effect is produced according to the mode of the specific operation. Even if it progresses to the range, it is possible to smoothly proceed from the branch timing to the subsequent production range.

Feature F9. The effect of the branch mode includes an operation acceptance period in which an operation generation effect is generated each time the specific operation is accepted by the reception means as a pre-stage of branching to each branch effect range.
The first storage means stores operation generation information used by the control means in order to execute the operation generation effect when the specific operation is received during the operation reception period.
When the effect of the branching mode is executed, the transfer means reads the operation occurrence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means by the time when the operation acceptance period is reached.
When the operation occurrence information is transferred, the second storage means stores and retains the operation occurrence information at least until the operation acceptance period elapses.
When the specific operation is received during the operation acceptance period, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the operation generation effect by using the operation generation information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature F8.

According to the feature F9, as a pre-stage of branching to each branch effect range, an operation acceptance period in which an operation generation effect is generated each time a specific operation is accepted is included, so that the effect can be diversified. Further, the operation occurrence information is transferred to the second storage means by the time when the operation acceptance period is reached, and the transferred operation occurrence information is stored and retained until the operation acceptance period elapses. As a result, even if a specific operation occurs at an arbitrary timing, the time until the operation generation effect is started can be shortened.

The configuration limited in the feature F9 may be applied to the feature F4. In this case, instead of the structure of the first paragraph, "In the series of effects executed by the effect executing means, the operation reception period in which the operation generation effect occurs every time the specific operation is received by the reception means. Aspects having the above are included, and the configuration of "is included."

Feature F10. In the branch mode, a progress destination determining means for determining a branch effect range to be advanced among the plurality of branch effect ranges according to the mode of the specific operation in the operation acceptance period (a function of executing an operation correspondence process in the display CPU 102). The gaming machine according to the feature F9, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature F10, in the effect of the branch mode, after the operation acceptance period is executed, the process proceeds to the branch effect range according to the number of specific operations in the operation acceptance period, so that the player pays attention to the specific operation. Can be increased. Further, even in the configuration for executing the effect corresponding to the specific operation in this way, the effect can be smoothly advanced by having the configurations of the above-mentioned features F8 and F9.

Features F11. A progress destination for an area including at least a part of a region in which branch correspondence information corresponding to a branch effect range not selected as a progress destination among the branch correspondence information stored in the second storage means is stored. It is provided with overwriting means (a function of executing the process of step S2319 in the display CPU 102, a function of executing a return process in the VDP 105) of overwriting other information in the situation where the effect of the branch effect range selected as is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F8 to F10.

According to the feature F11, the area in which the branch correspondence information corresponding to the branch effect range not selected as the progress destination is stored is the area in which the information used by the control means is stored when the effect generated after the branch is executed. Can be used as. As a result, it is possible to achieve the effects described for the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F8 while effectively utilizing the area of the second storage means.

Feature F12. The first storage means stores arbitrary information (common data group) used by the control means in order to execute arbitrary response control when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation. And
The second storage means stores the optional information read from the first storage means, and stores the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues. And
When the specific event occurs, the control means executes the arbitrary response control using the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means.
When the transfer correspondence means stores the branch correspondence information in the second storage means, the transfer means overwrites the area including at least a part of the area in which the arbitrary information is stored (overwrite processing in the VDP 105). The gaming machine according to any one of the features F8 to F11, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature F12, the time required for reading the arbitrary information in the control means can be shortened by executing the arbitrary correspondence control using the arbitrary information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform arbitrary correspondence control. In particular, the arbitrary information transferred to the second storage means is stored in memory when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues, so that each specific event occurs in a configuration in which the specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to smoothly perform arbitrary response control for the occurrence of.

In this case, when the branch correspondence information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance, the second storage means is configured to overwrite the area including at least a part of the area in which the arbitrary information is stored. The storage means does not have to have a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing all of the arbitrary information and the information corresponding to each branch. As a result, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while suppressing the storage capacity required for the second storage means.

Feature F13. Multiple types of the optional information are set corresponding to a plurality of types of specific events.
When the branch transfer means overwrites each branch correspondence information, the branch transfer means stores arbitrary information corresponding to a specific event that does not occur at least in the middle range of the effect executed after the branch timing from the overwrite timing. The gaming machine according to feature F12, wherein the area is overwritten.

According to the feature F13, when each branch correspondence information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance, in a configuration in which the area including at least a part of the area in which the arbitrary information is stored is overwritten, the erasure target is set. The optional information is optional information that can be deleted at that time without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to exert the action and effect of the above-mentioned feature F12 without disturbing the arbitrary correspondence control.

Feature F14. Restoring means (step S2319 in the display CPU 102) for returning the arbitrary information erased by overwriting the branching transfer means to the second storage means before a specific event corresponding to the arbitrary information can occur. The gaming machine according to feature F13, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above (a function of executing a return processing in the VDP 105).

According to the feature F14, the arbitrary information to be erased when each branch correspondence information is stored in advance is stored in the second storage means before a specific event corresponding to the optional information can occur. Since it is restored, it is possible to exert the action and effect of the above-mentioned feature F12 without disturbing the arbitrary response control.

Feature F15. The return means puts the erased arbitrary information in an area including at least a part of an area in which information that has not been executed after the branch timing among the branch correspondence information in the second storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to feature F14, which is characterized by being written.

According to the feature F15, the area in which the branch correspondence information corresponding to the branch effect range not selected as the progress destination is stored can be used as the area for returning the deleted arbitrary information. As a result, the action and effect of the above feature F12 can be achieved while effectively utilizing the area of the second storage means.

Feature F16. Equipped with an abnormality determining means (a function of executing a reading process for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred.
The optional information is used by the control means when the abnormality notification is executed by the effect executing means or a notification means different from the effect execution means based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. Information for abnormalities (data group for notification of abnormalities) and information different from the information for abnormalities are included.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F12 to F15, wherein the abnormality information is excluded from the overwriting target by the branch transfer means.

According to the feature F16, the time required for reading the abnormality information in the control means is shortened by executing the control for abnormality notification using the abnormality information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. It is possible to smoothly execute the abnormality notification.

In particular, the abnormality information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where an abnormality can occur even after the abnormality notification is once executed. Furthermore, the abnormality information is not erased even when each branch correspondence information is transferred to the second storage means. As a result, in a configuration in which an abnormality occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to smoothly execute the abnormality notification for the occurrence of each abnormality.

Feature F17. The optional information includes start effect information (normal symbol data group, each background data group) used by the control means when the series of effects are started by the effect execution means.
A series of effects corresponding to the branch mode are set so that a branch to any of the branch effect ranges is performed after the start effect range executed by using the start effect information.
The start effect information is information that is not used by the control means when the effect of the branch effect range is executed using each branch correspondence information, and is included in the overwrite target by the branch transfer means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F12 to F16.

According to the feature F17, the control for the start effect in the series of effects is executed by using the start effect information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, so that the start effect information can be read out by the control means. The time required can be shortened, and a series of productions can be started smoothly. In particular, the start effect information transferred to the second storage means is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a new series of effects can occur even after the series of effects has been started. As a result, even if the series of effects is started at an arbitrary timing, the series of effects can be smoothly started at each start timing.

Further, in a configuration in which the start effect information is not used when the effect of the branch effect range is executed, the area in which the start effect information is stored when the start effect information is collectively stored in the second storage means in advance. By overwriting the area including at least a part of the above, the area of the second storage means can be effectively utilized.

Feature F18. The series of effects corresponding to the branch mode is set so that the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed after the start effect range is executed, and then the branch to any of the branch effect ranges is performed. And
The first storage means stores intermediate correspondence information used by the control means when the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed.
The transfer means reads the intermediate correspondence information from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means by the time the intermediate effect range is executed.
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect of the intermediate effect range by using the intermediate correspondence information stored in the second storage means.
Further, the branch transfer means is an area in which the intermediate correspondence information in the second storage means is stored in a situation where the effect of the intermediate effect range is executed or executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine according to feature F17, wherein each branch correspondence information is overwritten in an area different from the above area and including at least a part of the area in which the start effect information is stored.

According to the feature F18, it is possible to effectively utilize the area of the second storage means while ensuring that the effect of the start effect range and the effect of the intermediate effect range are satisfactorily executed.

Each invention of the above-mentioned feature F group is effective for the following problems.

As this type of gaming machine, pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device as an effect executing means, and are provided with an operating device operated by a player to operate the operating device. It is known that the display content on the display screen is changed according to the above.

For example, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, an operating device is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and in order to expect the player to generate a jackpot state, an effect corresponding to the operation of the operating device by the player is displayed on the screen or the like. It is configured in.

Further, for example, in other conventional pachinko gaming machines, a plurality of effect modes are set so that the effect contents and BGM of the liquid crystal display device are different from each other, and an operation is performed to select the effect mode. A device is provided. Further, as a slot machine, like the other conventional pachinko gaming machines described above, there is also known a slot machine in which an effect mode in a display device can be selected by an operating device.

Here, if the processing speed of the image processing is slow, the responsiveness of the display screen to the operation on the operating device is responsive even if the display content on the display screen is changed according to the operation on the operating device as described above. Will get worse. Then, there is a concern that the effect of giving the configuration in which the display content on the display screen is changed according to the operation on the operating device will not be sufficiently exhibited.

It should be noted that the above problem also occurs in a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means different from that of a display device having a display screen, and the effect content in the effect executing means is changed according to an operation on the operation device.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features F1 to F18, the above features A1 to A19, the above features B1 to B11, the above features C1 to C26, the above features D1 to D19, the above features E1 to E15, and the following features A configuration limited to any one of G1 to G19, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
When the first storage means executes the first specific information used by the control means when executing the first specific control and the second specific control that can be executed after the first specific control. Stores the second specific information used by the control means.
A second storage means that stores the first specific information and the second specific information read from the first storage means, and the speed required for reading these information is faster than that when reading from the first storage means ( Equipped with bridge side RAM107)
The control means executes the first specific control using the first specific information stored in the second storage means, and also uses the second specific information stored in the second storage means. It is used to execute the second specific control.
Further, in a situation where the first specific control is executed or executed by the control means using the first specific information stored in the second storage means, the data is read from the first storage means. A transfer means for storing the second specific information in an area different from the area in which the first specific information is stored in the second storage means (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with 121).

According to the feature G1, the first specific control is executed using the first specific information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, and the first specific control transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means is executed. By executing the second specific control using the two specific information, the time required for reading the first specific information and the second specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the first specific control and the second specific control can be performed. Specific control can be executed smoothly. Further, since the unit of information is divided into the first specific information and the second specific information, it is used in both specific controls when the second specific control is continuously executed in the first specific control. Compared with the configuration in which the information is collectively transferred, the time until the first specific control can be executed can be shortened.

Furthermore, in a situation where the first specific control is executed or is being executed using the first specific information stored in the second storage means, the second specific information read from the first storage means is the second. The configuration is such that the first specific information in the storage means is transferred to an area different from the area in which the first specific information is stored. As a result, the time until the second specific control is started following the first specific control, as compared with the configuration in which the transfer of the second specific information to the second storage means is started after the execution of the first specific control. Can be shortened.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature G2. The first storage means further stores the third specific information used by the control means when executing a third specific control that can be executed after the second specific control.
The control means executes the third specific control by using the third specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means.
The transfer means stores the third specific information in the second storage means in a situation where the second specific control is executed or is being executed by the control means using the second specific information. In the case, the third specification is in an area different from the area in which the second specific information is stored in the second storage means and including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized by overwriting information.

According to the feature G2, when the second specific control and the third specific control are executed following the first specific control, the time until the third specific control is started can be shortened. it can. Further, since the third specific information is overwritten on the area including at least a part of the area in which the first specific information is stored, the above effect can be obtained while suppressing the storage capacity of the second storage means.

Feature G3. Execution of the effect in the effect executing means based on the effect executing means (symbol display device 31), the first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance, and the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (a function of executing a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102, a function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
The first storage means includes division information (normal symbol data group, each background data group, each notice data group, each reach data group, etc., corresponding to each of a plurality of continuous individual effect ranges in a series of effects. Each jackpot data group) is memorized,
It is provided with a second storage means (bridge side RAM 107) that stores the divided information read from the first storage means and has a speed required for reading the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
The control means causes the effect executing means to perform an effect of an individual effect range corresponding to each divided information by using the division information stored in the second storage means.
Further, a situation in which the effect executing means is controlled or controlled by the control means so that the effect in a predetermined individual effect range is executed using the predetermined division information stored in the second storage means. In the above, the rear division information corresponding to the rear individual effect range executed after the predetermined individual effect range is read from the first storage means, and the predetermined division information in the second storage means is stored. The gaming machine is provided with a transfer means (a function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105, a write control unit 121) for storing in an area different from the area where the information is set.

According to the feature G3, the effect of each individual effect range is executed by controlling the operation of the individual effect range by using the division information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means. The time required can be shortened. In addition, by dividing a series of effects into individual effect ranges and setting division information corresponding to those individual effect ranges, information used in both specific controls is collectively transferred when executing a series of effects. Compared to the configuration to be performed, the time until a series of effects can be started can be shortened.

Furthermore, in a situation where the effect executing means is controlled or controlled so that the effect of a predetermined individual effect range is executed using the predetermined division information stored in the second storage means, the first storage The rearward division information read from the means is transferred to an area different from the area in which the predetermined division information in the second storage means is stored. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the transfer of the rear division information to the second storage means is started after the execution of the predetermined individual effect range, the rear individual effect range is executed following the predetermined individual effect range. It is possible to shorten the time until the individual production range on the rear side is started.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature G4. When the transfer means stores the rearward division information in the second storage means, the transfer means is an area different from the area in which the predetermined division information is stored and is before the predetermined individual effect range. The feature G3 is characterized in that the rear division information is overwritten in the area including at least a part of the area in which the front division information corresponding to the individual production range of the front side is stored. The game machine described.

According to the feature G4, when a predetermined individual effect range and a rear individual effect range are executed following the front side individual effect range, the time until the rear side individual effect range is started is shortened. be able to. Further, since the rear division information is overwritten by the area including at least a part of the area in which the front division information is stored, the above effect can be obtained while suppressing the storage capacity of the second storage means.

Feature G5. A range of start effects that are commonly executed from the start timing to at least a specific period in a series of multiple types of effects, and whether or not they are executed during or after the start effect range depending on the type of series of effects. Or, an additional production range of a different type is set,
The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, wherein the division information is set corresponding to each of the start effect range and the additional effect range.

According to the feature G5, since the division information is set corresponding to each of the start effect range and the additional effect range, when the effect of the start effect range is executed, the division information corresponding to the start effect range can be transferred. Often, when the effect of the additional effect range is executed during or after the start effect range, the division information corresponding to the effect may be transferred. Therefore, when transferring the divided information, it is sufficient to read and transfer the information corresponding to the effect range to be executed, and it is not necessary to perform processing such as adjusting the divided information after reading according to the effect range to be executed. Therefore, the processing load at the time of transfer can be reduced.

Feature G6. The predetermined additional effect range is composed of a plurality of individual effect ranges, and the information used by the control means when executing the effect of the predetermined additional effect range is a plurality of divided information (initial division data group, intermediate). The gaming machine according to feature G5, which is composed of a division data group and a final division data group).

According to the feature G6, even if the execution time is set to be long when the effect of the predetermined additional effect range is executed, the second storage means is set for the predetermined additional effect range. Since the divided information may be sequentially transferred, the storage capacity required for the second storage means can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the information that enables the execution of the predetermined additional effect range is collectively transferred.

Feature G7. In the additional effect range, a long effect range (super reach A display, super reach B display) and a short effect range (normal reach display) in which the duration when executed is relatively long and short are set. ,
The short effect range is composed of a single individual effect range, and the information used by the control means when the effect of the short effect range is executed is composed of a single divided information.
The long effect range is composed of a plurality of individual effect ranges, and the information used by the control means when executing the effect of the long effect range is composed of a plurality of divided information. Features The gaming machine according to G5 or G6.

According to the feature G7, since the short effect range is composed of a single division information, it is possible to suppress the transfer of the division information from becoming complicated, and the long effect range is composed of a plurality of division information. As a result, the amount of information to be transferred in advance before the start of the long effect range can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the information that enables the long effect range to be transferred is collectively transferred. That is, the transfer of the divided information can be made suitable according to the type of the additional effect range.

Feature G8. Information on the transfer start timing of each of the divided information is stored in advance.
The transfer means starts the transfer of each division information according to the transfer start timing, and the division information corresponding to each individual production range is stored in the second storage means until the execution timing of each individual production range is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, characterized in that it is to be stored.

According to the feature G8, when transferring the divided information, it is sufficient to refer to the transfer start timing stored in advance, so that the processing related to the transfer can be simplified.

Feature G9. Mode information determining means (main control device 60) for determining a series of mode information (display table) of the effect including the content of control by the control means from the start to the end of the effect based on the establishment of the effect start condition. (A function to execute the fluctuation start processing in the display CPU 102, a function to execute the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102).
The transfer start timing information is set in correspondence with the mode information determined by the mode information determining means.
The transfer means is characterized in that it specifies the transfer start timing of the divided information by referring to the elapsed time of the effect being executed and the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. The gaming machine described in G8.

According to the feature G9, since the transfer start timing information is set in association with the mode information used when the series of effects is advanced, the divided information can be transferred in accordance with the progress of the series of effects. ..

Feature G10. A plurality of modes are set in the series of effects depending on the presence / absence or type of an additional effect range to be executed during or after the common effect range.
A common control content information group (base table group) that defines the control content of the control means in the common effect range, and an additional control content information group that defines the control content of the control means in the additional effect range. Information group storage means (variable display table storage area 103d, jackpot production table storage area 103e) in which (notice table group, normal reach table group, super reach table group, jackpot production table group) are stored in advance,
A mode determining means (display table setting process in the display CPU 102) for determining a series of effects by acquiring necessary control content information groups from the information group storage means based on the establishment of the effect start condition. Function to execute) and
Is equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or G9, wherein the information of each transfer start timing is stored in association with a control content information group including an individual effect range of the corresponding division information.

Assuming a configuration in which a series of control content information groups are prepared for each mode of a series of effects, it is necessary to prepare as many control content information groups as the number of modes of the series of effects, and the control content information groups are stored. There is concern that the storage capacity required to keep it will be large. If the transfer start timing information is individually set corresponding to each of these control content information groups, the required storage capacity becomes larger accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the feature G10, the control content information group is selected or combined according to a series of production modes to be set, so that some control contents are selected in a plurality of production modes. The information group will be used in common. Furthermore, the information of each transfer start timing is stored in association with the control content information group including the individual effect range of the corresponding division information. As a result, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a series of control content information groups including information on the transfer start timing is prepared for each mode of the series of effects.

Feature G11. The additional effect range includes a first front side additional effect range (displayed with notice A) that can be executed at the front side effect timing and a second that can be executed when the first front side additional effect range is not executed at the front side effect timing. The front side additional effect range (notice B display) is included, and the first rear side additional effect range (super reach A display) that can be executed at the rear side effect timing and the first The second rear side additional effect range (super reach B display) that can be executed when the rear side additional effect range is not executed is included.
The gaming machine according to feature G10, wherein the information group storage means stores additional control content information groups in a one-to-one correspondence with each additional effect range.

According to the feature G11, a plurality of types of combinations of additional effect ranges that are selectively selected are set, so that the effect can be diversified. In this case, the control content information group for addition is stored corresponding to each additional effect range. As a result, some control content information groups are commonly used in a plurality of modes of production. Furthermore, the information of each transfer start timing is stored in association with the control content information group including the individual effect range of the corresponding division information. As a result, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a series of control content information groups including information on the transfer start timing is prepared for each mode of the series of effects.

Feature G12. The control means controls so that the effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the occurrence of a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing at least in a specific situation.
Each effect of the plurality of aspects has a configuration starting from the common effect range.
When the division information corresponding to the common effect range is transferred, the second storage means is controlled by the control means using the division information after the production of the common effect range is executed. The gaming machine according to feature G10 or G11, characterized in that the division information is stored and retained even in a situation where the specific event can occur.

According to the feature G12, the divided information corresponding to the common effect range is stored and held in the second storage means in a situation where a specific event can occur even after the common effect range is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which a specific event occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to shorten the time until the effect of the common effect range for the occurrence of each specific event is executed.

Feature G13. At least a part of the divided information has a different capacity of information according to the corresponding individual production range.
The size of the area distributed to each divided information as a writing area is changed within the range of the entire area of the second storage means according to the combination of the divided information stored and stored in the second storage means at the same time. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G12.

According to the feature G13, the size of the area distributed to each divided information as a write area within the range of the entire area of the second storage means is determined according to the combination of the divided information stored and stored in the second storage means at the same time. By changing, the degree of freedom in selecting the combination of information to be stored at the same time is increased.

Feature G14. Adjustment means (cache buffer 123, write control unit) that adjusts so that the timing of reading information from the second storage means by the control means and the timing of transferring information to the second storage means by the transfer means do not overlap. The gaming machine according to feature G13, characterized in that it includes a function of executing data transfer processing in 121).

According to the feature G14, since the read timing by the control means and the transfer timing by the transfer means are adjusted so as not to overlap, for example, the transfer means overwrites the predetermined information on the area being read by the control means. The occurrence of inconveniences such as the occurrence of such problems is suppressed.

Feature G15. The adjusting means
The speed required for reading information is faster than the case of reading from the first storage means, and when the divided information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the first storage means An intermediate storage means (cache buffer 123) that stores at least a part of the read divided information in a stage prior to writing to the second storage means, and
Based on transferring the information stored in the intermediate storage means to the second storage means, the storage execution means for storing the divided information in the second storage means (execution of the data transfer process in the write control unit 121). Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to the feature G14, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature G15, when the divided information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, at least a part of the divided information read from the first storage means is temporarily stored in the intermediate storage means, and then once said. The configuration is such that the divided information can be stored in the second storage means based on the transfer of the stored information to the second storage means. According to the configuration, the intermediate storage means can be used in a situation where information cannot be transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, such as when the control means is accessing the second storage means. At least a part of the division information can be read out. Then, when the situation is such that the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the information stored in the intermediate storage means is transferred to the second storage means so that the second storage means stores the divided information. be able to. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the divided information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means after the information can be transferred to the second storage means, the transfer of the divided information is completed. The time required can be shortened.

Feature G16. The effect executing means is a display means (design display device 31) having a display screen.
The control means
A drawing information creating means (a function of executing drawing data setting processing in the VDP 105) that creates drawing information using the division information stored in the second storage means, and
A drawing signal output means (executes drawing signal output processing in the VDP 105) for displaying a specific image on the display screen by outputting a drawing signal to the display means based on the drawing information created by the drawing information creating means. Function to do) and
With
The adjusting means prevents the transfer means from transferring information to the second storage means in a situation where the drawing information is being created by the drawing information creating means, while the drawing signal output. In a situation where the drawing signal is output by the means, a means for permitting the transfer of information to the second storage means by the transfer means (a function of executing the process of step S1005 in the write control unit 121) is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature G14 or G15, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature G16, the information can be transferred to the second storage means without interfering with the control for creating the drawing information in the control means, and the period during which the control means controls to output the drawing signal. Can be effectively used to transfer information to the second storage means.

Feature G17. An effect executing means (design display device 31) in which the execution of the effect is controlled by the control means, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
With
The control means starts the game rotation operation prior to the grant determination means performing the grant determination or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and determines the grant determination means. Use the information read from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means, and stored as the operation result corresponding to the result and the game rotation control for ending the game rotation operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, which is performed for the effect executing means.

It is possible to achieve the effects as described above for the game rotation operation.

Feature G18. An effect executing means (design display device 31) in which the execution of the effect is controlled by the control means, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
A transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
With
By using the information read from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means, and stored, the control means is special in the effect executing means in a situation where the gaming state is the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G17, which is characterized in that an effect for a gaming state is executed.

As for the effect for the game state, the action and effect as already described can be achieved.

Feature G19. An effect executing means (design display device 31) in which the execution of the effect is controlled by the control means, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The game rotation operation is started before the control means has the grant determination means and the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, and the grant determination means is started. The game rotation control that makes the operation result corresponding to the determination result of the above and causes the game rotation operation to be terminated is read from the first storage means, transferred to the second storage means, and stored. By using the game rotation control means (function for executing the game rotation control process in the display CPU 102) performed on the effect executing means,
A transition means (main control) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state after the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result and the game rotation operation corresponding to the grant correspondence result is completed. (Function of executing the game state transition process in the device 60) and
The special gaming state control that the control means has and causes the effect executing means to execute the effect for the special game state in the situation where the game state is the special game state is read from the first storage means and said. A special game state control means (a function of executing a jackpot control process in the display CPU 102) performed on the effect executing means by using the information transferred and stored in the second storage means, and
With
The transfer means is the special game state information used by the control means when the effect for the special game state is executed after the game rotation operation is completed, or when the effect for the special game state is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G18, characterized in that the game is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means in a situation where the game rotation operation is performed. ..

According to the feature G19, when the effect for the special game state is executed after the game turn operation is completed, the special game state information is transferred to the second storage means in the situation where the game turn operation is performed. Is completed, it is possible to smoothly shift to the production for the special game state after the game rotation operation is completed.

Each invention of the feature G group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in memory selection is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the higher the processing speed, the higher the cost.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G19, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, and the features F1. A configuration limited to any one of ~ F18, the following features H1 to H12, and the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
A second storage means that stores the information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer means (transfer means) that reads specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. A function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 of the VDP 105, a write control unit 121), and
With
The control means executes the specific control by using the specific information stored in the second storage means.
When the power supply is started, the transfer means reads out a plurality of types of specific information from the first storage means and stores the plurality of types of specific information in the second storage means, and stores the plurality of specific information in the second storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of specific information is transferred to the second storage means according to a predetermined priority order.

According to the feature H1, by executing the specific control using the specific information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened. Specific control can be executed smoothly. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of specific information is transferred to the second storage means when the power supply is started, the plurality of transfer information is transferred according to a predetermined priority, so that the specific information having a high priority is transferred. With the ability to complete the transfer of the data at an early stage, it is possible to quickly shift to a state in which the specific control having a high priority can be smoothly executed.

In "power supply start", in a configuration provided with a supply unit that receives operating power from a commercial power source and supplies operating power to the electrical equipment of the game machine, the supply of operating power from the supply unit is started. Includes the configuration. This also applies to the following.

Further, the "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature H2. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen and display control by the control means is provided.
The plurality of specific information includes predetermined information used by the control means when displaying a predetermined image on the display screen, and the amount of information is set to be smaller than the predetermined information and is initially set on the display screen. It includes the initial correspondence information used by the control means when displaying the correspondence image.
When the power supply is started, the transfer means transfers the initial correspondence information before the transfer of the predetermined information, and in a situation where the initial correspondence image is displayed on the display screen, the predetermined correspondence means. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that it transfers information.

According to the feature H2, even in a situation where the transfer of the predetermined information to the second storage means is not completed and the predetermined image cannot be displayed on the display screen by using the predetermined information, the display screen is displayed. The initial corresponding image will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that it is not possible to inspect whether or not the display means is normal after the start of supplying the operating power to the control means until the predetermined image is displayed. ..

Further, since the initial correspondence information for displaying the initial correspondence image has a smaller capacity than the predetermined information, even if the initial correspondence information is transferred prior to the transfer of the predetermined information, the transfer of the predetermined information is completed. Time will not be extremely slow.

Feature H3. The predetermined image is a standby image displayed in a situation where the effect image is not displayed on the display screen, and the predetermined information is standby information used by the control means when displaying the standby image. The gaming machine according to the feature H2, which is characterized by being.

By having the configuration of the above feature H2, the initial corresponding image is displayed after the start of power supply until the standby image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that it is not possible to inspect whether the display means is normal or not until the standby image is displayed after the start of supplying the operating power to the control means. it can.

Feature H4. The standby image is an image in which a pattern is displayed on the background image, and a plurality of types of display modes are set depending on the difference in the combination of the background image and the pattern.
As the standby information, the first storage means includes background information used by the control means when displaying the background image and pattern information used by the control means when displaying the pattern. I remember
The transfer means is used by the control means when displaying background information and pattern information that enable display of a standby image in a reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes in another display mode. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the information is transferred to the second storage means in preference to the information.

According to the feature H4, the display modes can be diversified by setting a plurality of types of display modes. In this case, among the plurality of types of display modes, the background information and the pattern information that enable the display of the standby image in the reference display mode are transferred in preference to the information used when displaying the other display modes. Will be done. As a result, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the transfer of one of the background information and the pattern information, which is set to a plurality of types, is completed and the transfer of the other is started, the standby image can be displayed. The time can be shortened.

Feature H5. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen and display control by the control means is provided.
The specific information includes standby information used by the control means when displaying a standby image in a situation where the effect image is not displayed on the display screen.
The standby image is an image in which a pattern is displayed on the background image, and a plurality of types of display modes are set depending on the difference in the combination of the background image and the pattern.
The standby information includes background information used by the control means when displaying the background image and pattern information used by the control means when displaying the pattern.
The transfer means is used by the control means when displaying background information and pattern information that enable display of a standby image in a reference display mode among the plurality of types of display modes in another display mode. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the information is transferred to the second storage means in preference to the information.

According to the feature H5, the display modes can be diversified by setting a plurality of types of display modes. In this case, among the plurality of types of display modes, the background information and the pattern information that enable the variable display of the normal pattern by the reference display mode are transferred with priority over the information used when displaying the other display modes. Will be done. As a result, for example, after all of the background information and the pattern information for which a plurality of types are set have been transferred, the normal pattern can be displayed in a variable manner as compared with the configuration in which the transfer of the other is started. The time can be shortened.

Feature H6. The notification means controlled by the control means and the notification means
Anomaly determination means (a function to execute read processing for abnormality monitoring in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred, and
With
The plurality of specific information includes abnormality information used by the control means when the notification means executes abnormality notification based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means. It is different from the abnormal information and includes different specific information used when executing a predetermined control in the control means.
The transfer means according to any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that when the power supply is started, the transfer of the abnormal information is performed before the transfer of the different specific information. Game machine.

According to the feature H6, since the priority of the abnormality information is set high, the transition to the state where the abnormality notification can be performed can be performed at an early stage.

Feature H7. A display means having a display screen (design display device 31) and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
With
The control means starts the variation display of the normal pattern prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and at the same time, the grant determination means of the grant determination means. The display control for game rounds, which is a stop result corresponding to the determination result and ends the variable display of the normal pattern, is read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means to use the stored information. This is done for the display means.
Further, the plurality of specific information may include
The start variation display information used by the control means when starting the variation display of the normal pattern, and
Simple information with a smaller amount of information than the start fluctuation display information,
Is included,
When the power supply is started, the transfer means transfers the simple information before the transfer of the start variation display information.
When the start condition of the game round is satisfied in the situation where the start variation display information is not stored in the second storage means and the simple information is stored, the start variation display information is stored in the second storage means. It is provided with a simple display control means (a function of executing a variation start process by a simple symbol and a variable processing process by a simple symbol in the display CPU 102) for performing a simple display on the display screen by using the simple information. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6.

According to the feature H7, by using the start variation display information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the variation display of the normal pattern is started, so that the variation display of the normal pattern is smoothly started. Can be made to. In addition, by transferring the start variation display information when the power supply is started, it is possible to quickly shift to a state in which the variation display of the normal pattern can be performed.

In this case, if a situation occurs in which the display means cannot normally display the variation of the pattern, such as the transfer of the start variation display information is not in time for the establishment of the start condition of the game round, the determination condition is satisfied. Despite this, there is concern that the player may be confused that the establishment of the judgment condition has been invalidated. On the other hand, by performing the simple display, the player recognizes that the establishment of the determination condition is not invalidated in the situation where the normal pattern variation display cannot be performed even though the determination condition is satisfied. Will be done. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the display means cannot normally perform variable display of the pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused that the establishment of the judgment condition may have been invalidated. ..

In addition, since the simple information used for the simple display has a smaller storage capacity than the start fluctuation display information, it is possible to shorten the time until the transfer of the simple display is completed, and the start fluctuation display can be shortened. Even if the simple information is transferred before the information, it is possible to prevent the transfer of the start variation display information from being completed extremely late.

Feature H8. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
A second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer means (data group in the VDP side RAM 108 of the VDP 105) that reads specific information from the first storage means and stores the read specific information in the second storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition. Function to transfer, write control unit 121),
With
The control means executes the specific control by using the specific information stored in the second storage means.
Further, the regulation means (step S804 in the display CPU 102) that prevents the control means from executing the specific control from the time when the special condition is satisfied until the specific information is stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine characterized by having a process, a process of step S807, a function of executing a variation start process using a simple symbol, and a function during fluctuation using a simple symbol).

According to the feature H8, by executing the specific control using the specific information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened. Therefore, the specific control can be smoothly executed. In this case, in a configuration in which the specific control is executed after the special condition is satisfied, it is not necessary to execute the specific control in the control means from the time when the special condition is satisfied until the specific information is stored in the second storage means. By doing so, the effect of shortening the time required for the specific control can be surely exhibited.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature H9. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (display CPU 102) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means after the power supply is started. In a gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a process related to a drawing instruction and a function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
A second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
Based on the start of power supply, the transfer means (transfers the data group to the VDP side RAM 108 in the VDP 105) that reads the specific information from the first storage means and stores the read specific information in the second storage means. Function, write control unit 121),
With
The control means executes the specific control by using the specific information stored in the second storage means.
Further, a regulatory means (display) that prevents the control means from executing the specific control from the start of supplying the operating power to the control means until the specific information is stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the CPU 102 includes a function of step S804, a process of step S807, a variation start process using a simple symbol, and a function during fluctuation using a simple symbol).

According to the feature H9, by executing the specific control using the specific information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened. Therefore, the specific control can be smoothly executed. In this case, in a configuration in which the specific control is executed after the power supply is started, it is necessary to execute the specific control in the control means from the start of the power supply until the specific information is stored in the second storage means. By eliminating the problem, the effect of shortening the time required for the specific control can be surely exhibited.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature H10. The regulatory means is such that it is not necessary to execute the specific control in the control means from the start of the power supply until the start period elapses.
The transfer means is characterized in that the specific information is read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means from the start of the power supply to the elapse of the start time period. Features The gaming machine according to H9.

According to the feature H10, since the specific information is transferred to the second storage means from the start of the power supply to the elapse of the start time period, the effect of shortening the time required for the specific control is surely exhibited. be able to.

Features H11. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen is provided, and the control means uses the specific information read from the first storage means and stored in the second storage means as the specific control. Controls the display of a specific image on the display screen.
The regulation means is an initial correspondence control means (main processing in the display CPU 102) for displaying an initial correspondence image (inspection image, initial display image) on the display screen from the start of power supply until at least the start time period elapses. The gaming machine according to the feature H10, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature H11, even in a situation where the transfer of the specific information to the second storage means is not completed and the specific image by using the specific information cannot be displayed on the display screen, the display screen is displayed. The initial corresponding image will be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as the inability to inspect whether or not the display means is normal after the start of power supply until the specific image is displayed.

Feature H12. A display means having a display screen (design display device 31) and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 60) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and
The privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process in the main control device 60) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result.
With
The control means is read from the first storage means and read from the second storage means prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. By using the information transferred to and stored in the means, the normal variation display is started, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is set, and the variation display of the normal pattern is terminated. It is provided with a normal display control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing by the normal symbol and the fluctuation processing by the normal symbol in the display CPU 102) that controls the display of the display means.
The specific information includes start variation display information (usually) used by the normal display control means when displaying a start variation display in a range from the start timing to at least a specific period in the variation display of the normal pattern on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of features H9 to H11, characterized in that a design data group and each background data group) are included.

According to the feature H12, by using the start variation display information transferred from the first storage means to the second storage means, the control for the start variation display in the variation display of the normal pattern is executed, so that the variation display is performed. It is possible to shorten the time from the establishment of the condition for starting the pattern to the start of the variable display of the normal pattern. Further, by providing the configuration of the above feature D2, it is not necessary to execute the specific control in the control means from the start of the supply of the operating power to the storage of the start variation display information in the second storage means. By setting the setting to, the effect of shortening the time from the establishment of the condition for starting the variable display to the start of the variable display of the normal pattern can be surely exhibited.

Each invention of the above-mentioned feature H group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in memory selection is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the higher the processing speed, the higher the cost.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features H1 to H12, the above features A1 to A19, the above features B1 to B11, the above features C1 to C26, the above features D1 to D19, the above features E1 to E15, and the above features F1. ~ F18, the above features G1 to G19, and any one of the following features I1 to I4 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A first storage means (character ROM 106) that stores information in advance and a control means (function that executes a process related to a drawing instruction in the display CPU 102) that executes control based on the information stored in the first storage means. , A function of executing a process of displaying an image on the symbol display device 31 in the VDP 105).
A second storage means (bridge-side RAM 107) that stores the information read from the first storage means and has a speed required to read the information faster than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer means (transfer means) that reads specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and stores it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. A function of transferring a data group to the VDP side RAM 108 of the VDP 105, a write control unit 121), and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means executes the specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature I1, the specific information is stored in the second storage means, which is faster than the speed required for reading the information from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. The control means is configured to execute specific control using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform.

Feature I2. A command means (display CPU 102) for giving an execution instruction of the specific control to the control means is provided.
The second storage means has a plurality of areas in which information is stored, and has a plurality of areas.
When the command means gives an execution instruction of the specific control to the control means, in which area of the second storage means the specific information used for executing the specific control is stored. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the information of the above is provided to the control means.

According to the feature I2, the control means can grasp in which area of the second storage means the specific information is stored based on the information provided by the command means. As a result, it is not necessary for the control means to know in advance in which area the second specific information is stored with respect to the timing of receiving the execution instruction of the specific control, and the processing load of the control means is reduced. Is planned.

Feature I3. The command means stores information on which area of the second storage means the specific information is stored when the specific information is transferred to the second storage means by the transfer means. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that.

According to the feature I3, it is possible for the command means to grasp in which area of the second storage means the specific information is stored.

Feature I4. The command means gives an execution instruction of the specific control to the control means, gives a transfer instruction of the specific information to the transfer means, and further gives a transfer instruction of the specific information to the transfer means. The gaming machine according to feature I2 or I3, wherein when a transfer instruction is given, information on a transfer destination area of the specific information in a plurality of areas of the second storage means is provided to the transfer means. ..

According to the feature I4, the transfer means and the control means are integrated by the command means, so that the transfer timing of the information to the second storage means by the transfer means and the read timing of the information from the second storage means by the control means Can be adjusted well. Further, the command means for giving the transfer instruction and the execution instruction provides the transfer means with the information of the transfer destination area of the specific information, and also provides the control means with the information of which area the specific information is stored in. provide. As a result, the configuration of the control means and the transfer means can be simplified. On the other hand, since the command means controls the transfer timing of the specific information and the execution timing of the specific control, the information of the transfer destination of the specific information is provided to the transfer means and the specific information is provided to the control means. Even if the configuration is such that the information of the reading source is provided, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the command means from becoming extremely complicated.

The invention of the feature I group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. ..

It is known that the above-mentioned game machine is equipped with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data on the display screen is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Become. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, the degree of attention to the images is increased, and the degree of attention to the game is increased accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in memory selection is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the higher the processing speed, the higher the cost.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I4, the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C26, the features D1 to D19, the features E1 to E15, and the features F1. ~ F18, the above-mentioned features G1 to G19, and the above-mentioned features H1 to H12 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Further, in each feature of the feature A group to the feature I group, the "predetermined determination condition" is reserved based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion provided in the game area. It includes the configuration that the information has been acquired. Further, the configuration includes a configuration in which the starting operation means is operated in a state where a predetermined number of game media are accepted.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied are shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Design display device, 58 ... Production operation device, 60 ... Main control device, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... Display CPU, 105 ... VDP, 106 ... Character ROM as first storage means, 107 ... Bridge side RAM as a second storage means, 108 ... VDP side RAM as a separate storage means, 109 ... Bridge LSI as a relay unit, 121 ... Write control unit, 123 ... Cache buffer as an intermediate storage means, 171 ... 1st bridge side RAM, 172 ... 2nd bridge side RAM, 173 ... Input / output driver circuit as switching means, 212 ... Main display unit.

Claims (1)

Directing execution means and
The first storage means that stores information in advance,
A control means for executing a control for executing an effect by the effect executing means based on the information stored in the first storage means, and a control means for executing the effect.
In a game machine equipped with
The first storage means stores arbitrary information used for executing arbitrary response control in the control means when a specific event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a specific situation.
The game machine includes a transfer means for storing arbitrary information read from the first storage means with respect to a second storage means whose speed required for reading information is faster than when reading from the first storage means.
The second storage means stores and retains the optional information when the situation in which the specific event can occur continues after the optional information is transferred.
When the specific event occurs, the control means executes the arbitrary response control using the optional information stored in the second storage means.
The game machine reads specific information used when the control means executes a specific control different from the arbitrary correspondence control from the first storage means, and stores the optional information of the second storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an overwriting means for overwriting an area including a part of the area.

Images